ProtaStructure 2016

Welcome to ProtaStructure Help ProtaStructure is a dedicated analysis, design and drafting solution for reinforced concrete building structures. Detailed calculations, material quantities, structural layout plans, beam and slab elevations and column schedules are all produced automatically from one central model.

Main Topics 

Introduction



Project Management



Settings and Parameters



Import and Export



Graphic Editor Basics



Structural Modelling



Building Parameters, Loading and Materials



Building Analysis



Analysis and Design of Slabs



FE Analysis of Floors



FE Analysis of Foundations



Column and Wall Design



Beam Section Design



Foundation Modelling and Design



Reports and Quantity Extraction



Frequently Asked Questions

Introduction ProtaStructure is a structural analysis, design and drafting program developed for the design of building systems. The program consists of several modules for performing the following tasks: 

3-D Analysis of the structural model of the building



Column, Wall and Beam Reinforcement Design



Column, Wall and Beam Detailing



Foundation Design



Analysis and Design of Stairs



Concrete and Formwork Quantity Extractions

The analysis module has been specifically developed to model building type structures. The integrated Graphic Editor accelerates the model creation process, minimising possible user errors and thus yields a more reliable design. ProtaStructure covers the general characteristics of a building system which can be summarised as follows: 

Building geometry generally consists of horizontal (or inclined) beams and vertical (or battered) columns.



Most of the beams and columns in the model have similar section properties. Therefore, they can be grouped into different types and size of the data input files can be shrunk significantly. It is possible to model all type of column sections (with or without holes).



Slabs with relatively higher in-plane stiffnesses, are utilised to form separate or complete rigid diaphragms at the same floor level.



Vertical loads (dead and imposed loadings) and floor level horizontal loads (wind and earthquake or notional horizontal loads) act to the model. For special cases, individual columns or walls may be exposed to nodal loading (force and moment) in all directions. Besides these, direction dependent dead and live loads is accounted for in the usual building systems.



Member sizes are considered during analysis phase and all effects are calculated at member faces.



Rigid zones at column-beam connections can be modelled in detail together with possible symmetric or asymmetric hinges.



Wall members have a significant effect on building behaviour. Therefore, care should be taken to model walls accurately. Walls can be analysed as mid-pier or finite element shell.

Most of engineers’ time is spent checking the output reports and finding member results in the analysis outputs. Analysis results generated by ProtaStructure’s Analysis Module are summarised and transferred automatically to design modules after the analysis stage. ProtaStructure includes the code of practice requirements for each supported region. In all stages, necessary checks are carried out automatically by the program. ProtaStructure should only be used by Structural Engineers who have considerable knowledge of: 

Codes of practice and regulations used in their region



Analysis and design of building type structures

ProtaStructure has been tested on numerous structural models before being released. However, the user is the sole person responsible for the results generated by the program. The user must therefore exercise due diligence and check the program output thoroughly. Related Articles: Welcome to ProtaStructure Help

Project Management A structure modelled in ProtaStructure is saved with its related settings and parameters as a “Project”. Once you have a project open, ProtaStructure’s automatic backup system can periodically make a copy of it to prevent accidental loss of data. Open projects can be archived at any stage - the resulting zip file being an efficient format for transferring the project to other computers. These and other project management topics are explained in detail in the following sections.

Open Project Each time you load ProtaStructure, the “Open Project” form isopen displayed, allowing you to open an existing project, or start a new project, (in which case the Settings Center form is displayed). The project to be opened can be selected using the project list which shows all the existing projects in the current data folder. If you press the “OK” button having selected an existing project, the selected project will be loaded to the Graphic Editor. If you press “Delete Project” the currently selected project will be permanently deleted. At any time, you can also open an existing project using the “Open Project” option in “File” pulldown. The most recently used projects are listed at the bottom of the "File" menu. Selecting a project from this list with a different data folder will set the data folder of the selected project as current for the next "Open Project" operation

New Project If you want to create a new project, you can click the “New Project” button on the “Open Project” form and type-in the “Project Code” that will identify the new project. The Project Code can be up to 80 characters in length. Each project should have a different project code. These characters should be alphanumeric.

Settings Center When you create a new project, the “Settings Control Center ” form is displayed. This form is used to rapidly establish default model parameters: design codes; analysis type; material properties; member design settings etc. Some of these settings can subsequently be accessed from the “Parameters” form option in the “Building” pulldown menu; others are accessed from the “Settings” pulldown menu. The “Settings Center” also provides a means of easily transferring settings and preferences from one project to another, e.g. beam detailing preferences for different drawing scales can be saved/retrieved from templates etc.

ProtaStructure Data File Structure ProtaStructure stores all the files of a project in a folder named after the unique Project Code. Each project folder is created under a parent folder called the ProtaStructure “Data Folder”. There can be more than one data folder for grouping the different projects.

ProtaStructure Data Folders Arrangement

You can change the current ProtaStructure Data Folder by clicking the “Data Folder” button on the “Open Project” form. Only when the correct “Data Folder” is selected will the project be listed and can be opened. TIP: If you are a new user, for simplicity, use just one data folder for all projects.

Related Articles : Managing Project Model via File Menu General Settings

Managing Project Model via File Menu Once a project is started, project management can be done via the the “File” pulldown at the top menu. In addition to “New Project” & “Open Project, the following are the available project tools :

Save Project As You can create a copy of the active project using the “Save Project As” option in “File” pulldown. A copy of the active project with the provided project code will be created and set as the active project. By modifying the "Data Folder" in the "Save Project As" dialog you can save the new project to a different data folder location. Note that, when Data Folder is modified, it will be set as current for the next "Open Project" operation.

Archiving the Project Files with Compression In order to create an archive of the project data and/or output files using standard ZIP compression format, you can use "Archive Project" from the "File" pulldown. After selecting the file groups to be included in the archive you can use the "Start" button to create the ZIP file or press the "Cancel" button to unload the form.

Archived files can be retrieved at a later date using Load Project From Archive. "Project Archive" comprises the following options: File Groups The project files are grouped in this section in order to facilitate the selection of files to be included in the archive. Files to be included in the archive can be selected by checking the groups in this part. Zip File Name The name of the ZIP file to be created must be included here. By default, the name of this file is set identical to the project code. Zip File Folder The name of the folder to save the ZIP file must be selected using this field. By default, the archive file is saved to the standard data directory. Files to be Zipped Selected files will be listed in this section based on the checked file groups.

Load Project From Archive You can use the "Load Project from Archive…" selection from the "File" pulldown to unzip a previously archived project. The selected archive file is unzipped from its source location to create a project in the current data folder. The project can then be opened in the usual way by going to “Open Project”.

Backup and AutoSave Backups and AutoSaves of the project can both be activated from the “Save” tab of "General Settings" which is located on the "Settings" pulldown menu. Backup Structural Model By checking the "Backup Structural Model" option you are electing to automatically backup the old files for a project each time you manually save it. You can specify up to a maximum of 5 backups to be retained for each project – (when the maximum is reached, the next backup created overwrites the oldest previous backup file). Backup files can be retrieved using Open Previous Backup AutoSave By setting a non-zero "Automatic Save Interval" you can have the program automatically save the project at regular intervals while you are working on it.

Open Previous Backup You can use the "Open Previous Backup" selection from the "File" pulldown to unzip a previous backup of the current project. A list of the backups, (including the time each backup was made and its model revision number) is displayed.

Caution: If you choose to retrieve one of the backup files, the existing model is replaced by a version of the model as it was at the time the backup was made.

Project Properties Simple statistics about the project (such as total number of columns, beams, slabs etc) can be seen by using “Project Properties” option in “File” pulldown. Model revision numbers can also be assigned here and revision notes added.

Title Information If you fill out the fields in the “Title” page, this information will be shown at the top of each output report page.

Licence Your licence information will be displayed here.

Company Logo You can choose you company logo in one of bmp, jpg, gif or png formats. The logo will be displayed in design report headers.

Project Title A title describing the project can be entered in this field.

Calculated by Name of the design engineer can be entered in this field.

Controlled by Name of the checking engineer can be entered in this field.

Project No You can enter an alphanumeric project number to your project in this field.

Project Date Date of the project can be given in this field. Note: The project parameters you specify will automatically be reloaded the next time you start a new project.

Revision Notes You can record notes here concerning what has been completed and what you still need to do. You can also assign a model revision number here.

Project Statistics Charts are used to display various project statistics. Click the “Text File” button to output the same data in tabular format. Related Articles :

Project Management General Settings

Settings and Parameters (Contents) ProtaStructure has a very flexible architecture with settings that can be adjusted to suit your particular way of working. To facilitate access, settings affecting all parts of the program have been centralised in the Settings and Parameters Manager, from where it is also possible to transfer settings between projects and to save preferred settings as templates. Related settings are grouped together on the “Settings” menu under specific headings: 

General settings control the system based settings



Unit and Format settings control the units and number of decimal places used.



Member and Steel bar label settings can be used to control the format and display of member and steel bar labels



Display settings control the general display and graphic settings of graphical editor namely colors, background grid, line type and object snap.



Layer settings control the display of information in the Form Plan.



Toolbars on the Graphic Editor, can be customized by the “Toolbar Customize” form.



Column Design Settings control the design parameters, detailing and steel bar selection methods for columns and walls.



Beam Design Settings control the design parameters, detailing, curtailment and steel bar selection methods for beams, ribs and foundation beams.



Slab Design Settings control the design parameters and detailing for slabs.



Foundation Design Settings control the design parameters and detailing for pad footing and pile foundation.

Settings and Parameter Manager

The “Settings Center” is displayed by selecting “Settings and Parameters Manager” from the “Settings” pulldown menu. It can be used to: 1. Establish the initial settings in a new project 2. Review and modify settings in the current project 3. Swap settings between projects 4. Save preferred settings as templates Settings are divided into two main categories in ProtaStructure: 1. System based settings 2. Project based settings System based settings can be displayed by selecting “General Settings” under the “Settings” pulldown menu. Other settings are considered as project based settings and can be shared between projects.

To establish the initial settings in a new project

Whenever you create a new project the “Settings Center” form will be displayed so that initial settings can be defined by importing from another “Project” or from a “Template”. 1. Select the project or template to import from. (If you choose the former, you can navigate to a different "Data Folder" to locate the project required.) 2. Click the “Import” button. 3. All the settings from the chosen project or template are then imported. Once imported, the settings are permanently saved with the model. They can subsequently be reviewed/modified by redisplaying the “Settings Center”.

To review and modify settings You can use the “Settings Center” to review/modify all the settings in the current project. 1. Select the settings group to review. 2. Click on the “View” button at the bottom. 3. Make any changes as required.

To swap settings between projects You can use the “Settings Center” to replace settings in the current project by importing from another project or template. 1. Select the project or template to import from. 2. Choose individual setting groups to be imported, by checking the appropriate box, or boxes. Unchecked settings are retained. 3. Click the “Import” button. 4. After settings have been imported the “Current Project” text is replaced with the name of the project/template used in the import.

To save preferred settings as templates If you have adjusted the settings (possibly to establish a set of company defaults) you can select to “Export” them permanently to a template so that they can be easily applied to future projects. 1. Open the project that contains the settings to be exported. 2. Display the “Settings Center”. 3. Click the “Select All” button if all the settings are to be exported. Alternatively, select the individual setting groups to be exported by checking the appropriate boxes. 4. If you want to overwrite the settings in an existing template, ensure the “Template” option is selected, and then select the template name from the list on the left.

5. Alternatively, if you want to create a new template, ensure the “Template” option is selected. Click the “New Template” button and type the template name in the box provided. 6. Click the “Export” button to copy the selected settings into the template.

Related Articles: Import and Export (Overview) Load Building Model (Import) External Reference Drawing (Import)

General Settings System based settings can be modified in this form. These settings may be different for another ProtaStructure installation on a different computer.

View View settings of the Graphic Editor can be controlled in the “View” page of the General Settings form.

Don’t Check Model During Member Insertion Integrity and correctness of the model is very important. A dialog is provided in Building Analysis form for checking any existing overlapping of members and stability problems. ProtaStructure can check overlapping of members during insertion as well. If this option is checked, member overlapping check is disabled during insertion.

Member Tooltip Window Options You can control the visibility and content of the member tooltip window using the options included in this section. A tooltip will only be displayed if one or more of the options in this section is checked.

Angle Step While dragging two points, “Angle Step” will be effective when “Ctrl” key is pressed. The rubber band line will snap to the multiples of the value entered in this field. For example, while dragging two points for inserting an axis, if “Angle Step” is defined as 30, then the rubber band line will snap to directions like 0, 30, 60, 90, 120 etc. This option is active during all operations requiring two points to be dragged, like axis, section and slab strip insertion.

Length Step While dragging two points, “Length Step” will be effective when “Ctrl” key is pressed. The rubber band line’s length will snap to the multiples of the value entered in this field. For example, while dragging two points for inserting an axis, if “Length Step” is defined as 1000 (with units set to millimetres), then the rubber band line’s length will snap to values like 1000, 2000, 3000 etc. This option is active during all operations requiring two points to be dragged, like axis, section and slab strip insertion.

Member Section Eccentricity Step You can modify the member eccentricity values by pressing one of the arrow keys in the keyboard when the member properties window is visible. Every time one of the arrow keys are pressed the member eccentricity value along that direction is modified by the amount provided in this field. For example, when a column is selected and the “Properties” window is visible, you can modify “e1” property by pressing left or right arrow keys, and “e2” property by pressing up or down arrow keys.

Plan View Direction (Project Based) Plans created in the Graphic Editor can be viewed from the current storey (bottom) or from the upper storey (top). If you check the “Top” option as the “Plan View Direction”, then the edges of the beams under the slab will be drawn with dash lines. If you select to view from the current storey, by checking the “Bottom” option, then the beams will be drawn using solid lines as the other members.

Save You can control the automatic save options using the fields in this tab.

Automatic Save Interval You can set the automatic save interval (in minutes) in this field.

Backup Structural Model With this option checked a backup of the Graphic Editor data files will be created in a "DataBackup" folder under the Data Folder when the project is first saved. This backup is then updated every time the "Save Project" option is invoked within the same hour. In each subsequent hour a new backup file is created when the model is saved, until the specified ‘Number of Backups to Save’ has been reached, after which point the first backup file will be overwritten.

Related Articles: Settings and Parameters Units and Format Settings Layer and Color Settings

Units and Format Settings ProtaStructure has a fully integrated unit conversion system to facilitate working with various units in different modules. For example, you may have unit of moments in “kN.m” and stresses in “N/mm 2”.

All parameters are being stored independent of the units that are being used. Therefore, at any instance, you can modify the active units without having to re-start the project. The process that creates the output reports must be repeated after modifying the units that are used in the process. For example, if you modify the unit of force from “kN” to “N”, then you have to reanalyse the structure to produce new outputs. Following are the unit groups that are used in various modules:

Editor “Length” unit that is used in the Graphic Editor drawing area can be controlled using this field. All members are expressed in the unit specified in this field.

Analysis “Force” and “Displacement” units that are used in the Building Analysis module can be controlled using these fields. All output results are expressed in the units specified in these fields. All units in this group are derived from the basic “Force” and “Displacement” units. For example, if force unit is “kN”, the displacement unit is “m”, then the unit of moments will be derived as “kNm” and the unit of inertia used in analysis will be “m4 ”.

Design Units that are used in the section design modules can be controlled using these fields. Primary units that are included in this group are “Section Dimension” and “Steel Diameter”. “Steel Spacing” and “Steel Area” will be derived from the “Section Dimension” unit. For example, if section dimension unit is “mm”, then the unit of steel area will be derived as “mm 2” and the unit of steel spacing will be “mm”.

Material

Units that are used for material properties in all modules can be controlled using these fields. All units are primary in this group. For example, when the unit of modulus of elasticity is set as “N/mm 2” then it will appear in all reports created by various modules.

The editable columns in the “Units and Format Settings” are as follows:

Field Widths Width of the format strings that will be used in report tables can be controlled using the “Field Widths” column. The values provided in this column are in number of characters units.

Number of Decimals Number of the decimal digits that will be used in report tables can be controlled using the “Number of Decimals” column. The values provided in this column are in number of characters units.

Format Control The codes provided in this table column will control the format of the values wherever they appear in the report. Available options are: 0 (Standard: F, Large: E): The values that fit in the reserve field width will be presented in standard decimal format while the ones that cannot fit are presented in exponential format. 1 (Standard: F, Large/Small: E): The values that fit in the reserve field width will be presented in standard decimal format while the ones that are too large which cannot fit or are too small that so cannot be expressed are presented in exponential format. 2 (Standard: E): All values will be presented in exponential format.

Related Articles: Settings and Parameter Manager

Layer and Color Settings Layer and color settings are controlled from here. The “Layers” form can be loaded by clicking the “Layers and Color Settings” option under the “Settings” pull down menu.



Individual layers can be switched on or off.



In the Graphic Editor, members are automatically defined in specified layers according to their member types.



Different layers for different member types help to improve the readability of the drawing.



At the same time, different layers yield to view only some of the member types by freezing the rest of them.



In the “Layer Settings Table”, you can freeze or thaw a layer by clicking the check box column at the beginning of each layer line. The layers frozen will neither show on the screen nor send to printer or plotter.



When you export a drawing to a CAD program, the names defined in the “Layer Description” column will be the layer names in the CAD environment.



Colors of the drawing elements (such as text, line, or circle), can be modified in the “Color” column. When you select a cell on the colour column of the table, a colour list will be displayed with the colour choices available.



Different line thickness values can be assigned to different layers in the “Line Width” column.



Similar to line width, different line types can be assigned to different layers. When you click a cell on the “Line Type” column, a list showing various line types will be displayed. You can use the “Line Type Scale” field in “Display Settings” dialog to define the drawing scale of the lines.



Text font and height can be modified in the “Layer Settings Table” as well. When you click a cell on the “Text Font” column, font choices will be displayed in a list.



If you want to save changes, close the “Layer Settings Table” by clicking the “OK” button.



You can search for a specific layer by typing into the serach box provided at the bottom of the layers dialog.

Member and Steel Bar Label Settings The format and display of member and steel bar labels is controlled from here.

View General controls on how the labels appear in the plan view.

Display Beam Labels in Plan If you check the “Display Beam Labels in Plan” option, then the labels will be displayed for each beam in plan views. You may occasionally like to suppress the display of the beam labels by unchecking this option.

Display Beam Dimensions in Plan If you check the “Display Beam Dimension in Plan” option, then the beam dimension texts will be displayed for each beam in plan views.

Beam Dimensions Order

Use the options in this field to determine whether beam dimensions will be written as "B x H" or "H x B". For example, when "H x B" is selected and if width (B) of the beam is "250 mm" and height (H) is "500 mm", then dimensions will be displayed "500 x 250" in the output reports and plan drawings.

Beam Label and Size Text Position Control An active beam illustration graphic exists that shows how the label will be positioned in beams. By clicking this graphics, available display options will be cycled.

Beam Label Format Field and Beam Illustration

Use Insertion Axes as Label For columns, instead of using labels showing the member number and storey, insertion axes can be used to specify the member. If you check the “Use Insertion Axes as Label” option then the labels of the two axes at the insertion point of the column will form the column label. Note that, internally a proper column label will be kept no matter if this option is checked or not.

Display Column Labels in Plan If you check the “Display Column Labels in Plan” option, then the labels will be displayed near each column in plan views. You may occasionally like to suppress the display of the column labels by unchecking this option.

Display Column Dimension in Plan If you check the “Display Column Dimension in Plan” option, then the column dimensions will be displayed near each column next to the column label in plan views.

Display Slab Labels in Plan If you check the “Display Slab Labels in Plan” option, then the labels will be displayed for each slab in plan views. You may occasionally like to suppress the display of the slab labels by unchecking this option.

Slab Label Type Control

A slab label illustration exists to the right of the “Slab Label” format definition field that shows the type of slab label that will be used. By choosing the graphics available, slab label options will be changed.

Slab Label Format Selection Picture

Slab Depth Prefix Characters You may like to display a couple of letters to the left of the slab depth text printed in the slab label block. For example, if you enter "h=" in this field, "h=150" will be displayed as the slab depth for a 150 mm depth slab in the label block.

Label to Slab Center If you check the “Label to Slab Center” option, slab labels will be displayed at the center of each slab. Otherwise, you can specify a slab corner to position for the label using the “Slab Properties”.

Lowered Slab Mark You may like to display a couple of letters to mark the lowered slabs. The characters entered in this field will be printed at the lower right corner of the slab label blocks in plan window of Graphic Editor.

Related Articles: Member and Steel bar Labels Slab Design Settings Beam Design Settings - Design & Parameters Column Design Settings - Design

Member and Steel bar Labels Member Labels Each member defined in the Graphic Editor must have a unique identifying member label. Member label formats can be modified by the user for each member group.

Type Character and Label Format A typical member label is composed of the following format specifiers: Every member group will have a different type character that X: Type identifies the group. For example, type character for columns Character may be “C” and beams may be “B”. n: MemberEach member of the same kind must have a distinct member Number number at every floor level. s: StoreyThis is the storey number that is used for defining the floor that Number the member belongs. Member labels are formed using the formats specified in the “Format” field. For example, if the beam label format is defined as “sXn” and the type character is “B”, then the label of the beam number 20 in 3rd floor will be “3B20”. Note that, a trailing character is also allowed at the end of the label to discriminate the members that have the same member number, like 1B20 and 1B20a or 1B20’.

Size Separator 

Wherever member dimensions are to be displayed in the drawings, you can set the character that will be used as separator for width and height of the rectangular sections.



For example, if the size separator is set as “x” then the dimensions of a typical beam will be displayed as “250x600”.

Steel Bar Labels Reinforcement steel bar label formatting can be customised using the parameters provided in the “Steel Bar Labels” page.

Steel Label Template By arranging the specifiers that compose the “Steel Label Template” in the “Format” field, the appearance of the bar labels can be customised. A typical steel bar label is composed of the following format specifiers: Every steel grade has its own identification character. For X: Steel Bar example, “T” is used for Grade 460 (type 2). “X” is for the type Character character of the steel grade. n: No. ofThe character “n” is the format specifier for the steel bar Steel Bars quantity. d: SteelThe character “d” is the format specifier for the steel bar Diameter diameter text. The character “s” is the format specifier for the steel bar spacing. s: Steel Spacing text will be used only in steel labels that have spacing Spacing information. The character “p” is the format specifier for the steel bar positions. The position numbers of the steel bars will be p: Bar Mark displayed separately in circles when this character is not included in the format string. Steel bar labels are formed using the format string specified in the “Format” field. For example, the label of 28 bars of 16 mm diameter Grade 460 (type 2) bars placed in 250mm centers will be displayed as “28T14-250” when the format string is set as “nXd-s”.

When the format string includes the “p” specifier as well, then the same bars with position number “45” will be labelled as “28T14-45-250” when the format string is set as “nXd-p-s”.

Bar Group Quantity Separator If there are groups of the same bars, then the number of groups will be displayed such as “2x5T14-37”. For this type of presentation, the separator character can be defined in the “Bar Group Quantity Separator” field.

Steel Spacing Separator If there is more than one spacing to be specified for the same reinforcement, then the spacing will be written next to each other separated by the “Steel Spacing Separator”.

Display Steel Bar Layer Information A steel bar in a slab can be on the top or bottom of the section. Similarly, according to its direction the same bar can be on the first or second layer from the top or the bottom. If you check the “Display Steel Bar Layer Information” option, then the position and the layer of the reinforcement will be indicated. If the reinforcement is on the top of the section, this situation will be indicated with “T”, and if it is on the bottom of the section this will be indicated with “B”. “B1” shows that the reinforcement is in the first layer from the bottom of the section, and similarly “T1” shows that the reinforcement is in the first layer from the top of the section.

Steel Bar Positions If you check the “Display Steel Bar Layer Information” option, in the “Slab RBar Layer Text Separator” field, you can also specify the text separator to be used in the label

Slab Rbar Layer Text Separator This field is used in conjunction with the “Display Steel Bar Layer Information” option. When the former option is checked you can select the character to be used to separate the steel bar layer text from the steel bar label text. If you enter a “(“ character in this field, a “)” character is automatically added to the end of the label.

Related Articles: Member and Steel Bar Label Settings Layer and Color Settings

Display Settings Colors General display and graphics settings for the graphic editor are set from here.

Colors You can choose between “Solid” or “Linear Gradient” background styles. Background bottom color will be used for gradient transition. “Selection Color” is used to paint the selected members in user interface. “Highlight Color” is used to emphasis a member when mouse cursor is on it. When a member is selected or highlighted, their insertion line and insertion points will automatically be shown on the screen. You can customize these colors by changing “Insertion Point Color” and “Insertion Line Color”. Insertion line thickness can also be changed.

Displaying Axis Labels Around the Plan View Axis labels are automatically displayed around the plan window if the crosses the window boundaries. You can select the axis label text color to using the "Axis Indicator Color" button.

Grids ProtaStructure graphical user interface makes use of a smart customizable grid which automatically shrinks or expands as the model boundaries change. The automatic grid also facilitates a “Grid Snap” feature which greatly enhances the modelling process.

Grid Step Minor grid spacing can be specified by the user in corresponding modelling units.

Major Lines at every This option specifies the number of minor grids at which a major line will be displayed.

Minor and major grid line colors Grid colors can be customized using the color picker controls on the dialog.

Automatic Grid in New Views You can turn on or off the automatic display of the grid system in new views by using this toggle.

Line Type

Line Type Scale Different linetypes displayed on the graphical user interface can be scaled by this factor. Smaller values will result in finer (smaller) display of linetypes.

Related Articles: Member and Steel Bar Label Settings Member and Steel bar Labels

Toolbar Customize Toolbars on the Graphic Editor, can be customized by the “Toolbar Customize” form. The form can be loaded by clicking the “Toolbar Customize” option either under the “Settings” pull down menu or from the toolbar. You can also right click any toolbar to load the Customization form.

By using “Toolbar Customize” you can create a new toolbar or modify an existing one. Any modification and customisation made in the toolbar layout is saved on exit from the program.

Column Design Settings

Design The “Settings and Parameters” form can be displayed by clicking the “Column Design Settings” option under the “Settings” pulldown menu or in the “Column Reinforcement Design” form. Column design and drafting can be easily controlled with the help of the parameters in this form.

Min Steel Percentages The parameters on this sub-page control the reinforcement selection.

Min. Column Steel 

Minimum steel percentage to be used in a column is given on this page. If the steel area required in a column section is less than the minimum steel area required then the minimum steel percentage given in this field will be used automatically.

Max. Column Steel 

Maximum steel percentage that can be used in a column section is given in this field. If the required steel area in a column exceeds this value, than the section will be considered as insufficient and a warning message will be displayed.

Min. Wall Longitudinal Steel 

Minimum steel percentage to be used in walls is given using this field. If the steel area required in a wall section is less than the minimum steel area required then the minimum steel percentage given in this field will be used automatically.

Max. Wall Longitudinal Steel 

Maximum steel percentage to be used in walls is given using this field. Steel area exceeding the value provided here is not permitted.

Min. Wall Horizontal Steel 

Minimum steel percentage for horizontal steel area to be used in a wall is given on this page. If the steel area required in the horizontal direction in a wall section is less than the minimum

steel area required then the minimum steel percentage given in this field will be used automatically.

Use Plain Wall Design 

When this option is checked the program will use plain wall design (i.e. design based on no reinforcement) where it is applicable, resulting in a reduced mimimum area of steel.

Moment Capacity Tolerance 

In some cases, you may want to use less steel than required in the column sections. By introducing a percent “positive” tolerance in this field, you may accept a higher moment capacity for the concrete section and thus make the program put less steel than required. Likewise, negative values will yield greater steel areas than required.

Parameters (BS8110, CP65 & HK codes only) On this sub-page you can specify the design clause to be applied where alternatives are offered in the design code.

Bi-axial Bending Method 

The method that will be used for bi-axial bending of columns can be selected using the available option in this field.



Ultimate Strength Bi-axial Bending method will be used if "Bi-axial" is selected. Alternatively, moment combination method described in "BS8110 (Cl 3.8.4.5)" or "CP65 (Cl 3.8.4.5)" may be used.



When this option is checked, an effective moment will be calculated based on the x and y direction design moments and uni-axial bending is applied in this direction.

Design Ultimate Axial Load 

Maximum axial load that can be carried by the columns and walls in the structure can be determined using one of these options.

Related Articles: Steel Bars Selection Method Detail Drawings

Steel Bars Selection Method Selection Method On this sub-page you can specify the steel bar layout method adopted in design mode.

Fixed Bar Layout Method Program does not modify the steel bar layout in this method. Only the bar sizes are determined based on the given layout during design process. The initial bar layout is determined based on the maximum bar spacing allowed by the current concrete codes.

Bar Spacing Maximisation Method In this method, program modifies the layout so that the steel bar sizes are maximised to achieve the biggest possible spacing (within the spacing range specified in settings) between the bars.

Bar Size Minimisation Method In this method, program modifies the layout so that the steel bar spacing is minimised (within the spacing range specified in settings) to achieve the smallest possible bar sizes to be selected.

Column Confinement On this sub-page you can indicate your preference for the link pattern(s) you want to be considered in order to meet column confinement requirements when in design mode. The program will select from the considered patterns the one which best matches the number of bars and bar spacing in each direction. It will also add tie bars where they are required. For square columns and rectangular columns of reasonably equal side (b/h < 1.8) you can apply different preferences to those for rectangular columns of un-equal side b/h > 1.8). Up to four link patterns can be considered from the following list: 

Single Link (this pattern is always considered).



Double Link



Triple Link.



Cross Link

Basic Column Confinement Requirements In the BS8110 cl 3.12.7.2 requirements there are two cases to consider (EC2, CP65 and HK-2004 are similar): 1. Where bar spacing exceeds 150mm: Every bar should be restrained by the corner of a link or by a tie. 2. Where bar spacing is less than 150mm: Corner Bars should be restrained by the corner of a link or by a tie. Every alternate bar should be restrained by the corner of a link or by a tie 

The maximum vertical spacing of these links and ties is 12 times the smallest main (vert) bar diameter.



Note that the limits on the vertical spacing of containment steel are different in EC2 which allows for closer spacing near supports and increased spacing in the span.

Wall Confinement In design mode the program will attempt to satisfy the code requirements for wall confinement by adopting the link and tie pattern you choose on this sub-page. Any one of four patterns can be specified in order to satisfy the containment requirements. You can specify a particular pattern for short walls (Length/Thickness < 6) and a different one for long walls (Length/Thickness > 6). The following patterns are available: 

Wall



Wall with End Zones



Single Layer Wall



Single Layer Wall with End Zones

Max. Width for Single Layer Walls A single layer of reinforcement may be appropriate in thinner walls. You can use this setting to specify the maximum thickness of wall in which a single layer of reinforcement is to be used. The single layer may be either mesh or loose bars and it may be used in conjunction with end zone reinforcement.

Basic Wall Confinement Requirements In the BS8110 cl 3.12.7.4&5 requirements there are two cases to consider (EC2, CP65 and HK-2004 are similar): 1. When the main steel requirement < 2%, then only horizontal reinforcement is required. 2. When the main steel requirement > 2%, then additional containment ties must be introduced. 

Where bar spacing exceeds 150mm: Every bar should be restrained by the corner of a link or by a tie.



Where bar spacing is less than 150mm: Corner Bars should be restrained by the corner of a link or by a tie. Every alternate bar should be restrained by the corner of a link or by a tie

The maximum vertical spacing of these ties is twice the wall dimension or 16 times the smallest main (vert) bar diameter.

Note that the limits on the vertical spacing of containment steel are different in EC2, being 0.6 times the wall dimension or 12 times the smallest main (vert) bar diameter. The EC2 requirement in this instance seem onerous so that it may be preferable to limit main steel to 2% and adjust wall sizing if this is not adequate.

Longitudinal Steel The parameters on this sub-page control the steel bar selection in design mode.

Column Min/Max Bar Sizes The minimum and maximum longitudinal bar diameters that can be used in columns can be entered using these fields. When a bar greater than the maximum size specified here is used for any reason, then a warning message will be issued.

Wall Min/Max Bar Sizes The minimum and maximum longitudinal bar diameters that can be used in walls can be entered using these fields. When a bar greater than the maximum size specified here is used for any reason, then a warning message will be issued.

Min. Bar Spacing Minimum bar spacing that can be used in columns can be entered in this field. The value specified here should be greater and equal to the requirements stated in the codes. In cases that smaller values than "Min. Bar Spacing" is to be used, the program will automatically assume the code minimums.

Max. Bar Spacing Maximum bar spacing that can be used in columns can be entered in this field.

Steel Bar Spacing Step “Bar Spacing Step” is used in bar selection methods other than "Fixed Bar Layout Method" to increase and decrease bar spacing by the amount specified here. Smaller values used as "Bar Spacing Step" may increase the design time considerably. A typical value of "5 mm" can be used in most cases.

Use Similar Bars as Web Bars for Walls Without EndZones When this option is checked corner bars will have the same diameter as the web bars in the design of the walls without endzones.

Concrete Cover Concrete cover is measured from the outside edge of the column to outside edge of the links. If the value in this field is zero, the concrete cover will be calculated according to the requirements in the current concrete codes. When this value is modified, a message will appear that will propose modifying all the columns in the building. If a filtering option is active in the column table, the modification will affect only the filtered columns.

Links The parameters on this sub-page control the link bar selection in design mode. Layout methods can be set using the options provided in these pages. Furthermore, by using the options in “Links” page you can control the shear design, and selection of links.

Min. Link Bar Size Minimum bar size to be used for column and wall links can be defined in these fields. Greater bars sizes will be selected when necessary by the program.

Min. and Max. Link Spacing Minimum and maximum link spacing to be used in columns can be defined in this field. A greater link bar size will be selected when the minimum link spacing is encountered during shear design.

Link Spacing Step Link spacing values will be rounded up according to the “Link Spacing Step”. For example, if the Link Spacing Step is “25 mm”, spacing values calculated will be rounded up as 150, 175, 200-mm etc. Also, while selecting the proper link spacing, the program increments the spacing by the “Link Spacing Step” defined in this field.

Create Support Regions for Links If you check the “Create Support Regions for Links” option, link spacing for the supports and the span are calculated separately. In order to use same spacing for both span and supports, you must uncheck this checkbox.

Provide Links Through Beam Depth If this field is checked, links in support regions will continue to be used inside the beam-column intersection (joint) in order to provide better confinement and shear resistance.

Mesh Steel The parameters on this sub-page control the mesh bar selection in design mode.

Use Loose Bars When Mesh Size Not Sufficient In the cases where design cannot be done with the largest mesh in the mesh library for a particular wall, program will automatically switch to loose bar pattern if this field is checked. User, in further design phases, can specify program to revert and “try using mesh steel” during batch mode design if loose bar pattern is automatically used.

Min. Wall Length for Mesh Steel If wall length is shorter than the value entered to this field then mesh steel would not be used in the design.

Mesh Width Standard mesh panel width values can be entered in this field. Mesh panels will be drawn and cut where necessary according to the value entered here. If special production meshes or single mesh panels are used through the wall length, A value of “0” must be entered. Cut meshes are overlapped with a distance specified in “Mesh Lap/Anchorage Length” field.

Mesh Lap/ Anchorage Length If a standard mesh width is specified in “Mesh Width” field, then mesh panels will be used at this width. Adjacent meshes will be lapped using the value entered in “Mesh Lap/Anchorage Length” field. Mesh panels will also be extended into wall end zones using this value.

Extend Mesh Steel along the Length of EndZone

If checked, mesh panels will be extended and drawn through the length of the wall end zone. Mesh bars inside the end zone are ignored during the design calculations.

Related Articles: Design Detail Drawings

Detail Drawings General General parameters controlling the column drawings can be set using the options provided on this subpage.

Print Column Links Segment Lengths Column links can be drawn either with all the segment lengths printed or with only the total length. If you check the “Print Column Links Segment Lengths” option, then all the segment lengths of the links will be displayed on the drawing.

Column Bars Bob Length

Bob length for longitudinal reinforcement in the column application plan is controlled by using this field.

Column Bars Kicker Depth In each storey level, column longitudinal bars start in a small distance above the slab level. This distance can be defined as the “Column Bars Kicker Depth” field.

Mesh Steel Kicker Depth In order to account for the kicker concrete in tunnel form constructions, “Mesh Steel Kicker Depth” value can be entered in this field. Mesh panels will be offset from the bottom of the wall by an amount of kicker depth and drawn accordingly.

Width of Links Block in Column Application Plan All link details for all columns/walls can be expanded automatically in batch mode next to the drawing sheet in column application plan. This field determines the width to be allocated for link details drawing block.

Single Link Type (Columns and Walls) You can use the available options in this field for the type of the single links that will be plotted in columns and walls.

Column Details Further parameters controlling the column drawings can be set using the options provided on this subpage.

Column Detail Drawings Scale You can enter the scale factor that will be used in the column detail drawings. This Drawing Scale will only affect the size of the text entities and the special marks.

Display Steel Bars to the Right of the Detail The steel bars are redrawn to the right of the detail if this field is checked.

Print Steel Bar Detail Lengths The steel bar detail lengths will be added to the detail if this field is checked.

Print Steel Bar Total Lengths The steel bar total lengths will be added to the detail if this field is checked.

Display Section Below the Detail The section is added below the detail if this field is checked.

Foundation Penetration Depth of Links The depth which the links are shown penetrating into the foundation can be set using this field.

Column Schedule Parameters controlling the column schedule can be set using the options provided on this subpage.

Column Schedule Drawing Scale You can enter the scale factor that will be used in the column schedules. This Drawing Scale will only affect the size of the text entities and the special marks.

Draw Column Insertion Axis Column insertion axes will be drawn when this field is checked.

Dimension Column Insertion Axes Column insertion axis dimensions will be drawn if this field is checked.

Dimension Column Section Column section dimensions will be drawn if this field is checked.

Center Column Labels and Texts in Cell The justification of the text objects in a schedule cell can be set using this field. Column labels and steel bar texts will be centred if this field is checked. Otherwise, all texts will be left justified.

Draw Separator Lines between Label Texts Horizontal separator lines will be drawn between the text objects if this field is checked.

Print Column Insertion Axis Labels The insertion axes of the columns will be printed below the schedule if this field is checked.

Draw Column Vertical Separator Lines Vertical separator lines will be drawn between the columns if this option is checked.

Do Not Include the Unselected Storeys in the Table You can select the storey to be included in the schedule using the "Storeys" list in the "Column Schedule" dialog. If this option is checked, the unselected storeys between the first and storey entered in the "Topmost Storey in the Sheet" field will not be drawn in the schedule.

Print Column Labels below the Table If this option is checked, the label of the bottom column will be printed below the schedule. Column labels will be included in every cell if this option is not checked.

Print Storey Labels above the Column If this option is checked, the storey labels will be printed above the row. The storey labels will be printed inside the related row (in the leftmost cell) if this option is not checked.

Similar Storey Note

You can enter the string that will be displayed for annotating the columns that are similar as the ones below. "AS BELOW" is provided as default in this field.

Related Articles: Design Steel Bars Selection Method

Beam Design Settings

Design & Parameters You can display the “Setting and Parameters” form by using the “Beam Design Settings” option under the “Settings” pulldown menu or in the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” module. Most of the parameters defined in this section are stored separately for storey beams, rib beams and foundation beams.

Design Basic design settings are controlled on this page.

Design Shear Force Control Based on the selection made here, design shear force may be calculated at “Column Face” or at a “d” distance from column face. Here, “d” is the effective depth of the beam.

Section Effective Depth Calculation Effective depth of beam section will be calculated using one of the methods provided in this field. When “Centre of Gravity of Steel Bars” field is checked, the section effective depth will be determined based on the centre of gravity of the tension bars. In this method, the contribution of each tension bar in the section will be considered separately. Alternatively, a more conservative method, "Centre of Gravity of Layers" field may be checked. The calculation of section effective depth is based on the average of the distances of the steel bar layers.

Design Using Rectangular Section Consideration of flanges during reinforced concrete design of beam section especially in span regions may yield more economical results. You may check this option to ignore the effect of flanges and use rectangular beam section in all design calculations.

Batch Mode Design Settings Using the options provided in this section, control the "Batch Mode" behaviour of the Beam Design Module. When "Don't Select Bars if b-required > bw" option is checked, then steel bars will not be selected during batch mode when bars do not fit in the beam section. Similarly, when “Don't Select Bars if Deflection Check Fails” option is checked, then steel bars will not be selected during batch mode when any of the beams in the axis does not satisfy the deflection requirements with the calculated steel. For such beams, you can use "Interactive Design" to manually increase the supplied steel until the deflection check is satisfied.

Ignorable Forces Ignorable force values during the design process of the beams in the structure will be entered into these fields. If smaller internal forces are obtained with respect to these values, then these forces will be ignored by the program.

Beam Bottom/Top Edge Concrete Covers You can enter the nominal concrete covers to be used at the bottom and top edges of the beams for the calculation of the effective depth of the section. These values are measured from the edge of the beam to the outer edge of the links. Note: When this field is “0” then the calculated nominal cover based on the current concrete codes of practices will be used.

Section Side Concrete Cover

You can enter the nominal concrete covers to be used at the sides of the beam section for the calculation of the spacing of the bars. These values are measured from the edge of the beam to the outer edge of the links.

Beam Ends Concrete Cover You can enter the nominal concrete covers to be used at the ends of the beam section for the curtailment of the bars. These values are measured from the edge of the beam to the centre of the bars.

Parameters This page is used to set limits on the ranges and spacings of bars used in the design.

Min. Beam Steel Diameter You can set the minimum allowable (or desirable) steel bar size using this input field. A smaller bar size will not be used during steel bar selection. Note that, if you modify this section, you have to re-select the steel bars to reflect the changes.

Max. Beam Steel Diameter

You can set the maximum allowable (or desirable) steel bar size using this input field. A bigger bar size will not be used during steel bar selection.

Web Steel (Side Bars) Diameter Minimum diameter that will be used for the side bars can be defined in this field.

Min. Number of Hanger Bars Minimum number of hanger bars can be defined in this field. Note that, hanger bars will be used only in the steel patterns that make use of this bar group.

Min. Hanger Bar Diameter Minimum diameter of hanger bars can be defined in this field. Note that, hanger bars will be used only in the steel patterns that make use of this bar group.

Minimum Top and Bottom Steel Spacing You can set the minimum desirable steel bar spacing using this input field. The value entered in this field must be equal or greater than the minimum allowable spacing value specified in the active reinforcement code. If you use a bigger value than the minimum requirements of the codes, the code values may still be used by the program whenever necessary.

Maximum Tension and Compression Steel Spacing You can set the maximum desirable steel bar spacing using this input field. Maximum steel spacing can be provided separately for tension and compression bars.

Steel Bar Spacing Step Spacing values will be incremented by the amount specified in this field during iterations.

Steel Bar Cut Length You can enter the cut lengths of the steel bars used in this section. The length of the bars will then be checked against this value.

Max. Crack Width (Eurocode 2 only) This is required to determine the maximum allowable tension bar spacing. For EC2 (and BS8110) the maximum crack width in the tension zone is controlled by placing a limit on the maximum spacing of the tension reinforcement.

Permanent Load Ratio (Eurocode 2 only) Acceptable input range 0.3 to 1.0 This is the ratio of quasi-permanent load to design ultimate load. i.e. SLS/ULS = (1.0Gk + y2Qk) / (factored Gk + factored Qk)

It is used to determine the reinforcement service stress which in turn is required to determine the maximum allowable tension bar spacing. If Qk is taken as 0 then: SLS/ULS = (1 / 1.25) = 0.8 Hence, setting the permanent load ratio to 0.8 should provide a conservative upper bound for all cases.

Minimum and Maximum Link Diameter You can set the minimum and maximum allowable (or desirable) link bar size using this input field. A smaller bar size will not be used during the selection of links. Note that, if you modify this section, you have to re-design to reflect the changes.

Min. Link Spacing You can set the minimum desirable link spacing using this input field.

Max. Link Spacing You can set the maximum desirable link spacing using this input field.

Link Spacing Step Link spacings will be calculated to be the multiples of the value provided in this field. For example, if "25 mm" is provided here, link spacing values will be like 150, 175, 200, 225 etc. Link spacing will be modified by the amount provided here in the "Reinforcement Information" of the "Beam Editor", every time the spin buttons controlling the spacing of links pressed.

Steel Bar Cut Length Control Steel cut length can be adjusted using this field.

Related Articles: Steel Bar Selection Curtailment Detailing

Steel Bar Selection Method This page is used to apply more specific controls on the bar selection process.

Bar Spacing Maximisation Method In this method, program modifies the steel layout so that the steel bar sizes are maximised to achieve the biggest possible spacing (within the spacing range specified in settings) between the bars.

Bar Size Minimisation Method In this method, program modifies the layout so that the steel bar spacing is minimised (within the spacing range specified in settings) to achieve the smallest possible bar sizes to be selected.

Display Steel Bar Spacing During Design

If this option is checked, "Beam Editor" will display "s-Bar" (the clear spacing between the bars) instead of "Min-bw" (minimum beam width that the bars will fit with minimum allowable clear spacing) during bar selection.

Steel Bar Area Tolerance In some cases, you may want to use less steel than required in the beam sections. By introducing a percent “positive” tolerance in this field, you make the program to put less steel than required. Likewise, negative percent tolerance values will yield greater steel areas than required.

Minimum Top Steel at a Pin If hinge mechanism is defined at the beam ends, then you can enter the area of the top steel at support regions as the percent of the steel area used in span region.

Steel Pattern This page is used to apply specific controls to the bar pattern applied.

Reinforcement Pattern

You can select the default reinforcement pattern to be used for curtailment of bars using the list provided in this section.

Use At Least 2 Bars in 2nd Layer If this option is checked, a minimum of 2 bars will be placed to 2nd layer (if 2nd layer steel is necessary).

Use Same Bar Size in 1st and 2nd Layer If this option is checked, the same bar size used in the 1st layer will be used in the 2nd layer steel.

Use Same Number of Bars in 1st and 2nd Layer If this option is checked, the same number of bars will be used in the 1st and 2nd layer.

Use 2nd Bottom Bars for 70% As "2nd Bottom Bars" group may be set to be used automatically for (maximum) the 70% of the required steel just not to extend all bars along the full length of the span. If this option is selected, the "2nd Bottom Bars" group will be utilised for maximum 70% of the required steel in interior spans and 50% for exterior spans.

Usage of Support 2nd Top Bars Two support top bar groups are provided in patterns without bent up bars. "2nd Top Support Bars" are used for either 2nd steel layer or curtailed shorter for economy.

Use for 40% As If you want to use the "2nd Top Support Bars" group for maximum 40% of the total required steel area, you can check this field.

Extend by 0.25L (Default: 0.15L) By default "2nd Top Support Bars" are extended by 0.15L into the span. If you check this field, these bars will be extended to 0.25L always. If this group bars are used in 2nd layer, then they will be curtailed to 0.25L when the total supplied area in this bar group is greater than 40% of the required steel area. Note: the coefficient "0.25" is not constant. This value is controlled by "Steel Bar Extension Lengths" parameter in the "Steel Bars" tab page.

Links This page is used to apply specific controls to the Links.

Link Quantity Control Using the two data fields in this section you can control the number of links in a beam section with respect to the width of the beam, "bw". "Max.bw For Single Links" field determines limit beam width that single links can be used. When the beam width, bw, is bigger than this value and less than (or equal to) the value defined in "Max.bw For Double Links" field, then two links will be used in the section. When the beam width is bigger than the value defined in "Max.bw For Double Links" field, then three links will be used. In addition the “Link Type” option enables you to choose between having a single outer link with additional inner links or equally sized links.

Rib Link Type The type of rib links can be defined using “Link Type” field in the “Rib Links” section. The available options are illustrated below.

Rib Link Types and Parameters

Rib Link Extension If “Closed” or “Open” links are selected for rib links, length of the extension can be defined using “Link Extension” field in the “Rib Links” section

Design Link Spacing at Supports If you want to have different link arrangements for supports then this option must be checked. Otherwise, same link size and spacing will be used in span and supports calculated based on the maximum design shear force.

Same bar size at supports and span If different link arrangement option is checked for having different links at supports, you can check this option to use same bar size in supports and span regions. If this option is not checked, different bars may be used whenever necessary in supports and span region of the beam.

Select Symmetrical Links at Supports If different link arrangement option is checked for having different links at supports, you can check this option to use same link arrangement (bar size and spacing) in both supports. If this option is not checked, different bars arrangements may be used whenever necessary in left and right support regions of the beam.

Fixed Support Region Width (2h) If this option is not checked, the width of the support region where different link arrangements are used is calculated for left and right support regions. These values are displayed in the “x-Sup.Links” section of the Interactive Beam Reinforcement Design Editor. Width of the support regions will be set as “2h” when this option is checked.

Beam Links Parameters

Min. Support Region Width Width of the support regions may be limited so that they will not be less than a certain value. You can use this option to use a minimum support region of either “0.25L” or “2h” where “L” is the clear span and “h” is the overall section height of the beam.

Min. Span Region Width Options: This option is useful when the support region widths are calculated to be almost equal to half beam span. In such cases, you can select a minimum value that when the span region is to be checked. When span region is less than the minimum set value here then support links are extended over the span region.

Related Articles: Design & Parameters Curtailment Detailing

Curtailment Steel Bars These settings affect how the reinforcement is curtailed.

Lap Bars Inside Support If you prefer to lap the bottom bars in the middle of the support region you may select this option.

Lap Bars Outside Support If you prefer to lap the bottom bars to the right or left of the support region you may select this option. The bars will be lapped at the side of the support where the bottom bars are smaller. If the bottom bar sizes are the same in both adjacent spans, then they will be lapped to the right of the support region.

Extend Lap into the Support If you prefer to extend the bottom bars into the support region by a lap distance after the inner face of the support, you may select this option.

Extend by Lap into Adjacent Span If you wish to extend the bottom bars through the support region and extend them by a lap distance after the outer face of the support, you may select this option. This option is used generally in earthquake regions to provide more anchorage for the bottom bars.

Merge Similar Bottom Span Bars

You can set this option if you want to merge similar bottom steel bars. For bars to be assumed as similar, both quantities and bar sizes must be equal. Merging may be restricted due to geometric constraints and may not be successful in all positions.

Merge Similar Web Bars You can set this option if you want to merge similar web bars. In order that bars to be assumed as similar, both quantities and bar sizes must be equal. Merging may be restricted due to geometric constraints and may not be successful in all positions.

Extend Support Bars Symmetrically As a conservative approach, you may like to extend the support bars symmetrically using the larger effective span length. Checking this option will extend the support bars to both spans symmetrically.

Where if Lengths Vary by Less Than (%) If variation in spans is more than the given value no symmetry operation is performed. The minimum and maximum permitted values are 10 and 50 respectively.

Add Anchorage Length to the Steel Bar Extensions Occasionally, you may desire to add anchorage lengths to the calculated extension lengths. You may check this field in such cases.

Merge Similar Span Top Bars You can set this option if you want to merge similar steel bars used in support and span sections. For bars to be assumed as similar, both quantities and bar sizes must be equal. Merging may be restricted due to geometric constraints and may not be successful in all positions.

Steel Bar Extension Lengths Support bar extension length multiplication factor can be set using the field provided in this section.

Steel Bars 2 Further settings that affect how the reinforcement is curtailed.

Extend Top Span Bars to End Support If you wish to extend the top span bars of the first and last spans to the end supports, you can check this option.

Don’t Use Top Span Bars Check this option if you don’t want to add top support bars at the end support. In this case the span bars will be increased as necessary.

Extend Bottom Span Bars to End Support If you wish to extend the bottom span bars of the first and last spans to the end supports, you can check this option.

Don’t Use Bottom Span Bars Check this option if you don’t want to add bottom span bars at the end support. In this case the span bars will be increased as necessary.

Minimum Tension Lap Factor (BS8110, CP65 & HK codes only)

With this factor set at 1.0 extended lap lengths are only introduced in some cases but not others. Some users may prefer to increase this factor to 1.4 to standardise on the use of extended lap lengths throughout.

Max. Bond Quality Coefficient (Eurocode 2 only) Acceptable input range 0.5 to 1.0 In the bond stress calculation (Cl 8.4.2), the bond quality coefficient η1 can be either 1.0 or 0.7 depending on section depth. Where 0.7 is used the bond strength is reduced and laps are extended. Specifying a maximum of 1.0 for the Bond Quality Coefficient allows the coefficient to vary between 0.7 and 1.0 as required, hence lap lengths will vary accordingly. Some users may prefer to specify a maximum of 0.7 (which actually fixes the coefficient at 0.7), the effect is to standardise on the use of extended lap lengths throughout. Further conservatism can be introduced in all lap lengths by using a value as low as 0.5.

Plain Bars Bond Quality Modifier (Eurocode 2 only) Acceptable input range 0.1 to 1.0 In the EC2 Cl 8.4.2 bond stress calculation, there is no factor relating to the rib type of reinforcement, and no guidance on what adjustments if any should be made for plain bars. In ProtaStructure a factor “T” has been introduced (as in BS8110) to allow for this adjustment. It is the users responsibility to enter a suitable value for plain bars. (Until further guidance becomes available, Prota would suggest that as per BS8110 a value of 0.5 would be reasonable.)

Type-1 Bars Bond Quality Modifier (Eurocode 2 only) Acceptable input range 0.1 to 1.0 In the EC2 Cl 8.4.2 bond stress calculation, there is no factor relating to the rib type of reinforcement, and no guidance on what adjustments if any should be made for Type 1 bars. In ProtaStructure a factor “T” has been introduced (as in BS8110) to allow for this adjustment. It is the users responsibility to enter a suitable value for Type 1 bars. (Until further guidance becomes available, Prota would suggest that as per BS8110 a value of 0.8 would be reasonable.)

Minimum Anchorage Length The minimum anchorage length as a multiple of bar diameter can be controlled with this setting.

Bob Control These settings affect how the bobs are controlled.

Min. Steel Bob Length Control Using the fields provided in this frame you can control the bobs for top and bottom steel. As an example, if you have 25 diameter as top steel minimum bob length, then when a value less than this is required, then 25 diameter length bob will be provided automatically.

Properties of Bob Usually bottom bars of cantilever beams are not bent. You can force the program to provide bobs for these bars by checking "Bend Bottom Bars of Cantilever Beams" field.

Draw Bobs for Cantilever Bottom Bars

Generally, cantilever bottom bars are not bent. If you prefer to make bobs to the bottom bars at the free end of the cantilevers, you can check this option.

Bob Length Control You can control the action to be assumed when the length of bob is greater than the depth of the beam. When “Bend Top Bobs Back into Beam” option is used, the bars will be truncated. In this case, care must be taken to check the position and dimensions of the lower columns. Alternatively, “Extend Top Bobs into Columns” option is used in order to extend these bobs to their actual lengths. In this case, care must be taken to check the position and dimensions of the lower columns.

Related Articles: Design & Parameters Steel Bar Selection Detailing

Detailing General This tab relates to detailing presentation options.

Drawing Scale This field contains the entry for the beam detail drawing scale. You may make a selection among the available scale options.

Min. Wall Length Curtailment of the bars extended into the columns and walls are treated differently. If you need that short walls to be considered to act like columns, you can indicate the wall length limit in this field.

Show Bar Marks Bar marks are determined and included with the bar label text if this option is set. Note that, any other process that uses the bar marks will not be performed if this option is not checked.

Display Axis Labels / Balloon By default, axis labels and circles at beam supports are drawn. You can uncheck this option to suppress these labels.

Draw Axis Labels Above Everything If this option is checked, axis labels will be extended so that they will be above all other drawing entities.

Display Slab Lines in Beam Elevation These set of options control the display of slab lines in the elevation view of the beams. If you check “Both” option, the slab and beam lines in front and back will be drawn. Note that there are two different layer entries that will allow you to set the color and line type properties of these lines separately.

Beams This tab relates to detailing presentation options.

Beam Label List A list of beams in the sheet is generated during the preparation of the detail drawings. You can uncheck this option to suppress the creation of this list.

Use Beam Insertion Axes as Beam Label You can check this option if you want to use the insertion axes as being printed instead of the beam labels.

Print Beam Labels below the Detail

By default, beam labels are printed above the beam elevations. You can check this option if you want to have labels to be printed below the beam elevation.

Underline Beam Labels Beam label and section size texts will be underlined in the beam detail drawings if this option is checked.

Display Beam Reference Levels in Details This option allows the reference level of the beams to be displayed in the details. The reference level can be adjusted via the Building > Edit Storey form. This option is not valid for inclined beams.

Short Span Max. Length The limit below which a beam will be considered as short can be controlled with this setting. Such beams will be detailed with continuous top and bottom reinforcement which will then be merged to reinforcement in adjacent spans.

Sections This tab relates to detailing presentation options.

Beam Section Control The set of options located in this group controls the section quantity in a beam axis. Available settings are: No Sections: No sections will be included in the beam details if this option is selected. Different Beams: Sections will be drawn only when a beam with different section dimensions is encountered in a particular beam axis. All Beams: Section of all beams will be drawn if this option is selected.

Number of Sections Options in this group control the number of sections to be provided for each beam. Span Section Only: Only section at the mid-span of the beams will be provided if this option is selected. Support and Span Sections: Three sections per beam will be provided if this option is selected.

Beam Section Labels Control The options provided in this section allow you to control the appearance and format of the section labels. Section label format can be set using one of the available section label formats provided (A, B, C, …), (a, b, c …) or (1, 2, 3, …). If “Re-start Section Labels in Every Sheet” option is selected, section labels will be reset for every sheet starting from “A”, “a” or “1”. If “Re-start Section Labels in Every Axis” option is selected, section labels will be reset for every axis starting from “A”, “a” or “1”. In this case, in order to prevent repeating labels, you may like to add axis label preceding the section label by checking the option “Add Axis Label as Prefix to Section Labels”. If this option is checked, the labels will look like “(A) 1 - 1”, “(A) 2 - 2” etc. If “Re-start Section Labels in Every Beam” option is selected, section labels will be reset for every beam starting from “A”, “a” or “1”. In this case, in order to prevent repeating labels, you may like to add axis label and beam label preceding the section label by checking the option “Add Beam Label as Prefix to Section Labels” as well as “Add Axis Label as Prefix to Section Labels”. If these options are checked, the labels will look like “(A-1B25) 1 - 1”, “(A-1B25) 2 - 2” etc.

Steel Bars and Links This tab relates to detailing presentation options.

Re-plot the Bars below the Beam If you wish to plot the steel bars below the beam elevation to have all segments lengths displayed properly you can check this option.

Annotate Steel Bars in Beam If you wish to put steel bar quantity, diameter and barmark information to the bars drawn inside the beam elevation, you can check this option.

Annotate Bars in Beam Sections If you wish to put steel bar quantity, diameter and barmark information to the beam sections, you can check this option.

Use IStructE Style Annotation If this option is checked section bars are annotated according to the IStructE Style. Generally, this style may be preferable if there are too many elements to annotate in the sections.

Shift Outer Layer Bars to Enhance Display Sometimes it is useful to plot the bars shifted (although they are in the 1st layer), to enhance the display. You can check this option to shift the bars along vertical axis.

Print Steel Bar Layer Information Layer information (such as T1 for Top 1st layer bars) will be printed in bar label text if this option is checked.

Display Kinks in Detail If this option is checked, kinks will be displayed in the beam elevation drawings to mark the ends of the steel bars.

Draw Link Lines Extended by Link Size Link lines may be drawn extended further than the top and bottom bars by half bar size + link size to enhance the beam elevation display if this option is checked.

Print Total Link Quantity By default, total number of links is calculated and printed with the link labels for each beam. You can suppress the printing of total link quantity text by removing the checkmark of this option.

Print Number of Link Arms By default, total number of links arms is printed with the link labels for each beam. You can suppress the printing of number of link arms text by removing the checkmark of this option.

Draw Link Labels Inline This option controls the appearance of the link labels with respect to the annotation lines drawn showing the extent of the link group. If “Draw Link Labels Inline” option is checked, then the annotation line is cut in the middle and the label is printed in the middle of this line. Otherwise, an annotation line is drawn between the extents of the link group and the labels are printed above the line.

Display Additional Link Lines This option allows the spacing of the links to be expressed graphically.

Print Link Labels Inside the Beam By default, annotations of links are printed below the beam elevations. You can check this option if you want to have link annotations to be printed inside the beam elevation.

Link Annotation Distance (from bottom edge) When “Print Link Labels Inside the Beam” option is checked, this field controls the distance that the link annotation line is positioned from bottom edge of the beam. The value entered in this field is a multiplier applied to the beam section height.

Side Bars This tab relates to detailing presentation options.

Side Bars Arrangement The program adds appropriate side bars based on the requirements of the active concrete codes for deep beams. Selecting "Along h" option will place the side bars equally spaced along the height of the beam, whereas "Along 2/3 h" option will place them equally spaced along the bottom 2/3 portion of the section.

Display Only a Single Side Bar in Detail This option allows only a single indicative side bar to be shown, regardless of the total no. of side bars required. The purpose is to avoid too many elements in the final drawings, resulting in more legible output.

Dimensioning This tab relates to detailing presentation options.

Dimension Steel Bar Lap Lengths This parameter controls the dimensioning of the laps of the straight bars. This option is quite useful when "Re-plot the Bars below the Beam" option is not checked.

Dimension 2nd Span Bars This option allows the proper dimension of the second bottom span bars, whether it is in the first or second layer.

Dimension Steel Bar Anchorage Lengths This parameter controls the dimensioning of the support bar extensions. This option is quite useful when “Re-plot the Bars Below the Beam” option is not checked.

Dimension Support Region Width of Links This parameter controls the dimensioning of the length of the beam confinement zone.

Dimension First and Last Links By default, dimensions for the first link to left support face and last link to the right support face are drawn for each beam. You can suppress these dimensions by removing the checkmark of this option.

Dimension Axes By default, axis to axis dimensions is created for each beam. You can suppress these dimensions by removing the checkmark of this option.

Draw Axis Dimensions Above Detail By default, axis dimensions are located below the beam elevation drawing. You can move the axis dimensions to above the beam elevation by checking this option.

Dimension Support Columns and Clear Spans By default, support columns and clear span dimensioning is created for each beam. You can suppress these dimensions by removing the checkmark of this option.

Dimension Beam Section Beam sections will be dimensioned if this option is checked.

Dimension Slabs in Beam Sections Slab depths in beam section drawings will be dimensioned if this option is checked. Note that, this option will be inactive if “Dimension Beam Section” option is not checked.

Related Articles: Design & Parameters Steel Bar Selection Curtailment

Slab Design Settings You can display the “Slab Design Settings” by using the “Slab Design Settings” option under the “Settings” pulldown menu.

Design Basic design settings are controlled on this tab.

Slab Steel Concrete Cover Depth of concrete cover for slabs can be given in the “Slab Steel Concrete Cover” field. If you leave this field as zero, then the concrete cover will be determined based on active codes.

Top Steel Extension Lengths Support top bars lengths are determined using the factors specified in “Top Steel Extension Lengths” fields. These multipliers are applied to the effective span lengths of the slabs.

Slab Span Lengths in Analysis You can use these fields to toggle using "Use Clear Span" or "Use Centerline Span" (spans calculated between centre-line of beams).

Steel Bars Steel bar selection and layout settings are controlled on this tab.

Slab Steel Pattern For slab reinforcement, there are three steel patterns such as: “Bent-up Pattern”, “Straight Bar Pattern”. When you select any of these patterns, you can view the slab reinforcement detailed accordingly on the screen.

Slab Bar Spacing Minimum and maximum steel bar spacing for slabs can be provided in “Slab Bar Spacing” fields. When the spacing determined for a steel bar is less than the minimum spacing, then the program will increase the diameter of the bar automatically.

Steel Bar Spacing Step Steel bar spacing values will be rounded up to the “Steel Bar Spacing Step” value provided in this field. For example, if the Steel Bar Spacing Step is provided as “25 mm”, then the calculated spacing values will be as 150, 175, 200, 225 etc.

Steel Bar Length Step Steel bar lengths will be rounded up according to the “Steel Bar Length Step” value provided in this field. For example, if the Steel Bar Length Step is “50 mm”, length values calculated will be rounded up to end up with 50’s.

Steel Bar Edge Clearance

In slabs, steel bars parallel to an edge of the slab starts at a small distance from the edge of the slab. This distance can be defined in the “Steel Bar Edge Clearance” field. Steel Bar Span Lines will be set considering this value.

Make Bob for Top Steel Cantilevers If you check the “Make Bob for Top Steel Cantilevers” option, top steel bars in cantilever slabs will end with bobs. Otherwise, the steel bars will end with hooks at the end of the cantilever slab.

Put Slab Support Bars to 1st Layer in Both Directions This field can be checked if it is preferred to put all the support bars to 1st layer. Otherwise, the program will determine the layer of the bars based on the slab dimensions.

Extend Support Bars Symmetrically When Slab Spans Vary If you like to extend the support bars symmetrically to the slabs you can check this option. If this option is checked, larger effective span length is used to control the length of the support bar.

Put Bent-up Bars Along Long Edges of One-way Slabs By default, bent-up bars are not placed along the long edges of the one-way slabs. You can check this option if you want to put bent-up bars along the long edges of the one-way slabs.

View This tab is used to control how the steel bars are displayed.

Print Steel Bar Segment Lengths Slab reinforcement can be displayed either with all the segment lengths or with only the total length. If you check the “Print Steel Bar Segment Length” option, then all the segment lengths of bars will be displayed on the drawing.

Print Steel Bar Total Length If you check the “Print Steel Bar Total Length” option, the total length of each steel bar will be displayed on the drawing.

Hide No. of Bars in Bar Label If you check this field, the number of bars calculated based on the spacing and length of the span lines will be suppressed.

Print Alternative Layer Information A steel bar in a slab can be on the top or bottom of the section. Similarly, according to its direction the same bar can be on the first or second layer from the top or the bottom. If you check the “Display Steel Bar Layer Information” option, then the position and the layer of the reinforcement will be indicated. If you check “Print Alternative Layer Information” option, following texts will be printed as steel bar layer information: 

TT: 1st Layer of Top Steel (T1)



TB: 2nd Layer of Top Steel (T2)



BB: 1st Layer of Bottom Steel (B1)



BT: 2nd Layer of Bottom Steel (B2)

Steel Bar Positions

Slab Steel Bars Section Scale Factor You can use this field to specify the scale factor to be used in vertical direction (along the depth of the slab) of the slab sections.

Related Articles: Defining/ Editing a Slab Working with Slab Strips

Foundation Design Settings You can display the “Foundation Design Settings” form by using the “Foundation Design Settings” option under the “Settings” pulldown menu.

General Various general settings are controlled on this tab.

Allowable Soil Stress Ultimate Strength Factor To compare allowable bearing capacity of soil with the stresses calculated by factored vertical load combinations, this factor is used in scaling allowable bearing capacity. The values are compared after scaling. If service loads (G+Q) is used in soil stress calculations then this factor must be 1.

Soil Unit Weight Enter the unit weight of the fill material in this field. The volume of surcharge will be calculated and multiplied with the "Soil Unit Weight" to yield the additional axial load due to fill material.

Surcharge Height Enter the height of the fill material in this field. The volume of surcharge will be calculated and multiplied with the “Surcharge Height” to yield an additional axial load.

Lean Concrete Thickness Enter the lean concrete thickness in this field to be used in Pad Base detail drawings.

Design Design settings are controlled on this tab.

Pad Base Minimum Steel Percentage Minimum steel ratio to be used in spread foundation footings can be adjusted using this field.

Strip Footing Minimum Steel Percentage Minimum steel ratio to be used in footings of strip foundations can be adjusted using this field.

Minimum Footing Width Footing dimensions of pad, pile and strip foundations will be calculated and compared with the minimum value entered here. Footing dimensions smaller than this minimum value will not be used by the program.

Minimum Span Moment Coefficient Beam span moment calculated by Winkler Method, will be compared with the product of q.L2 term and the coefficient specified here. Smaller values will not be used in the design. Default value is specified as (1/16). “q” represents the soil pressure under the column and “L” is the beam span length .

Minimum Support Moment Coefficient

Beam support moment calculated by Winkler Method, will be compared with the product of q.L2 term and the coefficient specified here. Smaller values will not be used in the design. Default value is specified as (1/12). “q” represents the soil pressure under the column and “L” is the beam span length .

Pile Foundations Pile Foundation settings are controlled on this tab.

Allow Tapered Footing Check this box to allow corners of the footing to be chamfered on plan.

Max. Pile Spacing Multiplier You can control the maximum pile spacing with this multiplier which is applied to the depth of the pile cap above the top of the pile. (Pile Cap Depth, h minus the Pile Penetration Depth, p). Enter the Default Pile Length here.

Rounding Value for Footing Dimensions and Pile Spacing Footing dimensions and pile spacings will be calculated to be multiples of the value provided in this field.

Min. Number of Piles The program will not attempt to use fewer piles than the minimum entered here.

Min. Pile Rows (Walls Only)

The program will not attempt to use fewer pile rows under walls than the minimum entered here.

Ignorable Moment for Single Row Piles Moments less than the value entered here will be ignored for single row piles.

Add Column Forces Table to the Report (For All Combinations) Check this box if you require the column forces table included in the report.

Add Pile Axial Forces for Critical Combination to the Report Check this box if you require the pile axial forces for the critical combination included in the report.

Related Articles: Foundation Modelling and Design

Import and Export (Overview) Various file formats are supported for importing and exporting data for the current project. The Import and Export topics are explained in detail in the following sections.

Import The import options are accessible from “File” > “Model File Import” : 

Load Building Model



External Reference Drawing

Export 

The 3D view can be exported via “File” > “Model File Import” > 3D DXF Export



The analysis model can be exported to other software packages: Etabs® and SAP2000®/Lucas® via Model Export

Load Building Model (Import)

Load Building Model You can find the "Load Building Model" from File > Model/File Import > Load Building Model This function allows the import of separate blocks of building from another project. The “Building Model Merge” dialog will appear with the options below

The general procedures are listed as below:a) We assume that you have two projects; (i) Target project A- this project refer to the project that you want to import the other model (ii) Source Project B- this project refer to project that you want to import to your target project Import the "Source Project B" Open/Create Target project A -----------------------------------------------------> Merged Project C (iii) Merged Project C - this project refers to the Target Project A + Project B. This project will replace the Target Project A and become the new Merged Project C.

b) Project & Data Folder : Choose the source project model that you want to import by ensuring the the correct “Data Folder” is selected. Note: In order to import the source project, please save your project as another name > Select the newly saved source project from the dropdown list

c) Choose an import option from below:(i) Import Axis System from Other Project This option can be used to import the axis system of an existing project to a new project that does not have any pre-defined axis. This option is also useful as all building merging options requires a common axes system between two projects. (ii) Import Only the Foundation Columns All columns and walls of a project can be imported to the current model for shared foundation modelling. Imported columns will not be part of the analysis model of the current project and their results be taken from their original project. (iii) Import a Completed Project This option allows import a different project completely as a building block to a selected location. All imported members will be considered as native members and will be included in the analysis. (iv) Import Storeys from Different Project You can import the selected storeys of a project to selected storeys of the current model, provided that the axis system are identical. Note: - You have to ensure the storeys in your source model are moved to the same final target storeys in the target model before importing the storeys. - In your source model, you cannot use insert storey below to move storeys - In your source model, you have to insert the storey above and move the storeys below to the target storeys

- For examples, you want to import storeys 1-3 from your import model to your target model storeys 4-6. In your source model, you have to insert storeys 4-6 and copy the storeys 1-3 to storey 46, respectively. - Then, in your target model, you can import your model by setting source storeys 4-6 and the first target storey as 4.

d) Pick “Load Model” in the dialog and there will be further instruction on the required input. Finally choose “Finish” to import the project.

Related Articles : External Reference Drawing (Import) Import and Export

External Reference Drawing (Import) This option can be quite useful when you already have structural layouts prepared by a CAD program that can export DXF files. You can use "External Reference Drawing" option in the "File" menu > “Model/File Import” to start importing this DXF file. Before starting a new model, you may like to have the Architectural plan (or the preliminary structureal plan) to be displayed as reference to facilitate the creation of axes and structural members. The objects in the drawing are also recognized by the Graphic Editor, so that you can snap to the intersections, end-points etc. of the reference objects. In addition, if the dxf file contains axis, column and wall layouts these can be imported directly to become elements in the ProtaStructure model.

Attaching DXF File as External Reference DXF (Drawing Exchange File) format is a very common drawing transfer file format, recognised by almost all CAD programs.

Considerations in DXF Files to be imported The following restrictions and recommendations apply to the DXF Files to be imported as External Reference Drawings: 

In order to increase the performance, all the unnecessary entities must be deleted from the drawing before it is converted into a DXF file and importing it, esp hatching, title blocks, logos, etc. Ensure that all frozen layers are turned ON in order not miss out any layers.



Only LINE, ARC, CIRCLE, POLYLINE, LWPOLYLINE, TEXT entities are imported. Therefore it is recommended that more complex entities to be deleted or converted to these object types before generating the DXF file to be imported.



In order to import the entities in a BLOCK, you need to EXPLODE them. AutoCAD dimensions are also blocks. In order to import the dimension entities, you have to explode them to lines and texts.



If you are using programs that generates special objects (like Autodesk ADT), apply “AECExplode” command before creating the DXF file. Note that, “AECExplode” command generates BLOCKs and these blocks must also be exploded using “EXPLODE” command.



If the drawing objects are drawn very far from the origin in the original drawing, it is highly recommended that all the entities are moved closer to the origin using any CAD editor (preferable to the positive quadrant with positive coordinates).



If the drawing is prepared using a rotated “World” coordinate system, then the drawing must be rotated back to the desired orientation before importing.



In order to minimize the size of the imported drawing, TEXT entities will be displayed with simplest font with minimum number of vectors.



Completlely switch off / freeze / delete all unnecessary entities such as hatching (especially), title blocks, architectural objects, elevation views, etc from the original dxf before importing the file into ProtaStructure.



If there are several floor layout in a single dxf file, split each floor layout to different dxf files.



As a general guide, limit a single dxf file to a maximum of 1 MB.

Loading a DXF File You can use Model/File Import > External Reference Drawing on the “File” menu to start importing a DXF file as an external reference. The “Reference Drawing Settings” dialog will be loaded: 

Press the “DXF Load” button to load the DXF file as External Reference drawing.



A file and folder browsing dialog will appear.



Locate and select the DXF file to be imported using this dialog.



The “DXF File Import Options” dialog will appear after all the entities in the file have been read and converted.



In order to match the size of the objects with the ones created in the Graphic Editor, you have to specify the length unit used in the DXF file by checking one of the available unit options.



Optionally, if you want to import the text entities in the DXF file, you can check the “Display TEXT entities as well” option in this dialog.

A different DXF file for each storey in the project can be loaded. The related reference drawing will be displayed when you switch storeys. If the unit used in the DXF file is not available in this dialog, you can scale the reference drawing later using the “Scale” box in the “Reference Drawing Settings” dialog.

Displaying the Reference Drawing After loading the DXF file, you can display it by checking “Display Reference Drawing” option in “Reference Drawing Settings” dialog. Note that, this option will be functional only if there is an imported DXF file that is attached as reference drawing.

Moving the Reference Drawing To move the entities in the Reference Drawing to a specific location, you can use the “Move” button in “Reference Drawing Settings” dialog. After activating the move command, the “Reference Drawing Settings” dialog will disappear. You can move the reference drawing entities by dragging two points in plan view. Automatic Object Snap options will be available during this process.

Scaling the Reference Drawing If the reference entities do not appear in the size that you expected, you can scale them by setting the “Scale Factor” and pressing the “Scale” button.

Adjusting the Colors of the Reference Drawing Generally, it is desirable to view the reference drawing using faded colors or monochrome (with the ghost layer color specified in Layers Table). If you check the “Use DXF Colors” option, the colors assigned to the entities and layers in the DXF file will be used when drawing the entities. If you prefer to use these colors and fade them as well, you can adjust the “Color Intensity” slider. Reference entities will be displayed in the color specified Layers Table, you can uncheck the “ Use DXF Colors” option.

Importing Axis and Column from a DXF File Considerations in DXF Files to be imported You should have no defined axis in the Graphic Editor plan window prior to using this option, since all the axes will be imported from a DXF file. The DXF file that will be imported must be prepared based on the rules below: 

The file must be drawn in the units currently used in Graphic Editor.



Axes must be drawn using "Line" entities.



All axes must be grouped in a single layer or two layers (for direction 1 and 2 axes).



Columns must be drawn using “Polyline” entities.



All columns and wall members must be grouped together in a single layer.

Reference Drawing Settings From the "Reference Drawing Settings” dialog click “DXF Load” then select the DXF file that will be used for importing the axes. Following the selection of the DXF file, "DXF File Import Options" will be displayed. Select the appropriate units that the original DXF file is drawn with in order to import the drawing in the right scale.

Press “Import Members” button in the “Reference Drawing Settings” window to load “Member Import Options” dialog. The “Member Import Options” form comprises the following options;

Axis Import Options Check “Import Axes” option in this form in order to start to import axis system. The layers of the axis lines in the DXF file can be selected using the two layer group lists in this section. If the axes in the DXF file are grouped in two layers for "dir-1" and "dir-2" axes, then select the layer of the direction-1 axes using the "Axis Layer (Dir-1)" list and select the layer of the direction-2 axes using the "Axis Layer (Dir-2)" list. Imported axes will be grouped based on the layer selections in this section. If all the axes in the DXF file are grouped in a single layer, then select this layer using the " Axis Layer (Dir-1)" list and set the "Axis Layer (Dir-2)" list as "". All imported axes will be grouped as direction-1 axes in this case. If you want to group the axes based on their directions, check the "Group by Axis Direction" option.

Read the Axis Labels from Text entities If "Read the Axis Labels from Text Entities in the Reference Drawing" option is checked, axis labels which are created by text entities will also be imported from the DXF file..

Group by Axis Direction If "Group by Axis Direction" option is checked, the imported axes will be grouped as direction 1 and 2 based on their angles rather than their layers. If this option is checked, the axes closer to horizontal will be grouped as direction-1 and closer to vertical will be grouped as direction-2.

Column Import Setting Check “Import Columns” option in this form in order to start to import axis system. The layers of the column and wall polylines in the DXF file can be selected using the layer list in this section.

Read Column Labels from Text Entities If "Read Column Labels from Text entities in the Reference Drawing" option is checked, column labels which are created by text entities will also be imported from reference drawing.

Automatic Correction of Slightly Non-orthogonal Axes During the axis import operation, if any slightly non-orthogonal axes are detected you are given the option to modify them to be perfectly orthogonal. Unless corrected, tolerance problems associated with such axes have the potential to occasionally cause meshing difficulties with slabs in the FE Analysis module.

Related Articles :

Load Buildng Model (Import) Import and Export Layer and Color Settings

Model/File Export

Exporting 3D view to DXF® File The 3D view can be exported as a 3D DXF drawing via “File” > “Model/File Export”. The active 3D view of the structure will be exported as a 3D DXF drawing. DXF (Drawing Exchange File) format is a very common drawing transfer file format, recognised by almost all CAD programs. Please note that all other drawings (plan, details, etc) must be generated from ProtaDetails.

Model Export Once you have completed a Building Analysis you can use the Model Export page within the Building Analysis module > Model Export tab to export the building analysis model into the following software packages: Etabs® and SAP2000®/Lucas®. When you have completed a finite element floor analysis you can use the Model Export page within the Finite Element Floor Analysis module > Model Export tab to also export an FE analysis model of each storey into the following software packages: SAP2000 ®/Lucas®.

Related Articles : Import and Export

Graphical Editor Basics (Contents) The analytical model of the structure is created in the Graphic Editor, either in a 2D plan view, or in 3D. In order to prepare the model efficiently you are advised to have an understanding of the topics described in this section and the subsequent Structure Modelling section. 

Overview of Graphical editor



Member related controls



Displaying member properties



Creating member with mirroring



Moving members to modified axes positions



Re-label members



Object snap options



Measure



Storey related controls and settings



Zooming and panning



3D View

Overview of the Graphic Editor When ProtaStructure is started the "Project Manager" is initially displayed. If ‘New Project’ is clicked the Graphic Editor is opened with a clear drawing area. Alternatively, if an existing project is selected the Graphic Editor is opened with the project data loaded, showing the storey last saved in the plan window. The Graphic Editor is equipped with standard MS-Windows user-interface features such as pulldown menus, toolbars and icons to provide better and faster data input.

The Graphic Editor window is composed of following parts:

Pulldown Menu Pulldown menus are located above the drawing environment area. All commands are located in the pulldowns.

Toolbars Almost all menu items in the pulldowns are available in toolbars.

Status Bar All prompts and help to user appear in the status bar. Status bar is located at the lower-left corner of the Graphic Editor Window.

Properties Window

Properties Window is a floating window having its own member group title. A Properties window for each member type can be opened by choosing a member from the Member pulldown or by selecting the Properties option in the shortcut menu of a currently selected member. All data fields for the selected member will be available in the Properties Window.

Plan View The middle-right section of the Graphic Editor Window displaying drawings, surrounded by the above items. View orientation is from a point on the positive Z-axis.

3D Windows Multiple 3D Views of the model can be concurrently made active by right click the “Views” and select the “3D view”. View orientation can be set using the provided view control buttons.

Shortcut Menu Displayed by right-clicking as a cascading menu at the cursor location on the plan window or structure tree areas. Provides quick access to context-sensitive items for the selected members in the drawing area. Note that, when no member is selected, by right-clicking any toolbar, you can display, hide or customize toolbars.

Structure Tree Structure Tree provides a complete hierarchical list of all axes and members in the selected storey. Members may easily be selected by clicking on their labels under the storey they belong. Selected members will also be highlighted in plan and 3D windows. Also provides quick access to many menu options displayed by right-clicking on the selected node.

View Control Buttons View Control Buttons are used to swap between ProtaStructure screen views such as Column Application, Foundation Details, Plan View, Design Status and 3D view.

Member Related Controls

Member Selection Before you can edit objects, you need to create a selection set. A selection set can consist of a single object, or it can be a more complex grouping. In order to select a member in the drawing area, “Select Mode” should be active. To activate the “Select Mode” you can:



Press the “Pick” button in the “Member” pulldown (or toolbar), or re-press one of the member buttons,



Pick a member in the “Structure Tree”,



Choose one of the “Select Entity” options in the “Edit” pulldown (or toolbar).



Close the “Properties Window” if visible.

It must be noted that only visible objects can be selected using one of the selection methods. You can make modifications to the members of the selection set. If only a single member is selected, the related properites will be loaded for editing. If multiple elements are selected, only group editing like deleting or mirroring can be performed. Use one of the following methods to create selection sets:

Pick Mode In order to select an element, “Select Mode” must be active. You can select a member by clicking: 

On one of the entities that form the member in the “Plan Window” or,



On one of the entities that form the member in the “3-D Window” or,



The member’s label in the “Structure Tree”.

When the select mode is active, clicking a new member will clear any previous selection set and only the last picked member will be selected. In order to add multiple members to the selection set, hold down the Ctrl key while picking. If a selected element is picked again, then it will be de-selected. All the selected elements will be highlighted.

Window Selections You can select objects by enclosing them in a selection window. A selection window is a rectangular area that you define in the drawing area by specifying two corner points. Dragging from left to right or right to left will create a selection window. You can create a selection window by pressing either “Select Entity (Window)” or “Select Entity (Crossing)” options in the Edit toolbar. Window selection selects only objects entirely within the selection area. Crossing selection selects objects within and objects crossing the selection area.

Window Selection: Selects 1C1 only Crossing Selection: Selects 1C1, 1C3, Axes A and 1 Window Selection Examples After picking the first point, you can activate “Window” selection by dragging the mouse cursor in positive x direction in the plan view. The rubber band lines will appear as solid when the Window selection is active. Similarly, you can activate “Crossing” selection by dragging the mouse cursor in negative x direction in the plan view. The rubber band lines will appear as dashed when the Crossing selection is active. Automatic selection modes will not be active when Member Insertion mode is active (i.e. when one of the member button is pressed).

Member Selections Using Structure Tree You can pick a Member Label in the Structure tree with the left mouse button to add the member to the selection set. Any subsequent pick from the structure tree will cancel the previous selection if “Ctrl” or “Shift” key is not pressed before selection. “Ctrl” or “Shift” keys can be used to make multiple selection in this window.

Member Selections Using 3D Window You can pick a Member in one of the 3D Windows with the left mouse button to add the member to the selection set. Any subsequent pick from the 3D Window will cancel the previous selection if “Ctrl” or “Shift” key is not pressed before selection. “Ctrl” or “Shift” keys can be used to make multiple selection in this window.

Displaying Member Properties Member Properties can also be accessed by right-clicking after selecting an existing member and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. Properties of the selected member will be loaded. Alternatively, right clicking over the top of an existing member and selecting the “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu will also load its properties. Repeating member labels are not permitted in a building. During the insertion of members a warning note will appear in the status bar if a repeating member label is detected.

Using the Shortcut Menus You can right-click your mouse to display shortcut menus from which you can quickly choose specific options related with the selected member(s). The options provided by shortcut menus may also be accessed by the pulldowns. Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. The shortcut menu that is displayed, and the options it provides, depends on the cursor location and the object selected.

Right-Clicking in the Plan Window Right clicking in the drawing area will display shortcut menus only if a member or a group of members are selected. The shortcut menu may contain options specific to the type and to the number of members selected. “Delete” and “Mirror” are default options for all of the shortcut menus displayed in the drawing area. If only a single member is selected, right-clicking will display “Properties” option by which you can access the “Properties Window” related with the selected member. This option will not be included in the shortcut menus when multiple selection is performed although the selected members belong to the same menu group. When the “Properties Window” for a selected member is open, right clicking on another member will display “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu. The properties of the selected member will automatically be loaded in the related “Properties Window”.

Right-Clicking in the Structure Tree Shortcut menus can also be displayed by right-clicking the nodes in the structure tree.

Right Clicking in the Toolbar Area (Customization) Right clicking on any toolbar will display a list of toolbar menu groups. You can hide, display, or customize toolbars within this shortcut menu.

Creating Members with Mirroring The "Mirror" command can be used to facilitate the creation of the members in symmetrical buildings. After completing one part of the floor plan, the other part can be generated with the mirror command. To mirror the elements: 1. Select the members that will be mirrored.

2. Choose the "Mirror Elements" option in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking after selection). 3. Pick an axis element that is going to be used as the axis of symmetry for mirroring. Note that, if such an axis does not exist, you can create one and delete it after completing mirroring. 4. The "Mirror Characters" form will be loaded. Specify the trailing characters to be used for the generation of the member labels. For example, if "S" is used for beams, then when the beam "1B3" is mirrored, the created element will have the label as "1B3S". Note that, if "1B3S" already exists in the floor plan, then the label of the new member will be "1B3X". 5. After closing the "Mirror Characters" form with "OK" button, the process will be started. Wait until the process is completed. During mirroring, ProtaStructure will use Create Member command in a loop with new member positions. Due to this fact, results obtained by the mirror command may not be as expected in particular models. In such cases, you may be required to make manual modifications to some members created by mirroring. Axes perpendicular to the axis of symmetry will be extended automatically to create intersections with the mirrored axes. Mirror command requires that read-only lock of axes to be removed before running this command. Following cases are examples to the known misbehaviours:

Mirroring Support Band Beams "Support Band" beams that are used to mark the support regions in a flat slab system are required to be inserted after the creation of the slab panels. The section dimensions of these beams are determined using the dimensions of the slab panels that they touch. Therefore, ProtaStructure mirrors these beams after the creation of all other members. If there are support band beams defined along the symmetry axis, the section dimensions of these beams should be re-defined based on the new floor plan geometry. Therefore, you have to select these beams, delete and re-insert them in order to update their dimensions. Also note that, any manual modification to the loads of the support band beams will be lost during mirroring.

Mirroring Beams with Manually Modified Loads Any manual modifications to the loading of the beams are lost during mirroring. Therefore, if you have any beams with manually edited loads you need to re-enter these modifications to the beams that are generated by mirroring.

Mirroring Members with Labels Already Existing in the Floor Plan Members cannot be generated if another member with the same label already exists in the floor. ProtaStructure will use "X" as the mirror character in such situations. For example, if the beam mirror character is "S" and beam "2B25" will be mirrored; the resulting member label will be "2B25S". If the beam element "2B25S" already exists in the floor plan, then the generated beam will be labelled as "2B25X".

Note that, if both "2B25" and "2B25S" exists prior to mirroring, then one of the beams will be mirrored as "2B25X" and the other beam will be ignored. In such cases, “+” buttons in the Symmetry Characters Dialog may be used. If “+” button is pressed in a particular member group, then the first available number will be assigned as label to the generated members.

Mirroring Walls with One End on the Symmetry Axis Two wall elements cannot be inserted along the same axis without leaving an empty bay in between. Due to this modelling rule, if a wall exists perpendicular to the symmetry axis and with one end on that axis, it will not be mirrored. If you have such a wall, you need to delete it and re-define a single wall covering the whole length.

Floors with Members Failing in Building Model Validity Check It is always best to make "Building Model Validity Check" before mirroring a floor. Unexpected fatal errors may occur if a floor plan includes invalid members. It may also be an accepted workaround to check "Do Not Check Model During Member Insertion" option under the “Plan” tab in the "Graphic Editor View Options" before running the mirror command (This option should only be used temporarily, or otherwise should be avoided).

Move Members to Axes All members are inserted based on the positions specified by axis intersections. If, for any reason, you have to modify the position of the axes, the members that are inserted based on these axes must also be updated. You can use the "Move Members to Axes" option in the "Edit" pulldown or in the toolbar to automatically re-position the members based on modified axis intersections. "Move Members to Axes" modifies all columns, walls, supports, beams, slabs and ribbed slabs based on the modified axis positions. Note: Slab strips will not be updated based on the modified axes. Therefore, any reinforcement attached to the strips may be incompatible with the new geometry. You have to delete all affected steel bars and update them for the new plan geometry.

Re-Label Members The “Re-Label Members” menu option in “File” pulldown may be used to re-assign the member labels for particular member groups. Members can be re-labelled pressing “OK” button after selecting one or more member groups.

Members You can check the member groups to be re-labelled using the check-boxes in this section.

Storeys Using the dropdown lists in this section, you may re-label only the members in the range defined by “First Storey” and “Last Storey”. For re-labelling the members in a single storey, you can select the same storey in both lists. These lists are disabled when “All Storeys” box is checked.

Sort Reference Member labels may be sorted based on the available references provided in this section. For example, if the sort reference point is “Left-Top à Right-Bot” then the member numbers will start from the upper left corner of the plan and increase from left to right and top to bottom. Similarly, if the sort reference point is “Right-Top à Left-Bot” then the member numbers will start from the upper right corner of the plan and increase from right to left and top to bottom. “Left-Bot à Right-Top” and “Right-Bot à Left-Top” options are also available and they are analogous with “Left-Top à Right-Bot” and “Right-Top à Left Bot” If the “Sort Row wise” option button is checked, then member labels will increase first horizontally (along x-axis) then vertically (along y-axis). If “Sort Column wise” option button is checked, then priority will be along y-axis. “Group Members by Direction” option is only used for beams and wall members. When this option is checked, horizontal beams will be labelled first. “Reference Angle” is used to identify the direction of the horizontal beams. When Reference Angle is zero, then horizontal beams are along global X-axis.

Group Cantilever Slabs Separately Occasionally you may want to label the cantilever slabs after finishing labelling the standard panels. In this case, “Group Cantilever Slabs Separately” option must be checked.

Labelling Options Several options in this section are provided to increase the flexibility of the re-labelling operation.

Retain Compatible Labels Between Storeys If this option is checked, members that are at the same insertion are labelled using the same member number. For example, all columns in axis intersection B and 12 are numbered using the same number, say 25. In this case, the labels of this column will be 1C25, 2C25, 3C25 etc. The bottom-most storey members used in “Storey” section are used as reference members in this option. In this case, the members which does not exist in the bottom-most storey will be labelled after finishing all members in that storey. This option is only valid if more than one storey at a time is selected for re-labelling.

Member Number Start Value Member numbers will be started using the value specified in this field. This is useful when the project consists of more than one block and unique member numbers are used.

Object Snap Options During object creation commands, you can snap the cursor to points on the drawing entities such as endpoints, midpoints, intersections and centres. For example, you can insert an axis element from an intersection created by two existing axis elements to the midpoint of another axis. Object snap options can be turned on by picking the desired object snap function from the “Object Snap tab” in the “Display Settings” before making a point selection or for dragging. During the insertion of structural members such as columns, beams and walls, the intersection object snap mode is automatically assumed and only axis intersections are considered.

Available Object Snap Modes:

Entity Intersection When the Intersection object snap mode is active, the nearest intersection of entities is snapped. Intersection mode snaps to the intersection of the objects and also the vertices of the polylines.

Smart Points Along Members When the Smart Point along members object snap mode is active, the beam and wall insertions will snap to the 0.25L, 0.33L, 0.5L, 0.67L and 0.75L of the existing wall and beam members

Perpendicular (Smart Points) When the Perpendicular object snap mode is active, the cursor snaps to a point perpendicular to the picked entity.

Start/ End/ Corner When the Start/ End/ Corner object snap mode is active, the nearest Start/ End/ Corner point of the picked entity to the point selected is snapped.

Middle/Center When the Middle/ Center object snap mode is active, the cursor snaps to the middle/ center of the picked entity.

Stepwise Polar (CTRL) When the stepwise polar mode is active, the object (except wall and beam) can be inserted with the angle step by holding down the CTRL key.

Osnap Tracking (Extensions) When osnap tracking is active, the extensions to the endpoints of axes is snapped.

Orthogonal Grid When the orthogonal grid object snap mode is active, the cursor snaps to the orthogonal grid in the background.

Measure Using the “Measure” option in the right-click shortcut menu, you can measure distance in the plan layout window. In order to measure the distance between two points: 1. Pick the “Measure” option. 2. Press the left mouse button at the first point, drag to the second point and release the button. The distance measured between these two points will appear in the Status Bar.

Storey Related Controls and Settings Using the options in the "Building" pulldown, storey information can be modified and an active storey can be selected.

Select Storey The Graphic Editor is organised to let the user work on one storey at a time. The active storey can be selected using the "Select Storey" option in the "Building" pulldown. Or you can select a storey (to make it current) from the “Structure Tree”. To do this, right-click on the label of the storey you want to make current and this will display a list of storey related options in the shortcut menu. If you choose the “Select Storey” option, the selected storey will appear in the drawing area and will be marked as current. A shortcut for quick selection for the active storey is also available in the "Building" toolbar in the dropdown list form. Using this dropdown list, the storey where the structural members are to be inserted can be selected.

Insert Storey This menu option is used to define or modify the number of storeys in the building.

Total Number Of Storeys If a storey number greater than the total number of storeys in the building is entered, the number of storeys in the building is increased using the data provided in the top storey before insertion. This form can also be used to insert storeys between the available floors. For example, in a "5 storey" building, entering "2" as the "New Storey to Add" will insert a new 2nd storey to the building and storeys 2 to 5 will be shifted up as storeys 3-6. The height of the new storey will be the same as the 1st storey.

Generate Storey Building systems generally contain similar storeys. The information on a given storey can easily be copied to another storey using the "Generate Storey" menu option in the "Building" pulldown.

Note that a new storey cannot be added using this form. In order to increase the number of storeys in a building, use "Insert Storey".

The following fields will be available in this form:

Source Storey Select the storey that will be used as the source of information for the generation from the dropdown list of available storeys in the building.

Target Storey(s) The storey (or storeys) to be generated can be selected from the list of available storeys in the building. All the information defined in the "Source Storey" will be copied to the "Target Storey(s)". During the copy operation, member labels will be generated to comply with the label conventions of the target storey. For example, when beam "1B20" is copied to the 3rd floor, the new beam will have the label "3B20".

Member Types to be Generated

You can use the member type filters to filter out the members that are not to be generated to the target storey. For example, if the slabs in the target storey are different, you may not want to copy the slabs from the source storey to the target storey. You can uncheck the "Slabs" in this frame to prevent the slabs to be generated in the target storey.

Delete Storey Information All the information in a given storey can be deleted using the "Delete Storey Information" menu option in the "Building" pulldown or in the “Storey Menu” toolbar. Select the storey (or storeys) from the storey table to be deleted. When “OK” button is pressed a warning message will be displayed. Following this warning, all the defined objects in the selected storey(s) will be deleted. Note that the number of storeys in the building cannot be decreased using this menu option. In order to decrease the number of storeys in a building, use "Remove Storey".

Remove Storey One or more selected storey in the building can be removed using the "Remove Storey" menu option in the "Building" pulldown. Select the storey(s) from the storey table that will be displayed when this form is used. Pressing “OK” will remove the selected storey(s) and the number of storeys in the building will be decreased accordingly.

Edit Storey Use the "Edit Storey" option in the "Building" pulldown to modify the parameters of a particular storey. A table loaded with the parameters of the storeys will be displayed when this option is used. Using the options in this form you can modify "Storey Height", "Storey Label", “Imposed Load Reduction”, “Generation”, “1st Storey Bottom Level”, and “Foundation Depth” fields.

Storey Height (h) The storey height of a particular floor of the building is specified here. Storey height is defined as the distance between the top reference levels of the successive floors.

Storey Label Structural members defined in a particular storey are generated using the storey label associated to that storey. The storey label of the 1st floor can be defined using this field. For example, if the storey label is defined as "100", then the beams will be created as "1B1", "1B2", etc. in this storey.

Storey Description The description of a particular floor of the building is specified here. For example, Ground floor, Roof and etc. Imposed Load Reduction Axial imposed load reduction values (%) for column and walls. If you modify any of the imposed load reduction factors, a warning note will appear reminding to save the project according to the new values specified.

1st Storey Bottom Level Reference levels of the floors can be controlled using the "1st Storey Bottom Level" field. All the upper storeys will be positioned using this reference level.

Foundation Depth The value entered here is used solely to control the length of starter bars on the detail drawings, minimum value 100mm. The actual value entered is not analytically significant. Assume Roof as Normal Storey If you check this box, the roof level is counted in the number of floors when determining the imposed load reductions to be applied.

Plane width (D1 and D2) D1: Plane width parallel to the primary earthquake loading direction. Used in Eccentricity calculation and top level earthquake load. D2: Plane width perpendicular to the primary earthquake loading direction. Used in Eccentricity calculation and top level earthquake load.

Total wall area (Wall 1 and Wall 2) W1: Total wall area of the storey along earthquake direction 1. Used in weak storey irregularity check. W2: Total wall area of the storey along earthquake direction 2. Used in weak storey irregularity check.

Define selected storeys as similar It is not required to define the members in all similar storeys of the building. Only the information in the key storeys is required. The information in all the other similar storeys can be defined by selecting all the similar storeys from the list and using the “Define selected storeys as similar” to create the similar storeys. If the selected storeys (more than one storey) are already populated. Source storey of generation must be selected. All information in the target storey(s) will be removed. Storey data will be generated when you press the “OK” button.

Reset (Similar storey) If you want to unlink the similar storey(s), you can select the storey(s) in the list and press the “Reset” button to unlink the storey(s) from the other similar storey(s).

Zooming and Panning The Graphic Editor provides several ways to control the display of the drawing in plan and 3D windows. You can zoom to change the magnification or pan to reposition the view in the drawing area. All display control options are located in the "View" pulldown and the toolbar. The following options are available:

ReGen The “ReGen” command re-generates all drawing entities using stored geometry information.

Zoom Window You can quickly zoom in on an area by picking the opposite corners of the zoom window that defines it. After selecting the "Zoom Window" option, specify the opposite corners of the zoom window in the drawing area by dragging two points.

Zoom Previous All zoom operations are stored. So, anytime, a previous display can be recalled using the "Zoom Previous" option.

Zoom Extents "Zoom Extents" displays a view that includes all selected objects in the current storey at the highest magnification that will fit in the drawing area.

Zoom Limits "Zoom Limits" displays a view that includes all objects contained within the active sheet borders at the highest magnification that will fit in the drawing area.

Zoom In and Zoom Out "Zoom In" increases the magnification of the current view by 20% and "Zoom Out" decreases the magnification by a similar amount. This option can be used to quickly zoom in and out to the center of the current view. “Zoom In” and "Zoom Out" functionalities are assigned to the mouse wheel. If you rotate mouse wheel forward you can zoom-in and if you rotate mouse wheel backward you can zoom-out the active view. If the 3D Windows are visible, the wheel will control the window that has the focus.

Pan After selecting the "Pan" option, you can pan the drawing image to a new location by dragging two points that defines the pan direction and amount. “Pan” functionality is assigned to the middle mouse button. If you press and drag the middle mouse button (wheel button in IntelliMouse) you can pan the plan and 3D windows.

3-D View Multiple 3D Views of the model can be concurrently made active by right click the “Views” in the structure tree and select the “3D view”. A 3-D perspective view of the whole model can be displayed which can be filtered to display only specific storeys, axes, or member types as required. Settings are provided to customise the 3-D view, allowing colours, textures and a wide variety of other effects to be applied.

The 3-D view is useful for both checking the structural system and also for the creation of 3-D presentation images. Any member in the 3-D window can be selected by clicking with the mouse. The selected member will be highlighted in the plan window as well.

3-D Windows Alternatively, click the options in the “Window” pulldown and choose one of the cascade, tilt vertical or horizontal options. After choosing the options, the drawing area will be subdivided by number of separate windows. If you open 3-D views before inserting structural members, members can be defined and edited in the 3-D view as well. This effective and powerful property of ProtaStructure enables you to work in a more efficient and error free manner.

3-D View Controls You can zoom the 3-D view by using “Regen”, “Zoom Window”, “Zoom Previous” , “Zoom Extents”, “Zoom Limits”, “Zoom to Selected” buttons. Besides, you can spin and zoom the 3-D View by using the mouse buttons. If you rotate mouse wheel forward, you can zoom-in and if you rotate mouse wheel backward you can zoom-out the 3-D view. The wheel will control the window that has the focus. Right mouse button is assigned to spin functionality. If you press and drag the right mouse button you can spin the 3-D view.

Active Windows Setting and Visual Interrogation You can make modifications in 3-D Windows using the “Active Windows Setting and Visual Interrogation” under the “View” pulldown or View control buttons.

Visual Interrogation "Visual Interrogation" can be used to show various colour coded displays in both plan and 3-D views. For example, by selecting one of the slab load interrogation types from the drop down menu you can readily keep track of where particular types of load have been applied throughout the building. To return to the normal display of the model, simply choose the None from the list of criteria for recoloring.

Visibility Filters Filters dialog window can be loaded in “Visibility Filters” tab. The filters provide options to control the visibility of all member groups (such as columns, walls, beams, etc) and specific axes for the selected storey(s). The changes made in “Visibility Filters” dialog will be updated immediately in the 3-D view.

Storey In order to select any specific storey(s), click on the related storey label(s) in the “Storeys” pull down list. Pressing “Select All” button will select all the storeys in the structure, whereas, checking “Active Storey Only” button will select only the current storey to be displayed in the 3-D window.

Frame axis Choosing a specific axis in the “Frame Axis” pull down list will only display the members on that axis. In order to display the selected member groups on all axes, choose the “Select All” option.

Member Type You can also control the display of members in the selected storey(s). Checked member groups in the “Member Type” pull down list will be displayed in the selected storey(s). To select a member group, check the member group name. Clicking on a checked member group will deselect it.

Scene Settings After pressing the “Scene Settings” tab, the settings dialog window will be loaded accordingly.

Display Style “Display Style” allows you to control the appearance of structural members using “Wireframe”, “Shaded”, “Rendered”, “Flat” and “Hidden Line” options. The desired view will be displayed in the 3-D window immediately after pressing the related option button in the menu.

Camera Projection Perspective or orthogonal views of the 3-D model can be activated by selecting the “Perspective” or “Orthogonal in the list of camera projection.

Compass & Coordinate Axis By checking the “Compass” option in the dialog window will result in the Cartesian coordinate symbol to be displayed in 3-D window.

The “Coordinate Axis” allows you to switch on/off the coordinate axis symbol in the 3-D View on the orthogonal grid.

Grid The orthogonal grid at the background can be displayed in 3-D window by checking the “Grid” option. The grid step and colors can be configured in the Grid tabs of Display settings.

Bounding Box If the “Bounding Box” is checked, a rectangular box with dashed edges will be displayed and the model will be enclosed in the box.

Structural Modelling (Contents) Techniques for member creation and loading are described in this section. Also described here are those other modelling related functions contained on the “Member” pulldown. Additional modelling related topics can be found in the preceding Graphic Editor Basics section. 

Working with Axes



Working with Columns - Defining/ Editing a Column, Column Properties, Polyline Column Editor, and Column Column Nodal and Span Loads



Working with Walls - Defining/Editing a wall, and Wall Properties



Working with Beams - Defining/ Editing a Beam, Beam Properties, Defining Curved Beam Members, Defining Beams out of Columns Insertion Points, and Loading Decomposition Methods (Yield Line/FE)



Working with Beam Loads



Working with slabs - Defining/ Editing a Slab, and Slab Properties



Working with Ribbed Slabs - Defining/Editing a Ribbed Slab, and Ribbed Slab Properties



Working with Slab Openings



Working with Slab Strips



Working with Slab Loads



Working with Planes



Column Support Type Definitions



Slab Additional Loads Library



Wall Types Library



Temperature Loads

Foundation members (Pad Bases, Pile Caps, Strip Footing etc.) are described elsewhere - see Foundation Modelling and Design.

Typical Steps for Creating a Model Typical steps for the creation of a building model are outlined below. The forms for the first three steps will automatically appear when a new project is defined. Note: Instructions such as ‘pick the "Building Analysis" option in the "Run" menu’ are shortened to ‘pick “Run/Building ANalysis” ’ 1. Choose an appropriate template from "Setting Control Center" to set up the required design codes and initial parameters then click "Import". The settings can be reviewed and modified at any time during the building model creation via the "Settings" menu. 2. Define the storey information for the 1 st storey in the building. "Storey Height", "Storey Label" and "1st Storey Bottom Level" fields must be defined. Click "OK" to close the dialog box. If the building has only one storey level then the storey data is complete. If not, pick “ Building/ Insert Storey”. Enter the total number of storeys in the building. All storeys will have identical heights as defined by the height of the 1st storey. (You are therefore advised to define the 1 st storey with a typical height initially, and revise it if necessary after the other storeys have been inserted.) To edit any of the properties of any storey pick “Building/Edit Storey”. More storeys related information can be studied in Storey Related Controls and Settings section. 3. Axes are the references for all structural members. Therefore, they must be specified before the columns and beams. Pick “Member/Axis” to load the Axis Properties. Axes that intersect are grouped as "1" and "2". 4. Group "1" axes are the ones that have a closer angle to the horizontal (x-axis) and group "2" axes are the ones that intersect these axes. To create an axis; define the "Axis Label", set the direction code ("1" or "2") and drag two points in the drawing area. The axis will be created when you release the left mouse button. More information of the axis modeling techiques can be studied in Working with Axes section. 5. Select the storey at which you want to start defining members by double-clicking the related storey title (St-nn) in "Structure Tree" or by picking “Building/Select Storey”. Alternatively, you can right-click the “Storeys” option in the “Structure Tree” and then click “Select Storey”. 6. Structural members such as columns, walls, beams and slabs can be defined at this time using crossing axes as references for their insertion. Typically columns and walls are defined prior to the beams. More details are available for creating these members in the related sections below. Building systems usually consist of similar storeys. You can generate similar storeys above or below the active storey and edit only the differences. To generate a storey pick “Building/Generate Storey”. Member labels are also generated based on the label of the target storey. For example, the beam "1B20" in the source storey (which is "1") will be generated to 4th storey as "4B20". Floors that are completely similar do not have to be generated in the Graphic Editor. Similar storeys are defined in Edit Storey menu (Building drop down). Refer to Storey Related Controls and Settings. 7. Upon completion of the building model, pick “Run/Building Analysis” to load the Building Analysis form. Click “Edit Load Combinations” on the “Pre-Analysis tab” to review the Load Combinations that

will be designed for. To generate a different set of combinations click “Loading Generator”. Using the “Model Options” tab, select modelling options for the analysis (eg. Wall model, diaphragm options, etc) 8. Check the “Building Analysis” box on the “Analysis” page. Also, if required at this stage you can check “Beam Section Design and Detailing” or “Column Section Design” to perform the design calculations. 9. Click the "Start" button to start the analysis process of the building. Following the completion of the building analysis, some post-analysis processes will be carried out to prepare the design data. The beam and column designs will then automatically be performed if the relevant boxes were checked. 10. Providing analysis results are available the beam and column designs can be performed at any time by picking “Run/Beam Section Design and Detailing” or “Run/Column Section Design”. 11. “Pad Foundation”, “Strip Footing”, “Pile Foundation” or “Raft Foundation” calculations can be done at “Storey 0” level.

Working with Axes Axis Properties "Axis Properties” will be loaded by selecting the "Axis" option in the "Member" pulldown (or toolbar) or by choosing the "Properties" option in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking the mouse) after the selection of an existing axis. The "Axis Properties” form has two tab pages named as "General" and "Insertion". You can switch between pages by picking the related tab heading. A new axis can be defined by specifying the necessary information in the given fields in the form and by specifying the endpoints of the axis line in the drawing area.

Typical Axis Grid The "Axis Properties” form comprises the following fields: Label This field defines the unique label that identifies the axis. This label is limited to 6 characters for convenience. Repetitive labels in the same building are not allowed. As in all member types, "Member List" in the "Member" pulldown can be used to list the members of the same type to provide easy access. This list can be used to select any member by label. A text controller spin button to the right of the label field is used to facilitate the creation of successive label text. For example, if the label in this field is "A", then the subsequent axis labels will be "B", "C", etc. View Codes This field allows the user to define secondary axes that do not exist in architectural plan. Unchecking this field creates a “Ghost” axes which can be hidden using the “Ghost Axis Layers” layer option. Length This field can be used to monitor the actual length of the axis during dragging of the second insertion point or after the insertion of the axis. Angle This field can be used to monitor the axis angle during dragging of the second insertion point or after the insertion of the axis. Not to Plot Option Usually, the axes that do not exist in the architectural plans can be coded as "Not to Plot". "Not to Plot" coded axes will not be transferred to the DXF files and will not be printed. Direction Code TIP: Members’ insertionIntersecting axes are marked with "1" and "2" direction codes. To create a points must be thegood building model, axes with direction closer to global x-axis should be intersection of at leastcoded as "1" and all the other axes that intersect these axes should be one direction "1" codedcoded as "2". axis and one direction All members are inserted on axis intersections. "2" coded axis Axis Balloons Plot Control Occasionally, one of the axis balloons may not be visible. You can use this button to change the visibility of one of the balloons. Update Button Whenever you make new specifications in one of the fields in “Axis Properties” form for an existing axis member, press the “Update” button in order to display the changes in the plan window. Close Pressing the “Close” button will close the “Axis Properties” form and return back to “Select Mode”.

Defining a New Axis Use the following steps to create a new axis:

1. Click the "Axis" menu option in the "Member" pulldown to load “Axis Properties”. 2. Modify the data in the fields of the “Properties” form. For example, define the "Axis Label", select the "Direction code" and make sure that "Frame Axis" field is checked if this is going to be a frame axis. 3. Pick the axis insertion points by dragging two points in the plan view drawing area. Press the left mouse button in the first point and drag to second point and release the button. The new axis will appear. "Length Step" and "Angle Step" can be used to control the direction and length of the dragged grid during insertion. In order to activate these options and to constrain cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical directions (or relative to the angle defined) hold down the Ctrl key while dragging to the second point and release the key after left mouse button. 4. You can also generate parallel axes from an existing axis. To do this, first select an existing axis and right-click the mouse to open the shortcut menu. Then choose "Offset Axis" option to activate the related form for the generation. If the "Axis Properties" form is active during the selection of an axis, you can activate the form for generation also by choosing the "Offset Axis" in the "Modify" toolbar. When the related form appears on the screen, enter values in the "Offset from Previous" field to specify the offset distance from the existing axis. The new axis will be placed at the given offset from the previous axis on the side picked. "Step" field indicates the automatic increment of the axis label for the new axis. To define another label, modify the "Axis" field before clicking the offset side.

Defining a Curved Axis The method for defining Curved Axes is as follows: 1. Press the “Axis” button located in the toolbar to load the “Axis Properties” form. Enter the Axis Label in the “Label” field. 2. Choosing the “Curve Axis Insertion” from the insertion method, press the left mouse button at the start point and drag to the end point and release the button. First and second points defined in this way will be the “I” and “J” points of the axis respectively. You can press “F2” to define the chord offset of the axis. Note that you can use negative values in the dialog. After editing the fields in this dialog, press the “ENTER” button to complete the definition of the curved axis. The axis will be drawn on the screen accordingly.

Orthogonal Axis Generation The “Axis Generator” form can be used to create a group of axes in both direction codes. To access this form, choose the “Orthogonal Axis Generator” option in the “File” pulldown. Then, pick a point in the plan window as the lower-left reference point for the generation. After picking the reference point “Axis Generator” dialog box will appear on the screen. You should specify the necessary values for the generation in the fields described below;

Grid Insertion Includes the “Reference Point” and “Insertion Angle” fields. X and Y coordinates of the previously picked reference point is automatically given in the Reference Point fields. These values may be changed to specify a new reference point. Insertion angle is the rotation angle of the axes to be generated in both directions (“ 1” and “2”) in anticlockwise direction relative to their default directions. Direction-1 Axes Comprises the “Number of Axes”, “Axis Label”, “Step”, “Axis Spacing(s)” and “Axis Extension Length” fields to be filled for the dir-1 axes to be generated. Number of Axes indicates the number of dir-1 axes to be generated. Axis label defines the start label of the new dir-1 axis. If there are any previously defined dir-1 axes in the plan window, the program will automatically continue from the last label defined. Step field indicates the label increment for the successive dir-1 axes to be generated. Axis Spacing(s) field indicates the distance between each subsequent dir-1 axes. Axis Extension Length indicates the extension length of the dir-1 axes. Direction-2 Axes Comprises the “Number of Axes”, “Axis Label”, “Step”, “Axis Spacing(s)”and “Axis Extension Length” fields to be filled for the dir-2 axes to be generated. Number of Axes indicates the number of dir-2 to be generated. Axis label defines the start label of the new dir-2 axis. If there are previously defined dir2 axes in the plan window, the program will automatically continue from the last label defined. Step field indicates the label increment for the successive dir-1 axes to be generated. Axis Spacing(s) field indicates the distance between each subsequent dir-2 axes. Axis Extension Length indicates the extension length of the dir-2 axes.

Axis Shortcut Menu You can access the most-often used command options for the axis members in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking the mouse) after selecting an axis (or a group of axes). A shortcut menu for a single axis selection comprises “Offset”, “Move”, “Stretch”, “Rotate”, “List Members Using The Axis”, “Link Intersecting Axes” options specific to an axis member. It must be noted that the “Rotate” option will be omitted from the shortcut menu when multiple axes are selected.

“Delete”, “Mirror Elements” and “Properties” options are default options in shortcut menus for all member types. All the options provided in an axis shortcut menu may also be accessed by using the pulldowns.

Creating Parallel Axes by Offsetting “Axis Offset” form will be loaded when an axis is defined by dragging two points in the drawing area assuming that subsequent axes will be created parallel to the current axis. “Axis Offset” form can also be accessed by clicking the “Offset Axis” option in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking the mouse) after selecting the reference axis. To define a new axis parallel to the selected axis, press “F2” to enter the offset distance in the the field and press “ENTER” to accept and insert the axis.

Axis Offset Parameters

Moving an Axis The "Move Axis" form will be loaded automatically by selecting the “Move Axis” option in the axis shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking the mouse after selecting an axis). The position of the currently selected axis can be defined by pressing “F2” and will be shifted at a distance indicated in the “Move Offset Distance” field without any label change. This option is valid only for a single selection. If there are multiple axes in a selection set, only the most recently selected axis member will be moved. When an axis is moved, the members that reference this axis will also be rearranged automatically according to new axis position. All members can be moved to their supposed positions by using “Move Members To Axes” option located on the “Edit” toolbar or pulldown.

Stretching an Axis End-points of the axis can be stretched (elongated or shortened) by choosing the "Stretch Axis" option in the axis shortcut menu. To stretch an end-point of an axis: 1. Select an axis (or a parallel array of axes) by using "Pick" or one of the "Select Entity" options in the “Edit” pulldown (or by using one of the selection methods described previously). Click the "Stretch Axis" option in the axis shortcut menu.

2. To define the amount of the stretch, either: 

Hover over the grip at the end of the axis, it will turn to red. Then you can click and drag it to stretch all selected axes, or only one if single selection is made.



Or, drag two points closer to the end of the axis (or the parallel array of axes) to be stretched. Release the left mouse button when the new position is set. The direction of axis line(s) will not be altered by the stretch function. The selected axis line(s) will be stretched by the absolute length of the dragging line in XY plane. You can use the object-snap modes or pressing “F2” (insert the stretching distance and press “Enter”) to position the new point precisely.

Multiple Axis Stretching Parameters While stretching multiple axes, in order to prevent unexpected stretching effects, try to avoid selecting axes with varying directions. The selected axes should be parallel or must have nearly the same direction angles. Elongation or shortening effects will be achieved in responce to the dragging direction.

Rotating an Axis 1. The direction of the axis can be re-defined using the "Rotate Axis" option in the shortcut menu. To define the new axis direction:Select the axis. Click “Rotate Axis” option in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking). The “Axis Properties” form will be loaded. 2. Click the rotation base point in the drawing area. Rotation base point can be picked by using one of the object-snap modes. For example, if you want to pick the intersection of two axes as rotation base point, press the "Intersection" button in the Osnap Form, position the square on the cursor close to the desired intersection and click the left mouse button. 3. By pressing “F2” you can enter the new axis angle (measured counter-clockwise from the horizontal) to the "Angle" field. Press “Enter” to accept the defined rotation

Stretch Axis to a Boundary

You can use “Stretch Axis to a Boundary” option in short-cut menu using the right mouse button after selecting one or more axes to align one end to a boundary. This option will stretch or shorten the closer ends of the selected axis to the defined boundary. 1. Select one or more axes. Click “Stretch Axis to a Boundary” option in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking). 2. Define the Boundary (by picking two points) to Stretch the Selected Axes. The closer ends of the selected axes will be extended or shortened to meet the boundary. The process will be aborted if you fail to define a proper boundary.

Stretch Axis to Member Insertions You can use the "Stretch Axis to Member Intersections" form to stretch selected or all axes automatically considering the inserted members and their intersections. In order to initiate this function, · Right click to the “Axes” in the “Structure Tree” and select "Stretch Axes to Member Insertions". In this case, the function will be applied to all axes in the model. · Select one or more axes and load the short-cut menu using the right mouse button and select “Stretch Axis to Member Insertions” option. In this case, the function will be applied to selected axes (or all axes if “Apply to All Axes” is checked) in the model. The “Stretch Axes to Member Insertions” dialog will be loaded. The axes will be stretched automatically when the “OK” button is pressed. The available options in this dialog: Consider Axis Intersections As Well If you have an orthogonal axis grid, you can check this option if you like to consider not only the member insertion points but the axis intersections as well. Shrink Only If you check this option, axes will only be shortened during this operation. Axis Extension Length The axes will be extended further away from the outer member insertion (or axis intersection if “Consider Axis Intersections As Well” is checked) by the amount entered in this field. Apply to Selected or All Axes By default, the function will only be applied to selected axes if initiated by the shortcut menu. If you check the “Apply to All Axes” option, the operation will be applied to all the axes in the model.

Axis Table You can use "Member Tables > Axis Table" in the "Member" menu to modify one or more existing axes. All cells in the table are editable. You can use the cursor keys or mouse cursor to select a cell and edit and update the contents. The "Search" button can be used to find a specific member after typing the label to the "Member" field.

Working With Columns

Defining/ Editing a Column

Defining a New Column Before inserting a column member its reference axes must be defined. To define a new column member: 1. Display the storey level in the drawing area which will contain the top of the column. 2. Pick “Column” from the “Member” menu or toolbar. 3. Edit the fields in the "Column Properties" form. For example, enter the column Label in the "Label" field (max. 8 characters) to modify the section dimensions and eccentricities. 4. To insert the column, click on the required reference point in the either the plan view drawing area or the 3D view. You have to pick an axis intersection as the reference point. 5. Labels of the reference axes will be shown in “Top” and “Bot” fields on “Column Properties” form. The same axes intersections will be written in these fields when the column is first defined. In this case column will be placed vertically along the storey levels. In order to define a column that is inclined along the storey levels, “Top” and “Bot” fields must be changed later on. Changing the insertion axes of a column is explained under “Insertion Axes” title of this section. 6. Multiple columns with the same properties can be inserted at the same time by dragging two points along an axis. Columns will be inserted at every intersection along the dragged line.

Editing an Existing Column In order to edit an existing column: 1. Select an existing column. 2. Right-click and select the “Properties” menu option. (The “Properties” form can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Column” button). 3. Modify the fields such as "b1" and "b2” in the "Column Properties" form. 4. Press the "Update" button in the “Properties” form or Right-click and select “Update” option in the Shortcut Menu. Right-clicking on any one of the “b1”, “b2”, “e1”, or “e2” fields will load a list of commonly used values that may facilitate data entry. You can repeat this process on as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method. If you want to update several columns at once, you can use "Column Table" in the

"Member" menu. The “Column Table” can also be reached from the “Member Tables” option in the shortcut menu.

Update Column End Conditions To change the end conditions for multiple columns at the same time: 1. Select the existing column(s). 2. Right-click and select “Update Column End Conditions”. 3. Choose the required end conditions. 4. Press the "Apply to Selected Columns”, “Apply to All Columns in Current Storey" or "Apply to All Columns in the Model" as required.

Related Articles: Column Properties Polyline Column Editor Column Shortcut Menu

Column Properties "Column Properties" will be loaded when the "Column" option in the "Member" pulldown (or toolbar) is selected. A new column can be defined by arranging the fields in the form and then by picking the insertion point in the plan window. The “Column Properties” form comprises three pages named as “Gen”, “Drop” and “3D”. You can shift between pages by pressing the related tab heading. The “Column Properties” form can also be accessed after selecting an existing column and then by rightclicking and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. You can select a column member by using one of the “Member Selection” methods described previously. When the “Column Properties” form is open, right clicking on a new column member in plan window and selecting the “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu will load the properties of the new member in the same window. The form comprises the following fields:

Label The label that will identify the column can be entered in this field. This field (after formatted to be a proper label) is limited to 8 characters. A text control spin button exists to the right of the label field to facilitate the creation of successive label text. As in all member types, column member labels will be listed in the “Structure Tree” under the related storey heading. This list can be used to select a member by label. Repeating member labels is not permitted in a building. During the insertion of members the program will sound an alarm and a warning message will appear in the status bar if a repeating member label is detected.

Length (Storey) Enter the number of storeys that the column spans. Generally, every column spans one storey in building type structures. If the column will span more than one storey, the number of storeys can be defined in this field. For example, if a column in the 4th storey spans to the 2nd storey top level, this means that the column will exist along 4th and 3rd storeys. Therefore, "2" must appear in the "Len (Storey)" field. TIP: Use the “Length (Storey)” field to model . buildings with alternating storeys.

Column Dimensions (b1, b2) "b1" is the section dimension of the column along the direction-1 axis it is inserted and "b2" is the other dimension orthogonal to "b1" for a rectangular column. If the direction code of the column is "1/2", then "b2" is the dimension of the column along the direction-2 axis at its insertion. "b2" dimension must be zero or negative to define a circular column. When “b2” is zero, "b1" will be the diameter of the circular column. Hollow section can be defined by entering a negative number in "b2" field that will define the inner diameter of the pipe within the column.

Column Member Section Properties

Column Eccentricities (e1, e2) "e1" and "e2" fields define the eccentricities of the column from the insertion axes along direction 1 and 2, respectively. These fields define the eccentricity between the center of the column to the axis intersection. Column eccentricities can be set easily by using the "Insertion Options” button in the form.

Column insertion point coordinates can also be arranged in the "Polyline Column Editor" dialog window displayed in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.

Column Insertion Options Button A set of column insertion option buttons are provided for facilitating the definition of “e1” and “e2” fields.

Column Insertion Options

After setting the dimensions of a column, you can easily set the column eccentricities by pressing the “Column Insertion Options” button. After pressing this button a window will appear displaying “Eccentricity Option Buttons”, “Eccentricity (a)” and “Label corner” fields.

Choosing one of the options available in the “Eccentricity Option Buttons” will automatically redefine the “e1” and “e2” fields. The "Update" button must be pressed to update the selected column with the new eccentricity values. It should be noted that the eccentricities of the column defined here will not modify the location of the actual analytical frame member used in the analysis model. The frame member will be located on the insertion point of the column. A positive value entered in “Eccentricity (a)” field is used to shift the insertion point of the column in both "1" and "2" directions. The formulation used can be viewed in the tooltip of relevant buttons. Generally, column labels are placed to the upper right corner of the column (vertex no. 3). Column vertices are numbered counter-clockwise starting from the lower/left vertex. You can occasionally modify the label corner by entering the vertex number of that corner in “Label Corner” field. Alternatively, you can control the “e1” and “e2” values using the direction keys of your keyboard. In order to modify the eccentricities, first select a column and load the “Properties” dialog. Then, when you press left or right keys, the “e1” property, when you press up or down keys, the “e2” property will be modified and the column is displaced. The eccentricity step value can be set using the “Member Section Eccentricity Step” value in “Graphic Editor View Settings” dialog.

Insertion Axes All structural members are inserted based on axis intersections as an insertion reference. At least two axes of different direction code (namely 1 and 2) must intersect at every insertion point. Labels of the reference axes will be displayed in “Top” and “Bot” fields on “Column Properties” form. Same axes intersections will be written in these fields when the column is first defined. In this case column will be placed vertically along the storey levels. In order to define a column that is inclined along the storey levels, “Top” and “Bot” fields must be changed. To change the insertion axes written in the “Top” and “Bot” fields; 1. Click on one of the axis label shown on the “Top” and “Bot” fields. The color of the label will turn red. 2. Click on the new axis on plan window. You can also pick the appropriate axis among the “Members” list that is activated when double-clicked or right-clicked on the axis labels in “ Top” and “Bot” fields. 3.

Press “Update” button.

You can also use “Pick Bottom Insertion Point” button to change the bottom insertion point of the column. For this purpose, pick the appropriate axis intersection on plan Pick Bottom window after you clicked on the “Pick Bottom Insertion Point” button. Insertion Point

Column Orientation Three options can be applied to the column to set its orientation: 1. When "1" is pressed, "b1" dimension of the column will be set parallel to the direction-1 insertion axis that appears in the "Axes" fields. "b2" dimension will be perpendicular to this direction. Area (A) is the section area of the column and Shear area is 5/6*(Section Area of column). 2. When "2" is pressed, "b2" dimension of the column will be set parallel to the direction-2 insertion axis that appears in the "Axes" fields. "b1" dimension will be perpendicular to this direction.

Column End-Condition Options (Fixed/Hinged) You can use the "Column End-Condition (Fixed/Hinged)" button to release moments of top, bottom or both ends to assume pinned-end condition. By successively pressing this button you can follow which end of the column becomes Column End-hinged. Condition When one of the ends of a column is hinged, the moments are released in two orthogonal directions.

Column Sections Column section properties and material can be evaluated in “Edit Section/ Material” (can be accessed by right-clicking the existing column member). After clicking the “Edit Section/ Material”, a “Column Sections” dialog window will be loaded. The dialog window comprised of “General”, “Properties” and “Material” tabs. The section name and display color of the wall can be changed in “General” tab. The moment of inertia, section area and shear areas can be reviewed in the “properties” tab while the grade of concrete and steel can be evaluated in the “Material” tab.

Moment of Inertia (I1, I2) Section Area (A) and Shear Area "I1" is the moment of inertia along direction-1 axis (about direction-2 axis) and "I2" is the moment of inertia along direction-2 axis (about direction-1 axis) of the column. “A” is the gross area of the section and, “Shear Area” is used for the calculation of shear deformations and is calculated automatically as "5/6" times the axial area of the section. The program calculates the section properties of rectangular and circular columns automatically if any (or all) of these fields is zero. “Polyline Column Editor” will calculate and update these fields for the polyline columns and the values will be displayed in the related fields. Note:

You can make manual modification to any of the section property fields that you want to override the automatically calculated property.

Column Material Definition Material properties (concrete and reinforcing steel grade) defined on the Pre-Analysis tab of the “Building Analysis” dialog will be assigned to the column element unless otherwise specified. The material type to be used for a particular column element can be selected using the dropdown list located in the “Material” field in the “Edit Section/Material” page. “Concrete” is selected by default and Concrete Grades can be further specified in the “Concrete” field. Using the “Concrete” field different concrete grades can be selected for any particular column element. A corresponding modulus of elasticity for the selected concrete grade will appear in “E” field accordingly. For materials other than concrete or steel, set the “Material” field to “General”. However, an appropriate Modulus of Elasticity must be specified for the material in the “E” field. For materials other than “Concrete”, the “Concrete” and “Steel” fields will be disabled and the column will not be included in the section design. Selected concrete and steel grades will be used in Column Section Design.

Concrete If this field is left as “Default”, the Modulus of Elasticity for the related column will be calculated using the Concrete Grade determined on the Pre-Analysis tab of the “Building Analysis” dialog. By selecting a different Concrete Grade from this list, you allow the program to use the corresponding Modulus of Elasticity and Characteristic Compression Strength in the calculations. The Modulus of Elasticity value will also be displayed in the “E” field on the same form. User-defined Modulus of Elasticity values which are independent of Concrete Grade can also be entered in this field.

Reinforcement Steel If this field is left as “Default”, the Steel Grade for the related column will be taken from the Pre-Analysis tab of the “Building Analysis” dialog. By selecting a different Steel Grade from this list you allow the program to use the corresponding Yield Strength in Section Design.

Drop Panel In Flat Slab type floor systems, a drop panel can be inserted on top of the columns in order to increase punching resistance. To place a drop panel, select “Drop” tab in the “Column Properties” form and check “Insert Column Drop Panel” option. Dimensions and Eccentricities of the Drop Panel can be adjusted using “b1”, “b2”, “e1” and “e2” data fields. Definition of these parameters are identical with column dimension and eccentricity parameters. In order to locate the drop panel just to center the column, press “Center” button. “e1” and “e2” values will automatically be determined according to the column size. And lastly, depth of the Drop Panel can be defined by using “h-Head” field.

Changing Relative Height of Column Bottom Nodes There are two ways to change the relative height of column bottom nodes.

The first way is to manually modify the “Del-z (bot)” field on “3D” page of the “Column Properties” form. In order to change this value: 1. Select an existing column. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. 3. Click on “3D” tab. 4. Insert the relative height from the lower storey level in “Del-z (bot)” field. (Negative values will elongate the column downwards while positive values will shorten it upwards). 5. Press “Update” button. The second way is to utilise plane members. Plane members can be used to modify more than one column at once. Besides this, a plane member may have a certain inclination and it can force the linked columns to obey the plane definition.

Assigning Column Support Type In order to define the Support Type for the Bottom Node of a column; 1. Select the column member. Load the “Column Properties” form by selecting the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. 2. Select “Default”, “None” or any other user-defined support types using the “Support Types” list located in the “3D” page of column properties form. Please refer to “Support Type Definitions” section in order to create user-defined support types. ”Default” support restrains all six degrees of freedom (DOF) at bottom nodes of all columns and walls defined in St01. In other words, all St01 columns/walls’ bottom nodes will have a fixed support, whereas other nodes in the system are not restrained. Bottom nodes of columns/walls will be free to displace, if “None” is selected. 3. Press “Update” button.

Update Button Whenever you make new specifications in one of the fields in “Column Properties” form for an existing column member, press the “Update” button in order to display the changes in the plan window.

Close Button Pressing the “Close” button will close the “Column Properties” form and return back to “Select Mode”.

Defining Offset Columns/Walls If a column/wall sits on another column/wall defined on a different axis intersection, that column/wall is said to be discontinuous in analytical way of thinking. Such a column will be indicated by a different colour. If the mentioned axis intersections are too close and if 40% of upper column’s area resides within the lower column, ProtaStructure will link these “offset” columns with automatic rigid links. By this way, unintended user errors can be tolerated.

Note: This type of modelling should be avoided. Although ProtaStructure is optimised for minimising user errors, the analysis data file size may grow unnecessarily if false modelling is intentionally used. In the offset column case, application of rigid links in long offset distances may result in reduction in axial loads and increase in moments due to eccentricity.

Related Articles: Defining/ Editing a Column Polyline Column Editor Column Shortcut Menu

Polyline Column Editor After defining a rectangular column at an intersection, this column can be converted into a polyline column by using the “Polyline Column Editor”. First, the rectangular column should be selected by using one of the “Member Selection” methods described previously. Then the "Polyline Column Editor" can be loaded from the right-click shortcut menu. When you load the Polyline Column Editor, you will first see the outline of the rectangular column. The column insertion point (intersection of the axes) is also displayed. Column vertices are numbered sequentially. The (0,0) co-ordinate is fixed at the initial position of vertex 0. The coordinates of each vertex are described by their horizontal, (dx) and vertical, (dy) offset from this position.

Adding a New Vertex A new vertex can be added by left-clicking anywhere along the column edge. The vertex will have the coordinates of the mouse pointer, but if the “Snap To Grid” option on the toolbar is enabled then the vertex will be located on the nearest grid point.

Editing Vertex Information Vertex coordinates of a polyline column or a hole inside the column can be edited by right-clicking on one of the vertices and selecting the “Edit Vertex Data” option. When the “Edit Vertex Data” option is selected a “Vertex Data” window is opened. The “dx” and “dy” cartesian vertex coordinates together with corresponding polar coordinates are displayed. In addition to these, relative distance and relative angle to the predecessor and successor vertices are displayed in “d (Prev)”, “d (Next)”, “angle (Prev)” and “angle (Next)” fields. Any modifications done in one of these fields will automatically update the corresponding values in the other fields. Changes will take effect when “Apply” button is clicked. A vertex can be deleted by using “Delete Vertex” option in the vertex shortcut menu.

Edit Vertex Information Window

Inserting a Hole Inside The Column When the mouse is right-clicked on the drawing canvas, a shortcut menu for “Hole Insertion” will be displayed. By selecting one of the “Insert Rectangular Hole” or “Insert Circular Hole” options and dragging the mouse inside the polyline section, the hole can be drawn manually. Alternatively, an offset hole can be inserted by clicking the “Offset Hole” button located on toolbar. The offset distance will be asked for and the whole section will be offset inwards by the specified amount in order to form the hole.

Editing or Moving a Hole Vertices of a hole can be edited by right-clicking on the vertex and selecting the “Edit Vertex Data” option. Furthermore, a hole can be moved by right-clicking on one of the vertices of the hole and selecting “Move Hole By Dragging” or “Move Hole By Entering Distance” Likewise, if the hole is circular, “Resize Circle” option will be displayed when one of the edges of the hole is right-clicked. Segment number of the circle must be written in “n” field. “r” indicates the radius of the circle. “DÆ” determines the location of the first point (“0” labelled point) on the circle. An angle value in degrees must be entered in this field. First point will be placed along this angle on the circle and other points will be numerated counter-clock wise. “Xc” and “Yc” are center coordinates of the circle. “Update” button will apply the changes. A hole can be deleted by selecting the “Remove Hole” option.

Chamfering a Vertex Vertices of polyline section and holes can be chamfered either by using straight lines or segmented arcs. In order to chamfer one of the vertices, right click on any of the vertices and select “Chamfer Vertex” option. Enter the chamfer distance in “Chamfer Distance” field in “Chamfer Parameters” window. Maximum chamfer distance will be the minimum of two neighbouring edge lengths. The vertex will be chamfered with a single straight line if you select “Chamfer by Straight Line” radio button.

You can select “Fillet (Insert Segmented Arc)” option to fillet the corner. Enter the arc radius in the “Chamfer Edge” field. Precision of the arc can be adjusted by increasing the segment number in “Number of Segments” field.

Removing a Chamfer or a Fillet If an edge has two neighbouring edges to be angled such that their extensions intersect each other, the edge can be assumed to be a chamfer. If this edge is right-clicked, “Remove Chamfer” option will be activated in the shortcut menu. If selected, this option will totally remove the edge and will intersect two neighbouring edges. When right-clicked on a vertex, “Delete Arc” option will be displayed if there is a predefined fillet. Fillet will be deleted and section will be restored if this option is selected.

Replace Arc with Chamfer “Replace Arc with Chamfer” option will be displayed if a vertex of a fillet is right-clicked. The segmented arc will be replaced with a straight line if this option is selected.

Cancel an Action An action can be cancelled by selecting “Cancel” option located in the shortcut menu. Alternatively, “ESC” button can be pressed from keyboard.

The Polyline Column Editor dialog window comprises the following menu options:

File Menu This menu includes “OK” and “Cancel” options. The changes made will be valid if you close this menu using the "OK" button. If you press the "Cancel" button the changes will be discarded.

Edit Menu This menu includes “Undo” option which reverses the most recent operation. You can press this option as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time, until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session. Alternatively, “Undo” option in the shortcut menu that is displayed by right-clicking can be used. When the shortcut menu is loaded, “Cancel” option can be selected in order not to do any operation.

View Menu View menu includes “Redraw”, “Zoom Extents”, “Zoom (+)”, “Zoom (-)”, “Grid Type” and “Show Vertex Markers” options. The "Redraw" command re-displays all the drawing entities in the drawing area. After a redraw, the window is refreshed. “Zoom Extents” zooms to display the drawing extents. Using one of the “Zoom (+)” or “Zoom (-)” options increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current view. Moreover, “Dynamic Zoom” and “Pan” operations can be performed by using the mouse wheel. In order for the Dynamic zoom to be enabled, a magnification factor other than “1.00x” must be entered in the “Magnification” field in the “Settings” dialog.

Type of the grids displayed on the arena can be swapped from “Rectangular” to “Hexagonal (Isometric)” grid or vice versa by selecting “Grid Type” option and its sub-options. “Change Grid” button on the toolbar can also be used to change the type of the grid.

Draw Menu “Draw” pulldown menu comprises of options such as “Snap To Grid” and “Parametric section”. When the mouse is left-clicked anywhere on the “Drawing Arena”, the vertex will be snapped to the nearest grid point if “Snap To Grid” option is enabled. Grid spacing can be modified on the "Settings" menu.

Parametric Sections Instead of creating a new column by using one of the editing options, you can choose one of the standard column sections provided by the “Standard Column Shapes” option. Common sections can be easily created by using the parametric options provided in this editor. When you select one of these column section buttons, related parameters will be available in the frame below. You can enter in the parameters and choose “OK” button to create the shape in the drawing area. The new column will overwrite any existing column information.

Manipulation Menu You can rotate or flip an existing column outline using the options provided in the “Edit” menu. “Edit”

menu

includes

“Rotate”,

“Mirror

Vertically”,

or

“Mirror

Horizontal”

options.

The modifications will be displayed in the drawing area and the new coordinates of the edges will be arranged accordingly. In order to rotate the column around its origin (insertion) point, click the “Rotate” option and enter the rotation angle in the “Angle” field in the dialog. The column will be rotated by the angle indicated, counter-clockwise, after clicking “OK” and will be displayed in the drawing area. The new coordinates of the edges will be arranged accordingly. In order to mirror the column about x or y axes of the origin (insertion) point use one of the “ Mirror Vertically” or “Mirror Horizontal” options, respectively. The column section will be mirrored 180 degrees about the chosen axis and will be displayed in the drawing area. The new column coordinates of the edges will be arranged accordingly.

Settings Menu Clicking the “Editor Settings” under the File pulldown menu will load the “Column Editor Settings”. General screen settings can be controlled by this dialog. The diameter, spacing, and number of corver/End Zone bars can be adjusted in the “Longitudinal Bars” tab. Grid Spacing to be used in the drawing area can be controlled by the "Grid Settings" tab. Grid spacing can be given separately for "X" and "Y" directions. The colour of the background, grid points, edges of the column, vertices and the origin can be selected from the "Colour" settings tab. The mouse wheel zoom step and circle segment count can be changed in “Others” tab.

After modifying some controls in the "Column Editor Settings” dialog window, you can unload the dialog window by clicking the "OK" button. If you don't want to save changes on the settings you can unload the dialog window by clicking the "Cancel" button. It should be noted that if you unload the Polyline Column Editor by clicking the "Cancel" button, all the modifications on the original rectangular column will be discarded.

Related Articles: Defining/ Editing a Column Column Properties Column Shortcut Menu

Column/Wall Shortcut Menu You can access the most often used command options for the column members in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking the mouse) after selecting a column (or a group of columns). A shortcut menu for a single column selection includes “Polyline Column Editor”, “Column Reinforcement Design”, “Column Steel Details” and “Column Punching Check” options specific to a column member. These options will be omitted from the shortcut menu when multiple columns are selected. “Delete”, “Mirror Elements” and “Properties” options are default options in shortcut menus for all member types. All the options provided in a column shortcut menu may also be accessed by using the pulldowns.

Defining Column/Wall Nodal Loads ProtaStructure applies automatic and user-defined lateral loads at each storey level. If multiple diaphragms and free nodes exist at that storey, the applied load is shared among them in proportion to their masses. Besides these, joint loads can be assigned to each of the six degrees of freedom at any individual column top node. “Define Column Nodal Load” option can be used for this purpose. As an alternative to defining wind load or soil thrust by means of user-defined lateral loads applied at the diaphragm/free joint(s), similar loads can be applied as individual column/wall nodal loads (force or moment) in element basis. Especially, loads from steel roof systems, loads due to temperature changes in these systems can easily be modelled. To define nodal loads for column/wall members: 1. Select single or multiple column/wall members you want to assign the nodal loads to. 2. Select the “Add Column/Wall Nodal Load” option located in shortcut (right-click menu). 3. Nodal load will be assigned only to selected members if you press “Apply to Selected Columns/Walls” button. All vertical members in the current storey will be assigned the same nodal load, if “Apply to All Column/Walls in the Current Storey” option is selected.

“Apply to All Column/Walls in the Current Building” enables all columns and walls in the system to possess the same nodal load. 4. After selecting one of the three options mentioned above, the “Nodal Load” form will be loaded. Select the load case from the “Load Case” list. This will determine which load case the nodal load will be defined in. Automatic Lateral Load Cases (Static EQ loading, DX; and Spectrum Loading SX) cannot hold nodal loads. For this reason, if the nodal load will be a lateral load, “User-Defined Lateral Load” or “Notional Load” type load cases must be involved in your combination group. 5. Nodal loads are grouped into two categories, namely, “Force” and “Moment”. “Fx”, “Fy” and “Fz” are along global coordinate system, whilst “Mx”, “My” and “Mz” are about global coordinate system. Right-Hand Rule applies for the direction of moments. In plan window, “+X” represents the horizontal direction from left to right and “+Y” is the vertical axis from bottom to top. “+Z” defined in opposite direction to gravity. In order to define a vertical load (gravity load), one must enter negative values to “Fz” field. Similarly, torsional moment on any of the joints is the “Mz” moment. 6. Close the form by pressing “OK” button. The entered values will be assigned to column/wall as nodal loads. To check whether there is a nodal load defined on a column/wall, hover on the element with the mouse. The “Column Tooltip Window” will include the nodal load information as well. To modify or delete the nodal loads on Column(s) or Wall(s); 1. Select the related column/wall and load the “Add Column/Wall Nodal Load” form again as described above. 2. Select the load case from the “Load Case” list. If there is a nodal load defined in the load case, program will sound an alert and a message text will be displayed at the bottom of the window. By entering a different value into the related fields (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My or Mz), you will have modified the nodal load. Entering a zero, will delete the load at that degree of freedom. In order for the changes to be valid, just press “OK” button without switching to a different load case. Note: Perform the delete/modify operation just for a single load case at a time. Same operations count for the wall members as well. As details will be explained later, if “Mid-Pier Model” is selected for the walls, the nodal load will be applied at the top column (pier) joint in the middle. Whereas, if the “FE Shell Model” is used, nodal load will equally be distributed to the nodes of the panel top edge.

Defining Column/Wall Span Loads User-defined varying distributed lateral loads can be applied to individual column and wall spans. As an alternative to defining wind load by means of user-defined lateral loads applied at the diaphragm/free joint(s), similar loads can be applied as individual column/wall nodal loads (force or moment) to columns/walls. Note: The currently specified load combination must include lateral load cases if you intend to apply column span loads. To define span loads for column/wall members: 1. Select single or multiple column/wall members you want to assign the span loads to.

2. Select the “Add Column/Wall Span Load” option located in shortcut (right-click menu). 3. The “Span Load” form will be loaded. 4. Press the “Add” button to add a row into the table. 5. Click in the Load Case cell and use the drop down button to select the lateral load case in which to place the load. 6. Define the loads and dimensions as per the diagram below.

7. Close the form by pressing “OK” button. The entered values will be assigned to column/wall as span loads. To check whether there is a span load defined on a column/wall, hover on the element with the mouse. The “Column Tooltip Window” will include the span load information as well.

Related Articles: Working with Columns - Defining/ Editing a Column Working with Columns - Column Properties Working with Columns - Polyline Column Editor

Working With Walls

Defining/Editing a wall Defining a New Wall Before inserting a wall member its reference axes must be defined.

To define a new wall member: 1. Display the storey level in the drawing area which will contain the top of the wall. 2. Press the “Wall” button located in the toolbar. 3. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Wall” button). 4. Edit the fields in the "Wall Properties" form. For example, enter the Wall Label in the "Label" field (max. 8 characters) to modify the section dimensions and eccentricities. 5. To insert the wall, find its insertion points in the plan view drawing area, or the 3D view. You have to pick two axes intersections to insert the wall. Walls are defined by two axis intersection points defining the start and end of the member. After two axis intersections are picked in the plan view or 3D view the member will be inserted. Labels of the axes that reference the “i” and “j” ends of the wall will be displayed in “Top” and “Bot” fields on “Wall Properties” form. Identical axis intersections will be written in these fields when the wall is first defined. In this case wall will be placed vertically between the storey levels. In order to define a wall that is battered between the storey levels, “Top” and “Bot” fields must be changed.

Editing an Existing Wall In order to edit an existing wall: 1. Select an existing wall. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Wall” button). 3. Modify the fields such as "b" and "b2” in the "Wall Properties" form. 4. Press the "Update" button in the “Properties” form or Right-click and select “Update” option in the Shortcut Menu. Right-clicking on any one of the “b”, “b2”, “Ext. I”, or “Ext. J” fields will load a list of commonly used values that may facilitate data entry. You can repeat this process on as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method. If you want to update several columns at once, you can use "Wall Table" in the "Member" menu. The “Wall Table” form can also be reached from the “Member Tables” option in the shortcut menu.

Wall Shortcut Menu There is no special option reserved for wall members in the shortcut menu. However, standard “Delete”, “Mirror” and “Properties” options can be used for walls. Loads transferred from slabs to walls can be seen and edited by using “Edit Member Loads” option. As in the columns, nodal loads can be assigned to wall members using “Define Column Nodal Load” option.

Wall Table

You can use one of the methods below to load the Wall Table: 1. If no selection is made, all the Walls in the current storey or in the whole system can be listed using “Wall Table” option in the “Member” pulldown. 2. If a mixed selection is made involving Walls, only selected Walls can be listed using “Wall Table” option in the “Member” pulldown. 3. If some of the Walls are selected, only selected Walls can be listed using “Properties” option in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking) If “All Storeys” option is checked in the “Wall Table”, other Walls defined in the Graphic Editor are displayed even if they do not belong to current storey. You can close this dialog window using “Close” button. All the changes made in this window will be applied immediately.

Related Articles: Wall Properties

Wall Properties "Wall Properties" will be loaded when the "Wall" option in the "Member" pulldown (or toolbar) is selected. A new wall can be defined by arranging the fields in the form and then by dragging two axes intersections in the plan window The “Wall Properties” form can also be accessed after selecting an existing wall and then by right-clicking and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. You can select a wall member by using one of the “Member Selection” methods described previously. When the “Wall Properties” form is open, right clicking a new Wall member and selecting the “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu will load the properties of the new member in the same window. The “Wall Properties” form comprises four pages named as “Gen”, “Drop” and “3D”. You can shift between pages by pressing the related tab heading. The form comprises the following fields:

Label The wall label can be entered in this field. This field (after formatting) is limited to 8 characters. A text control spin button exists to the right of the label field to facilitate the creation of successive label text. As in all member types, the wall member labels will be listed in the “ Structure Tree” under the related storey heading. This list can be used to select a member by label. Repeating member labels is not permitted in a building. During the insertion of members the program will sound an alarm and a warning note will appear in the status bar if a repeating member label is detected.

Wall Thickness (b)

"b" is the thickness of the wall, which is the section dimension along its minor direction.

Wall Eccentricity (b2) The eccentricity of the wall along its minor direction is defined by the field "b2" measured as a distance between the insertion axis and the centreline of wall having a left I-end and a right J-end. "b2" value cannot be greater than section width/2 or smaller than the –width/2.

Wall Member Section Properties

Wall Extensions (I, J) These fields define the extension dimensions of the wall from I and J axis intersections. I-Extension is measured from "I" Reference Point to the edge at left and J-Extension is measured from "J" Reference Point to the edge at right along the major direction of the wall. These values must be greater than or equal to zero.

Insertion Axes All structural members are inserted based on axis intersections as an insertion reference. At least two axes of different direction code (namely 1 and 2) must intersect at every insertion point. The simplest method for defining the insertion axes of wall elements is selecting two axes intersections in the drawing area. For dragging two points, first press the left mouse button and select the second point. Following rules apply for the insertion of Walls: 1. Insertion points can be dragged in any preferred direction along the insertion axis. The defined "I" and J" points will be swapped automatically when necessary based on the lower left point priority method. 2. At least one common axis must exist among the two intersections. This common axis is termed as the "Insertion Axis" of the Wall. 3. At every axis intersection at least a direction-1 and a direction-2 axis must be found. Labels of the axes that reference the “i” and “j” ends of the wall will be displayed in “Top” and “Bot” fields in the “Wall Properties” form. Identical axis intersections will be written in these fields when the wall is first defined. In this case wall will be placed vertically between the storey levels. In order to define a wall that is battered between the storey levels, “Top” and “Bot” fields must be changed.

To change the insertion axes as written in the “Top” and “Bot” fields; 1. Click on one of the axis label shown on the “Top” and “Bot” fields. The color of the label will turn red. 2. Click on the new axis on plan or 3D window. You can also pick the appropriate axis among the “Members” list that is activated when double-clicked or right-clicked on the axis labels in “ Top” and “Bot” fields. 3.

Press “Update” button.

You can also use the “Pick Bottom Insertion Point” button to change the bottom insertion point of the wall. For this case, pick the new longitudinal axis line on plan Pick Bottom window after you clicked on “Pick Bottom Insertion Point” button. Insertion Point

Shear Wall Sections Wall section properties and material can be evaluated in “Edit Section/ Material” (can be accessed by right-clicking the existing wall member). After clicking the “Edit Section/ Material”, a “Shear Wall Sections” dialog window will be loaded. The dialog window comprised of “General”, “Properties” and “Material” tabs. The section name and display color of the wall can be changed in “General” tab. The moment of inertia, section area and shear areas can be reviewed in the “properties” tab while the grade of concrete and steel can be evaluated in the “Material” tab.

Moment of Inertia (I1, I2) Section Area (A) and Shear Area "I1" is the moment of inertia along direction-1 axis (about direction-2 axis) and "I2" is the moment of inertia along direction-2 axis (about direction-1 axis) of the wall. “Shear Area” is used for the calculation of shear deformations and is calculated automatically as "5/6" times the axial area of the section. The program calculates the section properties of rectangular walls automatically if any (or all) of these fields is zero. You can view the calculated values by pressing the “Display Section Properties” button under the “Section” heading in the form You can make manual modifications to any of the section property fields that you want to override those which are automatically calculated.

Wall Material Definition Material properties (concrete and reinforcing steel grade) defined on the Pre-Analysis tab of the “Building Analysis” dialog will be assigned to the Wall element unless otherwise specified. The material type to be used in the particular Wall Element can be selected using the dropdown list located in the “Material” field. “Concrete” is selected by default and Concrete Grades can be further specified in the “Concrete” field as described below. “Steel” type can be selected if the wall is to be manufactured from steel. A default Modulus of Elasticity value is displayed in “E” field, but it can be further modified. For materials other than concrete or steel, set the “Material” field to “General”. However, an appropriate Modulus of Elasticity must be specified for the material. For materials other than “Concrete”, the “Concrete” and “Steel” fields will be disabled and the wall will not be included in the section design.

Concrete If this field is left as “Default”, the Modulus of Elasticity for the related wall will be calculated using the Concrete Grade determined on the Pre-Analysis tab of the “Building Analysis” dialog. By selecting a different Concrete Grade from this list, you allow the program to use the corresponding Modulus of Elasticity and Characteristic Compression Strength in the calculations. The Modulus of Elasticity value will also be displayed in the “E” field on the same form. User-defined Modulus of Elasticity values which are independent of Concrete Grade can also be entered in this field. You can press the "Display Section Properties" button for viewing the Modulus of Elasticity value used by the program. In “Column Section Design” the wall will be considered to possess the Concrete Grade defined here.

Web Steel (Longitudinal) If this field is left as “Default”, the Steel Grade for the related wall will be taken from the Pre-Analysis tab of the “Building Analysis” dialog. By selecting a different Steel Grade from this list you allow the program to use the corresponding Yield Strength in Section Design.

Drop Panel In Flat Slab type floor systems, a drop panel can be inserted on top of the walls in order to increase punching resistance. To place a drop panel, select “Drop” tab in the “Wall Properties” form and check “Insert Column Drop Panel” option. Dimensions and Eccentricities of the Drop Panel can be adjusted using “b1”, “b2”, “e1” and “e2” data fields. Depth of the Drop Panel can be defined by using “h-Head” field.

Changing Relative Height of Wall Bottom Nodes There are two ways to change the relative height of wall bottom nodes. The first way is to manually modify the “Del-z (I, bot)” and “Del-z (J bot)”fields in “3D” page of the “Wall Properties” form. In order to change these values: 1. Select an existing wall. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. 3. Click on “3D” tab. 4. Write the relative height from the lower storey level in “Del-z (I,bot)” and “Del-z (J,bot)”fields. (Negative values will elongate the wall downwards while positive values will shorten it upwards). 5. Press “Update” button. The second way is to utilise plane members. Plane members can be used to modify more than one wall at once. Besides this, a plane member may have a certain inclination and it can force the linked walls to obey the plane definition.

Assigning Wall Support Type In order to define the Support Type for the Bottom Node of a wall;

1. Select the wall member. Load the “Wall Properties” form by selecting “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. 2. Select “Default”, “None” or any other user-defined support types using the “Support Types” list located in the “3D” page of wall properties form. Please refer to “Support Type Definitions” section in order to create user-defined support types. ”Default” support restrains all six degrees of freedom (DOF) at bottom nodes of all columns and walls defined in St01. In other words, all St01 columns/walls’ bottom nodes will have a fixed support, whereas other nodes in the system are not restrained. Bottom nodes of columns/walls will be free to displace, if “None” is selected. 3. Press “Update” button.

Wall Model Type ProtaStructure provides two different options for the analytical model of walls. Analysis model of each individual wall member can be specified using “Wall Model Type” field in the “3D” tab of “Wall Properties” form. One of the two models, is the “Mid-pier Model” which utilizes a single column at the center of the wall with two rigid arms extending to two sides along the wall width at the top and at the bottom. Other model is “Finite Elements Shell Model” which offers more accurate results for certain types of walls. You can control modelling options globally for all the walls in the system by using “Modelling Options” in “Building Analysis” form. Also, you can override the global model option by selecting a model type other than “Default” from the dropdown list in the “Wall Model Type” field in “Wall Properties” form. By this way, you can use different wall models for each separate wall. It is even possible to model the same wall using different methods at different storey levels.

Update Button Whenever you make new specifications in one of the fields in “Wall Properties” form for an existing wall member, press the “Update” button in order to display the changes in the plan window.

Close Button Pressing the “Close” button will close the “Wall Properties” form and return back to “Select Mode”.

Wall Insertion Options Button This tool button is designed to facilitate the definition of the wall eccentricity "b2". The "Update" button in the toolbar must be pressed to update the selected member with the new eccentricity values. After setting the dimensions of a wall, you can easily set the wall eccentricities by Wall Insertionpressing the “Wall Insertion Options” button. Options Alternatively, you can control the “b2” value using the direction keys of your keyboard. In order to modify the eccentricities, first select a wall and load the “Properties” dialog. Then, the “b2” property will be modified and the wall is displaced. The eccentricity step value can me set using the “ Member Section Eccentricity Step” value in “Settings > General Settings > View” dialog.

Defining Offset Walls If a column/wall sits on another column/wall defined on a different axis intersection, that column/wall is said to be discontinuous in analytical way of thinking. Such a column/wall will be indicated by a different colour. If the mentioned axis intersections are too close and if 40% of upper column/wall’s area resides within the lower column/wall, ProtaStructure will link these “offset” columns with automatic rigid links. By this way, unintended user errors can be tolerated. Note: This type of modelling should be avoided. Although ProtaStructure is optimised for minimising user errors, analysis data file size may grow unnecessarily if false modelling is intentionally used. In the offset column case, application of rigid links in long offset distances may result in reduction in axial loads and increase in moments due to eccentricity.

Related Articles: Defining/Editing a wall

Working With Beams

Defining/ Editing a Beam Defining a New Beam Before inserting a Beam member its reference axes should be defined. To define a new Beam member: 1. Display the storey level in the drawing area which will contain the beam. 2. Press the “Beam” button located in the toolbar. 3. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Beam” button). 4. Edit the fields in the "Beam Properties" form. For example, enter the Beam Label in the "Label" field (max. 8 characters) to modify the section dimensions and eccentricities. 5. To insert the beam, find its insertion points in the plan view drawing area, or the 3D view. You have to drag between two axes intersections to insert the beam. Beams are defined by two axis intersection points defining the start and end of the member. After two axes intersections are picked in the plan view or 3D view the member will be inserted.

Defining a New Beam without Reference Axis A new beam can also be defined without necessity of predefining the main reference axis that should run along the beam. However, true potential end points or the axes that will potentially generate end points, must be defined first. The following figures illustrate this.

A new beam will be defined between Point 1 and Point 2. These points are true potential end points of the beam (I and J) and they are created by other axes, rather than a non-orthogonal axis that the beam is supposed to be defined on.

When the new beam is drawn by picking the Point 1 and Point 2, a new axis will also be generated. This new axis is given a unique name preceded by “@” sign. The label of new axis can be seen on “Structure Tree” In the second case, Point 3 and Point 4 are random points on axes 1 and 2. These are the axes that will participate in generating potential end points when the beam is drawn.

Again, the new beam is drawn by picking the Point 3 and Point 4. New axis is created automatically and given a unique name. Note: This feature is very useful but must be used with caution. If it is intended to define a beam by traditional method over an already existing axis, you must be sure to snap to the real intersection point. Program may draw the beam but not on the axis intended. Snapping options can be adjusted in “Object Snap” tab in the “Display Settings”.

Editing an Existing Beam In order to edit an existing beam: 1. Select an existing beam. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Beam” button). 3. Modify the fields such as "Label", "b" and "b2" in the "Beam Properties” form". 4. Press the "Update" button in the form. Right-clicking on any one of the “b”, “b2”, “h-bot”, or “h-top” fields will load a list of commonly used values that may facilitate data entry. You can repeat this process to as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method. If you want to update several beams at once, you can use "Beam Table" in the "Member" menu. Update Beam End Conditions Multiple beams can be hinged or fixed using the “Update Beam End Conditions” option in the shortcut menu accessed using the right mouse button after selecting one or more beams. After choosing the desired end condition a button menu appears for filtering options. Using this button menu, you can either apply the chosen end condition to selected beams, all beam in the current storey, or all beams in the model.

Beam Table You can use the "Beam Table" in the "Member" pulldown to modify one or more existing beams. Alternatively this option can be reached from the shortcut menu. You can also load “Member Tables” toolbar by customizing the available toolbars. All cells in the table are editable. You can use the cursor keys or mouse cursor to select a cell and edit the contents. You can use one of the methods below to load the Beam Table: 1. If no selection is made, all the beams in the current storey or in the whole system can be listed using “Beam Table” option in the “Member” pulldown. 2.

If a mixed selection is made involving beams, only selected beams can be listed using “Beam Table” option in the “Member” pulldown.

3. If some of the beams are selected, only the selected beams will be listed using “Properties” option in the shortcut menu (displayed by right-clicking) If the “All Storeys” option is checked in the “Beam Table”, other beams defined in the Graphic Editor are displayed even if they do not belong to current storey. You can close this dialog window using “Close” button. All the changes made in this window will be applied immediately.

Related Articles: Beam Properties Defining Curved Beam Members Defining Beams out of Columns Insertion Points Loading Decomposition Methods (Yield Line/FE)

Beam Properties

"Beam Properties" will be loaded when the "Beam" option in the "Member" pulldown (or toolbar) is selected. A new beam can be defined by arranging the fields in the form and then by picking two axes intersections in the plan window. The “Beam Properties” form can also be accessed after selecting an existing beam and then by rightclicking and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. You can select a beam member by using one of the “Member Selection” methods described previously. When the “Beam Properties” form is open, right clicking a new beam member and selecting the “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu will load the properties of the new member in the same window.

The "Beam Properties" form has two tab pages named “General” and “3D”. You can shift between the pages by pressing the related tab heading. The form comprises the following fields:

Label The label that will identify the beam can be entered in this field. This field (after formatting to be a proper label) is limited to 8 characters. A text control spin button exists to the right of the label field to facilitate the creation of successive label text. As in all member types, the beam member labels will be listed in the “Structure Tree” under the related storey heading. This list can be used to select a member by label. Repeating member labels is not permitted in a building. During the insertion of members the program will sound an alarm and a warning note will appear in the status bar if a repeating member label is detected.

Type "Normal" type beams are regular storey beams that are used throughout the structure. These beams can be created non-orthogonal in the plane and inclined between the storey levels. "Support Band" beams are used only when Finite Element Floor Models are created for Flat Slab systems when there are not physical beams between the columns and walls. These fictitious elements are utilised to mark the support regions of the flat slab systems. The section dimensions of these members need not be given during insertion since they will be calculated from the adjacent slab members. Therefore, prior to ceation of the "Support Band" type beams, all slabs in the floor must be inserted. The section width of the support band is calculated using the "L/4" of the adjacent slabs and the section thickness is set equal to the slab depth. The calculated section dimensions can be manually modified if required. To make such a modification, just edit the calculated values and press the "Update" button in the toolbar.

Beam Section Width (b) "b" is the section width of the beam.

Beam Eccentricity (b2) The eccentricity of the beam along its section width is defined by the field "b2" measured as the distance between the insertion axis and the beam centreline below having a left I-end and a right J-end. The "b2" value cannot be greater than b/2 or less than –b/2.

Beam Section Depths (h-bot, h-top) "h-bot" is the section depth measured from the slab reference level (top edge) to the bottom edge of the beam. Similarly, "h-top" is the section depth measured from slab reference level (top edge) to the top edge of the beam. Generally, all beams are inserted to stay below the slab reference level, having "h-top = 0". If you need to define beams spanning above the slab top edge, then "h-top" will be a non-zero value while usually "h-bottom" will be set equal to the slab thickness.

Beam Insertion Options Button A set of insertion option buttons are provided to facilitate the definition of "b2" field.

After setting the dimensions of a beam, you can easily set the beam eccentricities by pressing the “Beam Insertion Options” button and then selecting one of the eccentricity Beam Insertionoptions from the form. Also by pressing the related button, you can view all the loads Options acting on that beam. Choosing one of the options provided by pressing the “Eccentricity Option Buttons” will automatically redefine the “b2” field in the “Beam Properties” form. "Update" button in the toolbar must be pressed to update the selected beam with the new eccentricity values. Alternatively, you can control the “b2” value using the direction keys of your keyboard. In order to modify the eccentricities, first select a beam. Then, when you press up or down keys, the “b2” property will be modified and the beam is displaced. The eccentricity step value can be set using the “ Member Section Eccentricity Step” value in “Settings > Genetal Settings” dialog. It should be noted that the eccentricities of the beam defined here will not modify the location of the actual analytical frame member used in the analysis model. The frame member will be located on the insertion point of the beam.

Beam End-Condition (Fixed/Hinged) Beam

You can use "Beam End-condition (Fixed/Hinged)" button to release moments of each End-end separately (I or J) or both ends of the beam to assume pinned-end condition.

condition

Insertion Axes All structural members are inserted based on axes intersections as insertion reference. At least two axes of different direction code (namely 1 and 2) must intersect at every insertion point. When an axis intersection is picked in the drawing area, the name of the intersecting axes will appear in the "Axes" fields in the form. If there are more than two axes in the intersection, then the first direction-1 axis and the first direction-2 axis found will be selected. The simplest method for defining the insertion axes of beams is picking two axis intersections in the drawing area. Following rules apply for the insertion of Beams: 1. Insertion points can be selected in any preferred direction along the insertion axis. The defined "I" and “J" points will be swapped automatically when necessary with lower left point priority. 2. At least one common axis must exist among the axes found in the two intersections. This common axis is termed as "Insertion Axis" of the Beam. 3. At every axis intersection at least a direction-1 and a direction-2 axis must be found. To modify any of the insertion axes: 1. Click the axis label field that you want to alter in the member form (the colour of the label field will change). 2. Click the axis line or label text in the drawing area that you want to select as an insertion axis. Or, you can select the new axis label from the member list. 3. Click the "Update" button in the toolbar to make the modifications. Using this method, even the insertion point of the beam can be modified.

Beam Sections Beam section properties and material can be evaluated in “Edit Section/ Material” (can be accessed by right-clicking the existing beam member). After clicking the “Edit Section/ Material”, a “Beam Sections” dialog window will be loaded. The dialog window comprised of “General”, “Properties” and “Material” tabs. The section name and display color of the wall can be changed in “General” tab. The moment of inertia, section area and shear areas can be reviewed in the “properties” tab while the grade of concrete and steel can be evaluated in the “Material” tab.

Moment of Inertia (I) and Shear Area "I" is the moment of inertia of the beam about a horizontal axis passing from the member's centroid. Shear Area is used for the calculation of shear deformations of the beam and is calculated automatically as "5/6" times the axial area of the section. The program calculates the section properties of rectangular beams automatically if any (or all) of these fields is zero.

You can make manual modifications to any of the section property fields to override those automatically calculated.

Flange Dimensions (bf, hf) The analysis and design of beams can be carried out using rectangular or flanged sections. Flanges may be non-symmetrical as well. If any of the left and right flange height values ("hf") is omitted, then the flange at that side is set to zero.

Beam Material Definition Material properties (concrete and reinforcing steel grade) defined on the Pre-Analysis tab of the “Building Analysis” dialog will be assigned to the beam element unless otherwise specified. The material type to be used in the particular beam element can be selected using the dropdown list located in “Material” field. “Concrete” is selected by default and Concrete Grades can be further specified in “Concrete” field as described below. “Steel” type can be selected if the beam is to be manufactured from steel. For materials other than concrete or steel, set the “Material” field to “General”. However, an appropriate Modulus of Elasticity must be specified for the material in the “E” field. For materials other than “Concrete”, the “Concrete” and “Steel” fields will be disabled and the beam will not be included in the section design.

Concrete If “Default” value is left in this field, Modulus of Elasticity for the related beam will be calculated using the Concrete Grade determined in the “Materials” page of “Project Parameters” form. By selecting a different Concrete Grade from this list, you allow the program to use the corresponding Modulus of Elasticity and Characteristic Compression Strength in the calculations. Modulus of Elasticity value will also be displayed in the “E” field on the same form. User-defined Modulus of Elasticity values which are independent of Concrete Grade can also be entered in this field by taking care of the current unit system. In “Beam Section Design” the beam will be considered to possess the Concrete Grade defined here.

Reinforcement Steel If “Default” value is left in this field, Steel Grade for the related beam will be taken from “Materials” Page of “Project Parameters” form. By selecting a different Steel Grade from this list you allow the program to use corresponding Yield Strength in Section Design.

Changing Relative Height of Beam Insertion Points There are two ways to change the relative height of beam insertion points. The first way is to manually modify the “Del-z (I)” and “Del-z (J)”fields in “3D” page of the “Beam Properties” form. In order to change these values: 1. Select an existing beam. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. 3. Click on “3D” tab.

4. Write the relative height from the storey level in “Del-z (I)” and “Del-z (J)”fields. (Negative values will lower the beam end with respect to storey level while positive values will elevate it). 5. Press “Update” button. The second way is to utilise plane members. Plane members can be used to modify more than one beam at once. In addition, a plane member may have a certain inclination and it can force the linked beams to obey the plane definition.

Update Button Whenever you make new specifications in one of the fields in “Beam Properties” form for an existing beam member, press the “Update” button in order to display the changes in the plan window and 3D window.

Close Pressing the “Close” button will close the “Beam Properties” form and return back to “Select Mode”.

Related Articles: Defining/ Editing a Beam Defining Curved Beam Members Defining Beams out of Columns Insertion Points Loading Decomposition Methods (Yield Line/FE)

Defining Curved Beam Members The method for defining Curved Beam Members is as follows: 1. Press the “Beam” button located in the toolbar. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. When the “Beam Properties” form is loaded, edit the fields in the form. For example, you can enter the Beam Label in the “Label” field, Beam Section Width (“b”), Beam Eccentricity (“b2”) and Beam Section Depth (“h-bot” and “h-top”). 3. Select “Curved Beam Insertion” from the insertion method 4. Pick the first and second points using the left mouse button. First and second points defined in this way will be the “I” and “J” points of the beam respectively. 5. Press “F2” on your keyboard to enter the chord offset (h) of the curved beam or you can simply define the chord offset (h) of the curved beam by picking a point on the graphical editor plan view.

Related Articles: Defining/ Editing a Beam Working with Beams - Beam Properties Defining Beams out of Columns Insertion Points Loading Decomposition Methods (Yield Line/FE)

Defining Beams out of Columns Insertion Points “I” and “J” ends of beams in ProtaStructure Model must actually be defined at the same physical point with column or wall insertion point. This assures the continuity of analytical model. However, due to grid system complexities, architectural limitations or possible user errors, end points of the beam may not coincide with column that is supposed to support it. If the beam end ( I or J) is defined on another point within the physical borders of the column section, a rigid link is automatically created by the analysis engine and the continuity is granted for. Note: As stated above, this feature helps us to prevent user errors or to work around some geometrical necessities. In normal conditions do not create your models relying on rigid links. Always work with “node-to-node” concept in mind. Also, by automatic rigid links, old version CW type members (hybrid column-wall members) are removed from use. In case of a double-axised column, define it as a regular one (not by using wall member). Define the beam end out of the insertion point making it to stay within the column border.

Geometric Model (“I” end of the beam does not coincide with the column insertion point.)

Analytical Model (Rigid Link created to link the new beam to the column)

Related Articles: Working with Beams - Defining/ Editing a Beam Working with Beams - Beam Properties Defining Curved Beam Members Loading Decomposition Methods (Yield Line/FE)

Loading Decomposition Methods (Yield Line/FE) Choice of Method Slab loads can be decomposed on to beams by either the traditional “Yield Lines” method, or by the “Finite Elements” method.

Yield Lines Method By default, slab loads are decomposed using the Yield Lines method. Note that, line, point and patch loads inserted on the slab panels are distributed evenly over the area of the slab panel when the Yield Lines method is used for load decomposition.

Finite Elements Method If the Finite Elements decomposition method is required, “Load Decomposition by FE" (located in the “Run” menu) must first be carried out for that particular floor. A special Finite Element structural model is created for the floor in order to calculate the loads transferred to the beams. All nodes generated along the beams are restrained in z-direction in the model. The reaction profiles calculated from the analysis are applied to the beams as slab loads. For that reason, special care should be provided to make sure that each beam is defined by at least five or six nodes for an acceptable level of accuracy. Note that, due to the irregular meshing of triangular DKT plate elements used for Finite Element modeling, exact symmetry of loading profile may not be achieved in all cases, but a much more reliable load distribution can be obtained in cases where slabs are loaded with line, point and patch loads and includes openings.

Defining Beam Loads by the Yield Line method

Yield Lines are automatically determined in slabs as they are positioned. Also, by default, loads are automatically decomposed on to beams using these yield lines, hence no additional steps are required to use this method.

Defining Beam Loads by the FE method Before the Finite Elements method of load decomposition can be applied for a particular floor, the FE beams loads must be calculated as follows: 1. Select the "Load Decomposition by FE" option in the "Run" pulldown (or toolbar). 2. Press the “Determine Loads Transferred from Slabs” button to load the selected floor into the “FE Floor Analysis” form. 3. Specify the “Plate Element Size” and “Mesh Uniformity Factor” required. 4. To create the Finite Elements mesh of the model, click the “Generate Model” button. 5. Check the generated mesh is sufficient to produce the accuracy you require. (If necessary adjust the Plate Element Size and/or the Mesh Uniformity Factor and regenerate the mesh until it is satisfactory). 6. Close the “FE Floor Analysis” form to start the analysis. 7. Once the loads have been determined, close the “Finite Elements Floor Analysis” dialog. 8. At this point you will be prompted to choose how the calculated loads are to be applied. Pick from the following: 

"Apply to Selected Beams" – this option will only apply FE load decomposition to those beams that were selected prior to generating the FE mesh, other beams will retain Yield Line decomposition.



"Apply to All Beams in the Current Storey" – this option will only apply FE load decomposition to beams in the current storey, other beams will retain Yield Line decomposition.



"Apply to All Beams in the Model" – this option will apply FE load decomposition to all beams in the model.

Changing the decomposition method for selected/all beams To change the decomposition method for selected/all beams: 1. Select a beam, (or multiple beams) and pick “Slab Loads Calculation Method” in the right-click shortcut menu. 2. Choose either the Yield Line, or FE Method as required. 3. At this point you will be prompted to choose method of application. You can either apply the chosen decomposition method to the selected beams, all beam in the current storey, or all beams in the model Note: Before you run the building analysis, the FE beams loads must be calculated using the “Load Decomposition by FE”.

Related Articles: Working with Beams - Defining/ Editing a Beam Working with Beams - Beam Properties Defining Curved Beam Members Defining Beams out of Columns Insertion Points

Working with Beam Loads The Beam Loads Editor Loads applied to a beam can be viewed or edited using the “Beam Loads Editor” which can be accessed by selecting a beam and picking the “Edit Member Loads” option in the right-click shortcut menu. The Beam Loads Editor displays all loads transferred to the beam, namely, self weight, wall loads, point loads and loads transferred from the slabs. The “Beam Load Editor” window includes the following fields:

Beam Loads Table All local loads acting on a beam are listed in the “Beam Loads Table” at the upper-left corner of the “Beam Loads Dialog” window. The information of each load type is listed in a separate line in the table. Double-clicking on the definition line of any load will open the “Load Profile Editor” dialog window of the related load. Each load definition line is composed of cells which include “Load Transfer Side”, “Load”, “X”, “Member” and “Manual/Automatic” column information for the given load. Manually entered loads will be added to this list. “Load Transfer Side” field indicates the direction of the load acting on the beam. For the manually created loads, you can choose one of the “Load Transfer Side Option Buttons” in the “Load Profile Editor” to set the load direction. This field is not editable for the automatic loads. “Load” field depicts a graphic representation of the load type indicating if the Self-Weight load is uniformly distributed, partial distributed, or a point load. The load Wall Loadstype is chosen in the “Load Profile Editor” window while creating a load Additional Loads manually. This field is automatically set by the program for the “Automatic Loads” The value defined in the "X" column that shows the distance from the beginning of the load function to the starting point of the beam (I-end). This value should be less than the whole length of the beam. Otherwise the load function will not be transferred to the beam. In case of automatic loads, the “Member” field provides information about the member that is transferring load to the beam.

“Manual/Automatic Load” field indicates whether the load is automatically listed by the program or entered manually. This field is left blank for automatic loads whereas manually entered loads are depicted with a hand figure. Pressing “Edit” button after selecting an existing load in the “Beam Load Table” will open the “Load Profile Editor” by which you can make necessary modifications for the selected load. Editing options for “Automatic Loads” are very limited since most of the information is provided by the program and is not allowed to be changed. For more information on editing options, see the “Editing an Existing Load” definition in this section. Pressing “New Load” button will open the “Load Profile Editor” by which you can specify all the necessary information to define a new load manually. The new load will be added to the list in the “ Beam Load Table”. You can modify any information you provided for a new load later on by using the “Edit” button. For more information on creating a new load, see the “Defining a New Load” definition in this section. Pressing the “Delete” button after selecting an existing load will omit the load from the list in the table and delete all the information associated with it. It should be noted that only manually entered loads can be deleted from the load list.

Reactions “Reactions” part in the “Beam Load Dialog” window displays the “Dead Load (G)” and “Imposed Load (Q)” reactions at both “I” and “J” ends of the beam which are calculated automatically with respect to the load information provided in the load list. If you edit the existing specifications of any load, the reactions will be recalculated with respect to the new values specified. All the loads in the “Beam Load Table” are illustrated in a graphic screen at the right part of the dialog window. After selecting a load, the illustration of the selected load in the graphic screen will change colour. When you add a new load or edit an existing load, the changes will be updated in the graphic screen as well. Pressing “Print” button will print the graphic screen to the current system printer. The changes made in “Beam Load Dialog” window will be valid if you close this form using the "OK" button. If you press the "Cancel" button the changes will be discarded.

Defining a New Load The information of each load is stored in the “Load Profile Editor” window which facilitates a graphic illustration and specifications for the selected load. You can either open the “Load Profile Editor” of an existing load to modify or edit any of these specifications by entering new values in the related fields, or you can open a blank editor window to define a new load manually. You must first select the “Edit Beam Loads” button in beam shortcut menu to access the “Beam Loads Dialog” window. In order to add a new load to the “Beam Load Table” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window, press the “New Load” button. This will open a blank “Load Profile Editor” window by which you can specify all the necessary information to create a new beam load. All the fields provided in this editor window are editable.

Defining a New Uniformly Distributed Load 1. After opening a blank “Load Profile Editor” window, press the “Uniformly Distributed Load” option button which is located at the upper-left corner of the dialog window. Pressing this button will load a new window for the selected load type. 2. Enter the “Dead Load-G” and “Imposed Load-Q” values in the related fields in order to define the new load. The new uniformly distributed load will be assumed to act over the full length of the

beam and will be illustrated in the graphic screen above. You are also provided with a blank field where you can enter a name or a definition for the newly created load to retain information. 3. Press “OK” button to save the changes and turn back to the “Beam Load Dialog” window where you will see the new load added to the list in the “Beam Loads Table”. Pressing “Cancel” button will close the load editor without saving the changes.

Defining a New Partial Distributed Load 1. After opening a blank “Load Profile Editor” window, press the “Partial Distributed Load” option button which is located at the upper-left corner of the dialog window. Pressing this button will load a new window for the selected load type. 2. The information to define a partial distributed load should be given in the “Distributed Load” table at the lower-left corner of the editor window. Each line in the table shows a point defining the function by three components. In the first column ("X"), the distance from the current point of the function to the starting point of the beam is given. This value should be less than the whole length of the beam. Otherwise the load function will not be transferred to the beam. Note that “X” cannot be a negative value. 3. In the second and the third columns, Dead Load ("G") and Imposed Load ("Q") values at the current point of the function are shown. Each vertex point is numerated automatically in the “Vertex” column. 4. Pressing any of the “Add Below” or “Add Above” buttons will create a new line in the table with “0” default values. You can modify these fields by entering new values in the appropriate cells. You can also add new lines to the table below or above a selected line by using one of the “Add Below” or “Add Above” buttons. In this case the new line will appear with the “X” value of the selected line which is also editable. You can also delete any selected line by pressing the “Delete” button. 5. Each load function added or modified can be viewed instantly in the graphic illustration above. 6. You can also use one of the automatic partial distributed “Load Options” facilitated by pressing the “Load Editor” button. If you choose one of the load options provided here, and then fill in the necessary fields, pressing OK will automatically set the values for the new load in the “Distributed Load Table”. Choosing one of the “Load Options” again will automatically overwrite any previously defined load function in the table. 7. After defining the partial distributed load, choose one of the “Load Transfer Side” options to set the direction of the load. 8. You are also provided with a blank field where you can enter a name or a definition for the newly created load to retain information. 9. “Reference X” field indicates the distance from the beginning of the load function to the starting point of the beam (I-end). The horizontal distances of all other vertex points on the load diagram are indicated based on this start point as reference. 10. This value will automatically be set by the program if you close the load editor by pressing the “OK” button or you can enter a new value manually. Note that this value cannot be a negative value.

11. Press “OK” button to save the changes and turn back to the “Beam Load Dialog” window where you will see the new load added to the list in the “Beam Loads Table”. Pressing “Cancel” button will close the load editor without saving the changes.

Defining a New Point Load 1. After opening a blank “Load Profile Editor” window, press the “Point Load” option button which is located at the upper-left corner of the dialog window. Pressing this button will load a new window for the selected load type. 2. Enter the values “Dead Load-G” and “Imposed Load-Q” and “Reference X” (the distance from the point load to the left point of the beam) values in the related fields in order to define the new load. “Reference X” value should be less than the whole length of the beam. Otherwise the load function will not be transferred to the beam. Note that this value cannot be negative. 3. You are also provided with a blank field where you can enter a name or a definition for the newly created load to retain information. 4. After specifying the necessary values, the point load will be illustrated in the graphic screen above. 5. After defining the point load, choose one of the “Load Transfer Side” options to set the direction of the load. 6. Press “OK” button to save the changes and turn back to the “Beam Load Dialog” window where you will see the new load added to the list in the “Beam Loads Table”. Pressing “Cancel” button will close the load editor without saving the changes. Note that the “Reactions” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window will be recalculated with respect to the new “Dead Load (G)” and “Imposed Load-Q” values specified for the new loads.

Editing an Existing Load Both automatic and manually defined loads can be viewed and modified (if necessary) using the " Load Profile Editor" dialog window for the related load. In order to open the editor window of any load, first select the load by clicking on its definition line in the “Beam Loads Table”, and then press the “Edit” button. You can also access the editor window of any load by double-clicking on its definition line in the “Beam Loads Table”. In order to edit an existing manual load: 1. Select a load in the “Beam Loads Table”. 2. Press the “Edit” button and the “Load Profile Editor” for the selected load will be loaded 3. Modify the necessary fields in the editor window and press “OK” button to save the changes and turn back to the “Beam Load Dialog” window. Consequently, the “Reactions” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window will be recalculated according to the new values specified. 4. Pressing “Cancel” button will close the load editor without saving the changes. It should be noted that editing options for “Automatic Loads” (except for the “Wall Loads”) are very limited since in most cases the necessary fields in the “Load Profile Editor” are filled by the program automatically, according to the model created in the Graphic Editor.

It must be noted that editable fields in the “Load Profile Editor” of each automatic load is different. “Self-Weight” of the beam is automatically calculated by the program using to the unit-weight value defined for the beam members in “Project Parameters” form. In order to modify the existing “Dead Load (G)” in the “Load Profile Editor”, enter a new value in the related field and press “OK” to save the changes. The reactions in the “Beam Load Dialog” window will be recalculated according to the new value specified. “Wall Load” information is also listed in the “Beam Load Table” by default. However, the default wall load values are taken as “0” unless you specify the necessary information in the “Load Profile Editor”. In order to specify a wall load: 1. Select “Wall Load” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window. 2. Press the “Edit” button and the “Load Profile Editor” will be loaded. (Or you can press the “Wall Loads” button under the “Loads” tab in the “Beam Properties” form to open the “Load Profile Editor” directly) 3. Click the “Select” button and choose one of the default wall type options from the list. After selection, the unit weight and wall thickness of the selected wall will automatically be calculated and will be indicated in the related fields. 4. Then, enter the height of the selected wall in the “Wall Height” field. The “Dead Load (G)” value will automatically be calculated and will be indicated in the related field right after the specification of the wall height. 5. If you enter the values in the related fields manually, the “Dead Load (G)” value will be calculated automatically according to the new values specified. 6. After the specification, the load diagram will be displayed in the graphic screen above according to the new values specified. Pressing “OK” button will save changes and close the “Load Profile Editor” window. The “Reactions” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window will be recalculated according to the new “Dead Load (G)” value specified. Pressing “Cancel” button will close the load editor without saving the changes. “Add.l Loads” are also listed automatically in the “Beam Load Table”. The additional load values are calculated by the program automatically after you run the “Building Analysis”. In case you make any changes in the design, you must run the “Building Analysis” again in order that the program recalculates the “Additional Loads” and updates the necessary fields in the “Load Profile Editor” accordingly. To edit additional loads: 1. Select “Additional Loads” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window. 2. Press the “Edit” button and the “Load Profile Editor” for the selected load will be loaded. 3. Enter new values in the “Dead Load (G)” and/or “Imposed Load (Q)” fields. After specification, the load diagram will be displayed in the graphic screen above according to the new values entered. Pressing “OK” button will save changes and close the “Load Profile Editor” window. The “Reactions” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window will be recalculated according to the new “Dead Load (G)” and/or “Imposed Load (Q)” values specified. Pressing “Cancel” button will close the load editor without saving the changes.

Editing options for the automatically calculated “Adjacent Slab Loads” is very limited. After opening the related “Load Profile Editor” of these loads, you can only edit the “Reference X” field which indicates the distance from the start point of the load to the left-end (I-end) of the beam. Pressing “OK” button after you change reference field for these loads will save changes and close the “Load Profile Editor” window. Consequently, the “Reactions” in the “Beam Load Dialog” window will be recalculated accordingly. Pressing “Cancel” button will close the load editor without saving the changes. It must be noted that if you uncheck “Search Adjacent Slabs” option in the “Beam Load Dialog” window, automatically calculated “Adjacent Slab Loads” will be marked as “Manual Loads”. In this case you can edit any of the fields in the “Load Profile Editor” of the related loads.

Beam Load Types There are three basic load types which may be applied to a beam member.

Load Type Buttons

Option

These load types are “Uniformly Distributed Loads (UDL)”, “Partial Distributed Loads (PDL)”, and “Point Loads (PL)”. These load types are either calculated by the program (“Automatic Loads”) or manually entered by the user (“Manual Loads”). ProtaStructure provides graphical means to add loads and uses graphical symbols to distinguish their types. You must choose one of the option buttons in the “Load Profile Editor” dialog window while defining a new load.

· Uniformly distributed Loads (UDL): Uniform loads act on the full length of a beam member. All uniformly distributed loads, including the “Self-Weight” of the beams and “Additional Loads”, are determined by the program automatically. If additional uniformly distributed loads exist, you can define these loads manually. There are two fields to define a uniformly distributed load: the load magnitudes "Dead Load -G" and "Imposed Load -Q". The loads defined in these fields will be applied as uniformly distributed loads through the total length of the current beam. For more information see the “Defining a Uniformly Distributed Load” section below. · Partial Distributed Loads (PDL): A load may change value between the beginning and end of its length range. These loads can have any shape defined by discrete points over the full or a partial length of the member. “Slab Loads” may be exemplified as a partial distributed load automatically calculated by the program. For more information see the “Defining a Partial Distributed Load” section below. · Point Loads: These loads are concentrated loads that may act at any specified point along the member. There are three fields that define a point load: “Reference X" (the distance from the point load to the left point of the beam), and the load magnitudes “Dead Load -G" and "Imposed Load -Q". For more information see the “Defining a Point Load” section below.

Load Transfer Side Options All these loads are vertical loads. For convenience, vertical beam loads may be classified to be transferred from left, right or top of the beam.

Load Transfer Option Buttons

This option is preset by the program and cannot be modified for the Automatic Loads and “Uniformly Distributed Loads”. While defining a new Side“Partial Distributed Load” and a “Point Load”, you can set one of the “Load Transfer Side Options” in the “Load Profile Editor” to set the load direction. This option is editable.

Definition of Load Transfer Sides

Beam Loads Classification All local loads acting on the current beam may be classified as:

Automatic Loads ProtaStructure can calculate the beam loads automatically using the slab area loads, wall information, unit weight of the members, etc. The following loads are calculated automatically: · Beam “Self Weight” as a uniformly distributed load. (using the unit weight of concrete defined in the "Parameters" form and the geometry of the beam) · Uniformly distributed gravity loads transferred by the walls carried by the beam, as “Wall Loads”. (Note that you must manually specify the necessary information in the related fields in the “Load Profile Editor” of a wall load.) · Dead and imposed (live) loads transferred from the adjacent slabs (partial distributed loads calculated based on the self weight and loads of the slabs) as “Slab Loads”. Slab load decomposition can be carried out using “Yield Lines” or “Finite Elements” methods. When Finite Elements Load Decomposition method is used, a more accurate load profile can be obtained especially when the slab is loaded with point, line and patch loads and slabs with openings. · Additional dead and imposed (live) loads as “Additional Loads”. Program calculates the live loads and additional dead loads transferred from the adjacent slabs over the top surface of the beam. Wall width is deducted from the determination of the area of the top surface width of the beam. The Additional Loads Editor contains an option to disable the automatic calculation of these loads. When "Calculate Additional Beam Loads" option is unchecked, ProtaStructure will set the magnitude of these loads to zero. It must be noted that “Automatic Loads” cannot be deleted. Editing options for these loads (except for the “Wall Loads”) are very limited since in most cases the necessary fields are filled by the program automatically.

Manual Loads Beam Load Analysis dialog also allows the user to manually enter any additional uniformly distributed loads, point loads or partial distributed loads. For more information you can refer to “Defining A New Uniformly Distributed Load”, “Defining A New Partial Distributed Load”, and “Defining A New Point Load” sections below.

Load Analysis Options If the "Search Adjacent Slabs" option in the “Beam Load Dialog” window is checked, dead and imposed loads transferred from the adjacent slabs will be calculated by the program automatically. You can uncheck this option in order to define slab loads manually. If you want the program to perform the load analysis based on what it determines automatically, you can check the “Search Adjacent Slabs” options again.

Copying and Pasting Loads Manually entered loads of a selected beam can be copied to the clipboard and pasted to beams in the selection set. To copy and paste the manual loads or wall load of a beam: 1. Select a beam. 2. Right-click to display the shortcut menu and pick “Copy Manual Beam Loads” or “Copy Beam Wall Load” in order to copy the beam loads or wall load to the clipboard. 3. Select the beams that you want to paste the copied manual beam loads or wall load. 4. Right-click to display the shortcut menu and pick “Paste Copied Beam Loads” in order to paste the beam loads or wall load in the clipboard to the selected beams. A warning message will be issued if a beam with no wall load or manually defined load is being copied to the clipboard.

Working With Slabs

Defining/ Editing a Slab Defining a New Slab Before inserting a Slab member its reference axes should be defined. To define a new Slab member: 1. Display the storey level in the drawing area which will contain the slab. 2. Press the “Slab” button located in the toolbar. 3. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Slab” button).

4. Edit the fields in the "Slab Properties" form. For example, enter the Slab Label in the "Label" field (max. 8 characters) and modify the slab thickness "h". 5. Press the “Loads” tab in the “Slab Properties” form to access the next page and define the dead and imposed loads of the slab. This form can alternatively be loaded by selecting “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu. 6. In either the plan or 3D view, pick the position of the slab. By default, "Beam Region" is set as the insertion method. So, picking a closed region surrounded by beams and/or walls will be sufficient to define the slab boundaries. For the other insertion methods see related topics further in this section. 7. Edges of the slab will be numbered in counter-clockwise direction and displayed in Graphic Editor, as first edge being the lower edge on plan.

Editing an Existing Slab In order to edit an existing slab: 1. Select the slab. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Slab” button). 3. Modify the fields such as "Label", "h" and/or loadings in the "Slab Properties" form. 4. Press the "Update" button in the form. You can repeat this process with as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method. In order to update several slabs at once, you can use the "Slab Table" in the "Member" menu.

Slab Insertion Methods After completing the parameters in the "Properties" form you can choose the slab insertion method. The selection of slab insertion methods can be accessed using the "Location" button in the "Properties" window. Note that, these methods are not applicable for the insertion of cantilever slabs. Picking one of these methods will set it active for only one slab insertion. If you want to make a method to be your default slab insertion method, you can use "Slab Insertion Method (Default)" options in the "Graphic Editor View Settings" dialog in "Settings" pulldown menu.

Axis Region When "Axis Region" method for defining slab insertion is selected, insertion axes can be defined simply by picking a point surrounded by axes. If there is more than one region (surrounded by axes) within a slab panel, then successive points can be picked by pressing (and holding down) the "Ctrl" key while picking points. The regions must be selected one by one using an adjacent region every time. The insertion of the slab will be completed when the "Ctrl" key is released.

Slab Insertion Using "Axis Region" Distribution of loads to the adjacent beams (yield lines) will also be displayed if the "Ctrl" is used during slab insertion, even if there is only one region within the slab area. The insertion axes will appear in the "Insertion Axes" frame during picking sorted in counter-clockwise order starting from the lower-left edge of the slab.

Beam Region (Default) This is the simplest method for inserting a slab. If the slab is completely surrounded by beams and/or walls then this method can be used. Just pick a closed area (surrounded by beams and/or walls) to insert the slab.

Slab Insertion Using "Beam Region" Note: While using this method if "Ctrl" key is pressed, then "Axis Region" method will be active instead of "Beam Region" method.

Pick Axis "Pick Axis" method can be used as a third slab definition method. In this method, you can define the slab by picking the axes surrounding the slab. To insert a new slab using this method; first select “Pick Axis” and then pick the axes in any order (counter-clockwise or clock-wise) starting from any axis. Finally, press "New Slab Panel" button. Alternatively, instead of pressing “New Slab Panel” button, you can re-select the first axis you have shown. The new slab will be inserted to the region surrounded by the selected axes. Then, insertion axes in the "Insertion Axes" frame will be cleared automatically in order to define a new slab. Note that, the slab will not be inserted in the defined region if it is not appropriate for a slab insertion (i.e. crossed by some other members). This method can be used when the other methods (especially “Beam Region” or “Axis Region”) are difficult to apply.

Pick Points "Pick Points" method can be used as a fourth slab definition method. In this method, you can define the slab by picking the axis intersection points around the perimeter of the slab. For simple boundaries this option requires one less click per slab than the “Pick Axis” option.

To insert a new slab using this method; after pressing the “Insertion” button in the "Slab Properties" window, select “Pick Points” method. Then, select an axis intersection point and continue selecting axis intersection points around the perimeter of the slab as required. As soon as you click an intersection where an axis is found that goes back to the start point the slab is inserted. This efficient method can be used when the other methods (especially “Beam Region” or “Axis Region”) are difficult to apply. Note: In the case of an error while using this method, all previously defined axes can be deleted by pressing the “Delete All Axes” button then you can restart the definition of the slab.

Insert Slabs Automatically Multiple slabs can be automatically inserted adjacent to selected beams. To insert slabs automatically: · Select the beams to add slabs around (all beams will be used if nothing is selected). · Display the Slab Properties Dialog and enter the properties and loads of the slabs to be inserted. · Enter the label of the first slab. · Select the ‘Insert Slabs Automatically’ command from the Members menu.

Setting Slab Types Automatically Slab types are used by the analytical analysis procedures. You can use “Set Slab Types Automatically” form to assign the slab types considering the neighbour panels in the plan. In order to initiate this function, · Right click to the “Slabs” node in the “Structure Tree” and select "Set Slab Types Automatically " menu option. In this case, the function will be applied to all slab panels in the model. · Select one or more slabs and load the short-cut menu using the right mouse button and select “ Set Slab Types Automatically” option. In this case, the function will be applied to selected slab panels (or all slab panels if “Determine the Types of All Slabs in the Storey” is checked). The slab types will be assigned when the “OK” button is pressed. This option cannot determine the types of cantilever slabs and slab panels with more than 4 edges.

Slab Table You can use the "Slab Table" in the "Member" menu to modify one or more existing slabs. All cells in the table are editable. You can use the cursor keys or mouse cursor to select a cell and edit the contents. The "Search" button can be used to find a specific member after typing the label to the "Member" field. You can close this dialog window using “Close” button. All the changes made in this window will be applied immediately.

Slab Load Decomposition ProtaStructure transfers the loads from slabs automatically using the yield line theory. Optionally, FE slab load decomposition can be applied. For details see: Loading Decomposition Methods (Yield Line/FE)

Beam loads may be viewed, edited or printed at any time selecting a beam and using the "Edit Member Loads" option in the shortcut menu accessed by right clicking the mouse

Related Articles: Slab Properties

Slab Properties "Slab Properties" will be loaded when the "Slab" option in the "Member" pulldown (or toolbar) is selected. A new beam can be defined by arranging the fields in the form and then by clicking on one or more regions surrounded by axis elements in the plan window.

The “Slab Properties” form can also be accessed after selecting an existing slab and then by rightclicking and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. You can select a slab member by using one of the “Member Selection” methods described previously. When the “Slab Properties” form is open, right clicking a new slab member and selecting the “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu will load the properties of the new member in the same window. The "Slab Properties " form has two tab pages named “General” and “Loads”. You can shift between the pages by pressing the related tab heading. The form comprises the following fields:

Slab Label The label that will identify the slab can be entered in this field. This field (after formatting to be a proper label) is limited to 8 characters. A text control spin button exists to the right of the label field to facilitate the creation of successive label text. As in all member types, the slab member labels will be listed in the “Structure Tree” under the related storey heading. This list can be used to select a member by clicking a member label. Repeating member labels is not permitted in a building. During the insertion of members the program will sound an alarm and a warning note will appear in the status bar if a repeating member label is detected.

Slab Type The boundary conditions of the slab are determined from its entry. "Slab Type" codes are used for the analysis of uniform slabs using the moment coefficients method.

Available Slab Panel Types A button menu that contains all the possible types will appear when this field is clicked. You should make a selection from the menu according to the boundary conditions of the slab. Slab Types 12 and 13 are reserved for the "Cantilever Slabs” supported by long and short edges respectively. These two selections are used by the Finite Element Slab Strips as well. For normal slabs, any other slab type selection (i.e. All Edges Continuous) can be selected. The “0” coded slab type in the list is used for modelling the one-way slabs. Prefabricated slabs whose two parallel edges do not transfer load to the system, can be classified in this category.

Slab Thickness (h) You can enter the thickness of the slab ("h") in this field. The slab thickness value will appear in the plan window. If the thickness of the slab is smaller than the minimum slab thickness required, the program will sound an alarm and a warning note will appear in the status bar.

Concrete Cover This field can be used to specify the nominal concrete cover measured from the bar face to the edge of the slab. The effective depth of the slab is calculated using this concrete cover, the size of the bars used and the layer number of the tension reinforcement. A global control of nominal concrete covers can be achieved using the "Design" tab in the "Slab Design Settings" form.

Distance to Reference Point (d) This field will appear if the slab type is selected as cantilever (Types 12 and 13). " d" is the distance from the reference point to the beginning of the slab. The reference point of the slab is always the first point picked during the insertion of the cantilever slab.

Cantilever slab Dimensions (b-Slab, L-Cant) These fields will appear if the slab type is selected as cantilever. "b-Slab" is the width measured along the supported edge and "L-Cant" is the cantilever length of the slab. If "b-Slab" is "0" then the slab is defined as spanning completely between the insertion points. "L-Cant" will have no effect when "b-Slab" is zero. When you right-click onto “h”, “d”, “b-Slab” and “L-Cant” fields, aiding pulldown menus will appear with the frequently used values. This provides an ease in data input from keyboard.

Label Corner Slab label will be placed closer to the corner entered in this field. If “0” is entered, the slab label will be centered in the slab panel.

Angle Primary reinforcement direction angle of the slab can be defined using the “Angle” field. The “M1” moment contours and “M1d” design moment contours of the slab will be generated along this direction

in Finite Elements Floor Model Post-processor Window. The “M2” and “M2d” contours will be generated along perpendicular to the direction defined by this global angle. Note that “Mx” and “My” moment contours are generated along global x and y directions respectively. The direction defined by the “Angle” field is measured in degrees counter-clockwise with positive x-axis to be “0”.

Insertion Axes (Standard Slab) All structural members are inserted based on axis intersections as insertion reference. Each edge of the slab is defined by an axis. The edges are sorted in counter-clockwise order and listed in "Insertion Axes" frame. Four methods are available for defining these axes, namely, "Axis Region", "Beam Region", "Pick Axis" and "Pick Points". The details of how to use these insertion methods are described below in section "Inserting a Slab".

Axes (Cantilever Slab) All structural members are inserted based on axis intersections as an insertion reference. At least two axes of different direction code (namely 1 and 2) must intersect at every insertion point. When an axis intersection is picked in the drawing area, the name of the intersecting axes will appear in the " Axes" fields in the form. If there are more than two axes in the intersection, then the first direction-1 axis and the first direction-2 axis found will be selected. Two axes of intersection are needed for defining a Cantilever Slab. The simplest method for defining the insertion axes of a cantilever slab is picking two axis intersections in the drawing area. The first point picked will be the "Reference Point" of the cantilever slab and "d" distance will be measured from this point to the start of the slab

Cantilever Slab Parameters The following rules apply for the insertion of Cantilever Slabs: 1. At least one common axis must exist among the axes found in the two intersections. This common axis is termed as the "Insertion Axis" of the cantilever slab.

2. The insertion side of the cantilever slab depends on the order of the two points defined. The slab will be inserted below the insertion axis if the points are picked from left to right. If the slab is to be positioned above the insertion axis then the points must be picked from right to left. 3. At every axis intersection at least a direction-1 and a direction-2 axis must be found. 4. A cantilever slab cannot span longer than the supporting beam (or adjacent slab if there are no beams). Therefore usually the insertion points must be defined same as that of the supporting beam (or adjacent slab). 5. The selected two points cannot span more than a beam.

Self Weight The Self-weight (per area) of the slab will be calculated automatically using the " Unit Weight of concrete" defined in "Project Parameters" section and "Slab Thickness". The calculated value can be manually edited. But, if the thickness of the slab is modified or "Self Weight" is zero, then this field will be updated automatically. In order to neglect the self weights of the members you have to set "Unit Weight of concrete" defined in "Project Parameters" section to zero. Alternatively, a negligible (very small) "Self Weight" value may be entered in this field.

Dead Load (Additional) The calculated weight (per area) in the above field does not include any additional covers. To add additional weights such as ceiling plaster, fake ceiling, floor finishes, the "Dead Load" field can be used.

Live Load The imposed live loads (per area) on the slab can be defined using this field. Right-clicking on this field will provide access to standard imposed loads defined in the codes.

Parapet Load Parapet Load can be applied to the cantilever slabs. You can enter the parapet load using the “ Parapet Load” field located in the “Loads” tab of the “Properties” dialog. Parapet load is classified as dead load.

Relative Level In order to define the relative top level of the slab you can use this field. According to the negative or positive values you entered, the slab will be lowered or raised relatively. By this way, you can define slab systems with different elevations. It is recommended to model the local elevation differences by this method. If you think that the relative difference in elevations will cause a separation in diaphragms, then try using plane definitions. "Slab Strips" must be defined taking lowered or raised slabs into account in order to curtail the steel bars correctly. Similarly, if the moment coefficients method of analysis is used, then it should be noted that these edges will be assumed to be discontinuous.

Using the available options in the "Run" pulldown, the analysis and design of the slabs can be carried out. Detailed information about the slab analysis and design can be found in the related sections.

Subgrade Co-efficient (Foundation Level slabs only) A Subgrade Co-efficient can be applied to individual slabs using this box, overriding the value specified in the FE Raft Foundation Analysis form.

Slab Does Not Contribute To Floor Diaphragm Usually in the analysis of the building systems, slabs are considered to behave infinitely rigid in their planes, thus, forming rigid diaphragm action. If “Slab Does Not Contribute to Floor Diaphragm” option in the “Loads” tab is checked, related slab will not participate in rigid diaphragm action. By this way, all the nodes linked to the corners of this slab will displace independent of rigid diaphragm. For a complete control over diaphragm formation on a storey level use “Modelling Options” in “Building analysis” form in the “Run” pulldown.

Related Articles: Defining/ Editing a Slab

Working with Ribbed Slab

Defining/Editing a Ribbed Slab

Defining a New Ribbed Slab Before inserting a Ribbed Slab member its reference axes should be defined. To define a new Ribbed Slab member: 1. Display the storey level in the drawing area which will contain the slab. 2. Press the “Ribbed Slab” button located in the toolbar. 3. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Ribbed Slab” button). 4. Edit the fields in the "Ribbed Slab Properties” form. For example, enter the Ribbed Slab Label in the "Label" field (max. 8 characters) and modify the rib dimensions. 5. Press the “Insertion” tab in the Ribbed Slab Form to access the second page and define the reference point and the direction of the ribs. 6. Press the “Loads” tab in the Ribbed Slab Form to access the third page and define the dead and imposed loads of the ribbed slab. 7. In either the plan or 3D view, pick the position of the slab. By default, "Beam Region" is set as the insertion method. So, picking a completely enclosed region surrounded by beams and/or walls

will be sufficient to define the slab boundaries. For the other insertion methods see the related topics further in this section.

Editing an Existing Ribbed Slab In order to edit an existing ribbed slab: 1. Select the ribbed slab. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. (“Properties” can be accessed alternatively by pressing the “Ribbed Slab” button). 3. Modify the fields such as "Label", dimensions and/or loadings in the "Ribbed Slab Properties” form. 4. Press the "Update" button in the form. You can repeat this process to as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method. In order to update several ribbed slabs at once, you can use the "Ribbed Slab Table" in the "Member" menu.

Inserting a Ribbed Slab After completing the parameters in the "Ribbed Slab Properties" form you can show the insertion of the ribbed slab using one of the following available methods. Four methods are available for defining these axes, namely, "Axis Region", "Beam Region", "Pick Axis" and “Pick Points”. The selection of ribbed slab insertion methods can be accessed using the "Insertion" button in the "Ribbed Slab Properties" window.

Axis Region When "Axis Region" method for defining slab insertion is selected, insertion axes can be defined simply by picking a point surrounded by axes. If there are more than one region (surrounded by axes) within a ribbed slab panel, then successive points can be picked by pressing (and holding down) the "Ctrl" key while picking points. The regions must be selected one by one using an adjacent region every time. The insertion of the ribbed slab will be completed when the "Ctrl" key is released.

Ribbed Slab Insertion Using "Axis Region" The insertion axes will appear in the "Insertion Axes" frame during picking. Note: It’s difficult to apply this method of ribbed slab insertion in the case of increasing number of regions.

Beam Region (Default) This is the simplest method for inserting a ribbed slab. If the slab is completely surrounded by beams and/or walls then this method can be used. Just pick a closed area (surrounded by beams and/or walls) to insert the ribbed slab.

Ribbed Slab Insertion Using "Axis Region" Note: While using this method if "Ctrl" key is pressed, then "Axis Region" method will be active instead of "Beam Region" method.

Pick Axis "Pick Axis" method can be used as a third ribbed slab definition method. In this method, you can define the ribbed slab by picking the axes surrounding the slab. To insert a new slab using this method; first select “Pick Axis” and then pick the axes in any order (counter-clockwise or clock-wise) starting from any axis. Finally, press "New Slab Panel" button. Alternatively, instead of pressing “New Slab Panel” button, you can re-select the first axis you have shown. The new ribbed slab will be inserted to the region surrounded by the selected axes. Then, insertion axes in the "Insertion Axes" frame will be cleared automatically in order to define a new slab. Note that, the ribbed slab will not be inserted in the defined region if it is not appropriate for a slab insertion (i.e. crossed by some other members). This method can be used when the other methods (especially “Beam Region” or “Axis Region”) are difficult to apply.

Pick Points "Pick Axis" method can be used as a fourth ribbed slab definition method. In this method, you can define the ribbed slab by picking the axis intersection points around the perimeter of the slab. For simple boundaries this option requires one less click per ribbed slab than the “Pick Axis” option.

To insert a new ribbed slab using this method; after pressing the “Insertion” button in the "Slab Properties" window, select “Pick Points” method. Then, select an axis intersection point and continue selecting axis intersection points around the perimeter of the ribbed slab as required. As soon as you click an intersection where an axis is found that goes back to the start point the slab is inserted. This efficient method can be used when the other methods (especially “Beam Region” or “Axis Region”) are difficult to apply. Note: In the case of an error while using this method, all previously defined axes can be deleted by pressing the “Delete All Axes” button then you can restart the definition of the slab.

Ribbed Slab Table You can use the "Ribbed Slab Table" in the "Member" menu to modify one or more existing slabs. All cells in the table are editable. You can use the cursor keys or mouse cursor to select a cell and edit the contents. The "Search" button can be used to find a specific member after typing the label to the "Member" field. You can close this dialog window using “Close” button. All the changes made in this window will be applied without getting back.

Ribbed Slab Load Transfer ProtaStructure transfers the loads from ribbed slabs automatically assuming each rib transfers loading equally to the supporting beams. Beam loads may be viewed, edited or printed at any time using the "Edit Member Loads" in the shortcut menu.

Related Articles: Ribbed Slab Properties

Ribbed Slab Properties

The "Ribbed Slab Properties" will be loaded when the "Ribbed Slab" option in the "Member" pulldown (or toolbar) is selected. A new ribbed slab can be defined by arranging the fields in the form and then by clicking on one or more regions surrounded by axis elements in the plan window. The “Ribbed Slab Properties” form can also be accessed after selecting an existing ribbed slab and then by right-clicking and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. You can select a ribbed slab member by using one of the “Member Selection” methods described previously. When the “Ribbed Slab Properties” form is open, right clicking a new ribbed slab member and selecting the “Select and Load Properties” option in the shortcut menu will load the properties of the new member in the same window.

The "Ribbed Slab Properties" form has three tab pages named “General”, “Insertion”, and “Loads”. You can shift between the pages by pressing the related tab heading. The form comprises the following fields:

Ribbed Slab Label The label that will identify the ribbed slab can be entered in this field. This field (after formatting to be a proper label) is limited to 8 characters. A text control spin button exists to the right of the label field to facilitate the creation of successive label text. As in all member types, the ribbed slab member labels will be listed in the “Structure Tree” under the related storey heading. This list can be used to select a member by label. Repeating member labels is not permitted in a building. During the insertion of members the program will sound an alarm and a warning note will appear in the status bar if a repeating member label is detected.

Type You can select Ribbed Slab Type using this field. Options in this field are: Normal: Use this option to model monolithic one way Ribbed Slabs that are fixed supported to the storey beams. Prefabricated: This type can be used for prefabricated one way Ribbed Slabs. Ribs are hinge connected to the storey beams. Grillage: Two way Waffle Slabs can be modelled by this option. Ribs are fixed supported to the storey beams. Only Finite Element Analysis method can be used in the analysis of such systems.

Rib Dimensions and Spacing (bw, h, h-Slab, s-Block) Width ("bw") and height ("h") of the rib beams, height of slab (or topping) ("h-Slab") and width of blocks (or clear distance between the ribs) ("s-Block") can be defined using these fields.

Ribbed Slab Parameters

Insertion Axes All structural members are inserted based on axis intersections as insertion reference. Each edge of the slab is defined by an axis. The edges are sorted in counter-clockwise order and listed in "Insertion Axes" frame. Four methods are available for defining these axes, namely, "Axis Region", "Beam Region", "Pick Axis" and “Pick Points”. The details of how to use these insertion methods are described below in section "Inserting a Ribbed Slab".

Orientation of Ribs Fields that are used for the orientation of the Rib beams are located in the “Insertion” page of the “Ribbed Slab Properties” form.

Orientation Parameters of Ribs The "Control Point X" is used for defining the position of the lower edge (viewing from left to right) of the first rib. One of the following methods can be used to define this point: 1. One of the corners of the slab can be selected to be the control point of the ribs by clicking the related corner button. The selected corner is marked with a red dot in these buttons. Next to the four corner buttons, four edge buttons are located that defines the direction of the ribs. The direction of the ribs is set perpendicular to the edge marked with the red colour on the button. To position the ribs using this method, select the edge button, then press one of the corner buttons and modify (if necessary) the distance and press the "Update" button to re-draw the ribs. 2. Alternatively, when none of the buttons in this form are depressed, set the rib angle by entering the desired value (in degrees) to the "Angle" field.

Slab Does Not Contribute To Floor Diaphragm Usually in the analysis of the building systems, slabs are considered to behave infinitely rigid in their planes, thus, forming rigid diaphragm action. If “Slab Does Not Contribute To Floor Diaphragm” option in the “Insertion” tab is checked, related ribbed slab will not be participating in the rigid diaphragm action. By this way, all the nodes linked to the corners of this slab will displace independent of rigid diaphragm. For a complete control over diaphragm formation on a storey level use “Modelling Options” in “Building analysis” form in the “Run” pulldown.

Insert Transverse Rib

The “Insert Transverse Rib” option in the “Insertion” tab is used to individually control the existence of cross ribs. There is a requirement for these (to ensure load sharing) in EC2. When checked, standard ribbed slabs have one or two transverse direction secondary beam added if the ribs are longer than certain length limits. The length limits are controlled via the Slab Setting dialog (defaults 4 and 7 m).

Self Weight Self-weight (per area) of the ribbed slab will be calculated automatically using the " Unit Weight of Concrete" and "Unit Weight of Blocks" defined in "Project Parameters" section and using the section dimensions of the ribs and slab. The calculated self weight value can be edited by the user. If one of the section dimensions of the ribs or the thickness of the slab is modified or "Self Weight" is zero, then this field will be updated automatically. In order to neglect the self weights of the members you have to set "Unit Weight of concrete" defined in "Project Parameters" section to zero. Alternatively, a negligible (very small) "Self Weight" value may be entered in this field.

Dead Load (Additional) The calculated weight (per area) in the above field does not include any additional covers. To add additional weights such as ceiling plaster, fake ceiling, floor finishes, "Dead Load" field can be used.

Live Load The imposed live loads (per area) on the ribbed slab can be defined using this field. Right-clicking on this field will provide access to standard imposed loads defined in the codes.

Related Articles: Defining/Editing a Ribbed Slab

Working with Slab Openings Slab Opening Properties

Slab Opening

"Slab Opening Properties" will be loaded when the "Slab Opening" option in the "Member" pulldown (or toolbar) is selected. A new slab opening can be defined by arranging the fields in the form and then by clicking the insertion reference. The following fields exist in this properties form:

Slab Opening Dimensions (b1, b2) Horizontal ("b1") and vertical ("b2") dimensions of the slab opening can be defined in these fields.

Slab Opening Parameters Slab Opening Reference Distances (e1, e2) Slab openings are inserted based on an axis intersection as reference point. The horizontal distance ("e1") and vertical distance ("e2") to the lower left corner of the slab opening can be defined by picking a reference insertion point and pressing “F2” on keyboard. The “e1” and “e2” can be defined as coordinates (x, y) or polar (r Staged Construction The results for the staged load cases can be examined in the same way as those for the unstaged load cases, using the ‘”Model and Analysis Results Display”. The staged and unstaged combinations are both used for design.

Pre-Analysis Load combinations, materials and other parameters relating to the analysis are specified on the “PreAnalysis” page of the “Building Analysis” form. These are fully described in the section: Building Parameters, Loading and Materials

Model Options Options to be used in analysis can be specified in “Model Options” page of “Building Analysis” form. “Model Options” comprises of three tab pages namely, Model, Stiffnesses and Settings. Any modifications made in this page can be undone by pressing “Default Settings”.

Model Parameters related with the analytical model of the building can be adjusted on the “Model” tab.

Storey Degrees of Freedom

There is a list for defining the degrees of freedom for each storey. Storey degrees of freedom options in ProtaStructure are: 

X/Y and Torsion Permitted: Translations in X and Y directions and floor torsion about Z-axis are permitted.



X/Y Permitted, Torsion Prevented: Translations in X and Y directions are permitted. But torsion about Z-axis is prevented.



Only X Permitted: Only translation in X direction is permitted. Translation in Y direction and rotation about Z-axis are prevented.



Only Y Permitted: Only translation in Y direction is permitted. Translation in X direction and rotation about Z-axis are prevented.

The last two degrees of freedom options are useful for the analysis of a 2d-frame system defined along the unrestrained direction. TIP: You can select the “Only X permitted” or the ”Only Y permitted” options to define the degrees of freedom of a single frame system

Storey Degrees of Freedom

Rigid Zones Rigid zones formed at the “Column-beam” intersections are taken into consideration automatically by the program in the analysis model. Rigid zones are important in determining the effective lengths of members. In order to consider cracks that can be formed in the intersections, rigid zones may be reduced by a certain amount to calculate more realistic effects. ProtaStructure Analysis Model has the following rigid zone options: 

“Maximum” option will use full member section dimensions to form the rigid zones and calculates the member forces at the member faces.



“Reduce by 25%” option will reduce the member section dimensions by 25% to form the reduced rigid zones and calculates the member forces at a distance 0.25d from the member faces.



“None” option will not take the rigid zones into consideration and calculates the member forces at the member axes.

Wall Model ProtaStructure can model the walls in the building in two different ways. One of them is “Midpier Model” and the other is “Finite Element Shell Model”. Using the radio buttons located in “Wall Model” field, you can determine the wall model to be used in the building globally. “Mid-pier Model” uses a single column at the mid-point of the wall panel to model the wall. Interaction with neighbouring elements such as columns, beams or other walls are established by rigid beams extending to two sides.

If “Finite Elements Shell Model” is selected, wall members will be modelled by quadrilateral shell elements (as shown below)

Maximum height and width of shell elements can be entered into “Shell Width” and “Shell Height” fields. Default value of 500 mm by 500 mm is adequate for most cases. Analysis time increases as the width and height values decrease. The following are example of cases where FE Shell model maybe preferred: 

If the building includes narrowing walls, or wide basement walls, it is recommended to use “Finite Element Shell Model”.



If there are walls that are discontinuous (not extended to foundation) and supported by beams, FE Shell model will be more accurate as the variation in forces along the length of the wall can be captured.

Walls modelled as “Mid-pier Model” require less analysis time than the walls modelled as “Finite Elements Shell Model”. Each individual wall member in the system can be defined to use a different wall model in the analysis.



This can be done via wall properties or wall table > “Wall Model Type”. There are 3 options :

1.

Default : use the global Wall Model Setting in Pre-analysis

2.

Mid- Pier : Use Mid-Pier Model for this wall only

3.

FE Shell : User Finite Element Model for this wall only



For example, a wall can be modelled using “Midpier model” in first storey and “Finite Element Shell Model” in the second storey.



This is especically useful for specific discontinuous walls where FE shell may be required only for the transfer level while the rest of the walls can use “Mid-Pier”.

Rigid Diaphragm Modelling Under the excitation of lateral loads, it must be specified whether the slabs in each storey level will behave infinitely rigid in their plane (i.e. rigid diaphragm action) or not. This behaviour is generally modelled as “Rigid Diaphragm”. By assuming rigid diaphragm action in a storey level, degrees of freedom are reduced to translation X and Y directions and a torsion about Z axis normal to the plane of X and Y. There will be no axial deformation in the beams residing in rigid diaphragm. If “Slabs To Define Rigid Diaphragm” option is selected, rigid diaphragms will be created by examining the continuity and neighbourhood of slabs both in horizontal and vertical directions. If two or more slab groups do not touch each other directly or by means of other intermediate slabs, each of these groups will form a separate rigid diaphragm. There may be nodes that do not touch any of the slabs. These nodes, then, are defined as free nodes and they do not belong to any of the diaphragms. “Single Rigid Diaphragm At Each Floor Level” option forces the whole storey level to behave like a rigid diaphragm even if there is no slabs defined. If “No Rigid Diaphragm At Floor Levels” option is selected, rigid diaphragm action is not utilised in the analysis. All nodes in the storey levels will be accepted as free nodes. If there are big openings in the floor (approximately greater than 1/3 of total floor area), it will be difficult to expect a rigid diaphragm action. Then this option should be used in the analysis.

Beam Section Using the radio buttons located in this section, flanges of the beam can be taken into account in the building model.

Stiffnesses “Moment of Inertia”, “Modulus of Elasticity”, “Torsional Constant” and “Cross Sectional Area” of member groups can be scaled by using the coefficients in “Stiffnesses” page. Values less than “1” will reduce the related parameter whereas values greater than “1” will increase its value. For example, if you want to minimize the lateral load sharing of columns in a Wall-Frame structure, you can use a coefficient of 5% for column moment of inertia. This operation will globally multiply all column moment of inertias by 0.05 during the analysis data preparation and analysis will be conducted accordingly. If any modification is made in this field, analysis must be repeated.

Please note that for most of template, the “Torsional Stiffness Factor” of Beams defaults to 0.01 (1%) to minimize torsional forces on main beams generated by secondary beams. If there are situation such as curve beams that user want to utilise more of torsional stiffness, this setting can be increased. Stiffnesses can also be changed for individual members by selecting the member > right-click > Edit Section/Material.

Settings Additional options related to the analysis can be specified on the “Settings” tab.

Issue Warnings For Cantilever Beams Not Marked If free end of the beams are not specified in Graphic Editor, then program will display a warning to mark this free ends. If this option is unchecked, no warning will be displayed. If individual cantilever beams marking have been manually done (via “Mark Free End of Cantilerver Beam”), it’s recommended to uncheck this option, otherwise this warning will always appear when Building Analysis is run.

Issue Warnings For Unsupported Columns Before Analysis If columns or walls in the system are left unsupported, warning messages will be displayed to alert the user. Column may not be sitting on another member or may not be assigned a support at the lower joint. In case of such a warning, you must go back to Graphic Editor and correct the model. This feature can be disabled by unchecking this option.

Print Column, Wall and Beam Section Properties in Post-Analysis Report Column, Wall and Beam section properties can be included in the Post-Analysis Report by checking this option.

Use ‘Sparse Solver’ for Building Analysis The purpose of the sparse solver is to reduce the time required for analysis. For certain model types a dramatic reduction in the analysis time can be achieved, (e.g. models utilizing the FE shell model for walls or very big models); for other models it may be less significant. However, the sparse solver is more stringent and less forgiving on modelling errors such as unsupported members and instability. If the model does not run to completion, try switching this option off.

Total/Relative Horizontal Drift Limits Building horizontal drift checking is carried out and included in the Post-Analysis Report. The limit values for the "Total Horizontal Drift" and "Relative Horizontal Drift" values defined here will be used in this report. Total Horizontal Drift is the ratio of floor horizontal displacement to the height to the level of the floor, and Relative Horizontal Drift is the ratio of relative floor horizontal displacement to the height of that particular storey.

Axial Load Comparison Tolerance

ProtaStructure compares vertical loads on the building before transferred onto the beams and after decomposed onto the beams before building analysis. A third check is performed by summing the column axial loads after the analysis. These three group of values must be similar. A 5% tolerance in difference is adequate as a default value. If there are problems related with slab yield lines or load transferring in the model, this difference may exceed 5%. A warning message is issued after the analysis if 5% tolerance is exceeded. Examine the Axial Load Comparison Report for more details.

Storey Weight and Center of Gravity Calculations After the vertical loads are defined on the system, they are decomposed onto the beams and reaction values are calculated at the nodes. These reactions are also regarded as masses at the joints. If “Use Decomposed Loads” option is selected, then masses in the joints are used in center of gravity and weight calculations. If there are no beams in the system (like in Flat Slabs), then “ Use Undecomposed Loads” option should be used.

Angle Limit for Splitting Beam Axes Allows user to set the angle limit at which connected beam axes with different orientation will be split (else combined). Refer to related article below for more details.

Related Articles : Angle Limit for Splitting Beam Axes Building Analysis Building Parameters, Loading and Materials (Overview)

Angle Limit for Splitting Beam Axes Allows user to set the angle limit at which connected beam axes with different orientation will be split (else combined) Only beams axes exceeding the set angle will be split to separate design & detailing axes. This setting is under ‘Building Analysis > Model Options > Settings > Angle Limit for Splitting Beam Axes

In the below example, there are 3 beam axes with 0, 45 & 70 degrees respectively

When the angle is set to 30 degrees (default), only 1B1-1B2-1B3 will be combined into single beam design axis while the rest will be split to separate axes (as below)

When the angle is set to 50 degrees, only 1B1-1B2-1B3 & 1B4-1B5-1B6 will be combined into single beam design axis while the rest will be split to separate axes (as below)

Analysis The Building Analysis is performed from the “Analysis” page of the “Building Analysis” form. On this page options are also provided to run a Building Model Check, to perform an Eigenvalue Analysis, to run batch Column/wall and Beam designs, and to display the Axial Load Comparison Report.

Building Model Check Before making the building analysis you can use the "Building Model Validity Check" options to make a final model check on the model you have created.

Using the "Building Model Validity Check", you can determine "Overlapping Slabs", “Overlapping Columns”, "Overlapping Slabs and Beams", “Columns Inside Slab Panels”, "Overlapping Beams and Walls", “Validity of Axis Intersections”, “Proximity of Axis Intersections” and “Overlapping Columns Spanning More than One Storey”. If any of the above overlapping conditions is detected, you have to return back to the Graphic Editor and modify the members that cause the problem. Building Model Validity Check option can be applied to the "Current Storey" or "All Storeys".

Perform Building Analysis A linear elastic static analysis is performed for every unstaged loadcase that has been defined and a staged construction analysis is performed for every staged construction loadcase. The results for both the unstaged and staged load cases can be examined using the ‘” Model and Analysis Results Display”. The unstaged and staged combinations are both used for design purposes.

Perform Eigenvalue Analysis An “Eigenvalue Analysis” can be performed as part of the Building Analysis in order to calculate natural frequencies and mode shapes, (which will be dependent on storey mass and model stiffness). No loading is used in the analysis. The Eigenvalue Analysis results can then be used for seismic design purposes and can also be of value if wind tunnel tests are required.

Controlling the Storey Mass for Eigenvalue Analysis The storey mass for Eigenvalue analysis is always based on the dead load G plus a fraction of the live load Q. The degree to which the live load is assumed to participate is controlled by the participation factor (n), which can be specified on the Lateral Loading tab of the Building Parameters dialog. Note: For Lateral Load calculations, the storey weight can be based on G or Q or G+nQ. The Live Load Participation Factor, (n) does not affect the Notional Load Calculation unless the G+nQ option is selected. The G and Q components of the Storey Mass/Weight can be derived from the decomposed beam loads, or the undecomposed slab loads, the choice of option being controlled via the “Settings” tab of the Building Analysis “Model Options “dialog. The mass/weight determined for the chosen option can be reviewed by hovering the cursor over the Center of Gravity indicated on the form plan after running a Building Analysis. If all slabs transfer their loads to beams or walls, either choice should produce a similar mass/weight. However in flat slab models this is often not the case - the mass determined using the decomposed beam loads option is likely to be significantly smaller than that from the undecomposed slab loads option. In such models it is important that the latter option is always selected.

Model Stiffness for Eigenvalue Analysis The engineer should use section properties that are appropriate for the Eigenvalue Analysis. For columns and walls this could involve making global stiffness adjustments to model cracked section properties. The ACI code may be referred to for some guidance in this regard. These adjustments can be made via the “Model Options/Stiffnesses” tab of the Building Analysis form.

Controlling the Number of Mode Shapes Required These are set on the “Lateral Loading” tab of the Building Parameters dialog.

Graphical Results To view a mode shape, activate the “Displacements” button and select the mode shape required from the Loading menu. Animation can be activated if required from the Displacements menu.

Numerical Results Numerical output from the analysis consisting of frequencies and mass participations is accessed from the “Report” tab – “Eigenvalue Results Report” Button.

Column/Wall and Beam Reinforcement Design Check these boxes if you want the program to automatically run batch designs of the columns/walls and beams immediately following the analysis.

Re-select Steel Bars Any previously designed steel will be checked using the latest analysis results, unless you check the option to re-select steel bars – in which case the program will attempt to design new steel for the latest analysis results.

Axial Load Comparison Report The "Axial Load Comparison Report" provides a means of verifying the total dead and live load applied to the building. It can also can be used to cross check: 

slab loads have been correctly decomposed on to supporting members



gravity load applied matches the building analysis total vertical reaction



gravity load applied matches the FE chasedown total vertical reaction

This report sums all of the dead and live load applied at each storey and displays the axial forces in the columns and shear walls. These values need to agree with each other within a tolerance limit (5% by default). If they do not, it may indicate loads are lost due to possible error in modelling. Hence, the reason for the discrepancy should be investigated. Table 1 : TOTAL LOADS (Based on Slab) is sum of dead and live loads of all members with the slab load not yet decomposed or calculated on the beam. You can take this as the input weight of the structure. Table 2 : TOTAL LOADS (After Decomposition of Beam) takes into account the decomposition of the slab load onto the beams based on either yield-line or FE Decomposition. The beam load now includes the slab loads (and hence zero values are shown under the slab column). Table 3 : BUILDING ANALYSIS COLUMNS AND WALL AXIAL LOADS sums up the actual column and wall axial loads after building analysis (for regular beam/slab model)

Table 4 : FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS COLUMN/WALL AXIAL LOADS sums up the actual column and wall loads after Finite Element Chasedown process from top to bottom storey (required for flat slab models) For beam slab model (all slabs supported properly by beams), check the following: 

Firstly, check Table 1 total values are similar to Table 2. This ensures that all slab loads are accurately captured by beams, i.e. no slab loads are lost.



Then verify Table 2 total values are similar to Table 3. This ensures that all the superstructure weight are completely captured by the columns and walls down to the foundation.

For flat slab models, check the following: 

Check Table 1 total values are similar to Table 4. This ensures that all the superstructure slab weight are completely captured by the columns and walls down to the foundation.



Ignore Table 2 and Table 3 and the associated warnings because these tables are only applicable to beam slab model

Related Articales : Building Analysis

Post Analysis The analysis produces graphical results for both the Static and Eigenvalue Analysis that can be accessed simultaneously in the Model and Analysis Results Display. Tabular results can be obtained as an Analysis Results Report.

Model and Analysis Results Display The “Building Analysis” procedure creates a 3-D analytical model of the building which can be viewed using the “Model and Analysis Results Display” option located on the “Post Analysis” of the “Building Analysis” form. By using options in “Model and Analysis Results Display”, you can effectively check whether the analytical model is prepared correctly - you can display details such as frame and nodal loadings, system connectivity information, rigid end zones, end releases etc. Again by using the available options, you can review the analysis results such as displacements, axial forces, shears, bending moments, torsions, and finite element contours. Display of the analytical model can be controlled using the right mouse button and mouse wheel. Rotation operations can be performed by pressing right mouse button and dragging. Zoom-In and Zoom-Out can be performed by rotating the mouse wheel. Pan operations can be done by pressing the mouse wheel and dragging. The following buttons can be used to control the display:

GENERAL & ELEMENTS TAB

The most commonly used view settings can be selected directly from the drop down menus, however other settings such as node display type, text properties and size, local axis colours etc. can be adjusted by displaying the “General” & "Elements" tab.

Print You can send the high resolution image of 3-D analytical model to printer by using “Print” button. A print preview is displayed so that you can check the image before it is printed.

Find Node/Member This button can be used to locate an individual node, frame element or shell element within the 3-D analytical model.

Filter Particularly for complicated and big-sized models, filtering is essential. By utilising the Filters button any unnecessary detail can be removed or restored. You can remove any storey level, any axis, or member type from the view, enabling you to focus on a particular detail in the model.

Nodes When the Nodes button is depressed the additional options on the drop down become active. Selecting “Labels” from the drop down controls the display of node numbers. Similarly, “Supports” and “Springs” display any support/spring assigned to a node if they exist. Nodal loads assigned to each node can be seen if the “Nodal Loads” option is checked. “All Diaphragms” can be used to show how nodes are connected to any diaphragms in the model.

Frame Elements Select “Labels” from the drop down to view the member labels. “Frame Numbers” are automatically assigned to each element during the analysis model creation. Any rigid members (including those created for example when “Rigid Zones” have been specified) can be displayed using the “Rigid Members” option. Point loads and distributed loads acting on beam spans can also be displayed on analytical model. Check “Frame Loads” option for this purpose. Other details that can be activated for frame elements are “Local Axes” and “Frame Direction Arrows”.

Shell Elements Select “Labels” from the drop down to view the shell numbers. In order to isolate shell elements from neighbouring members and easily distinguish the connectivity information, check “Shrink” option.

RESULTS TAB Displacements, Frame Element Results and Contours are displayed for the load case selected in the “Loading” list. If an eigenvalue analysis has been performed, mode shapes of the building will have been calculated and the modes can be selected from the “Loading” list in order to see the mode shape.

Displacements Translation and rotation values at the node points can be displayed either as a resultant or in each of the global directions. For angled systems, if non-orthogonal displacements are to be investigated, then the “Resultant” option can be used. To animate the displacement display, select “Animation”. The decimal precision of the displacement values can be adjusted from “Unit and Format Settings” in the “Settings” menu of the Graphic Editor. Further configuration options exist in the “Displacements” section of the “View Settings” menu as described below. Displacements are assigned an automatic scale when first loaded. To increase the scale factor uncheck the “Auto Scale” box and enter a value manually into the “Display Scale” field. The “Cubic Curve” option draws the displacements of frame and shell members by making use of the loading on the elements, otherwise displacements are drawn just at the node points if this option is removed. To change the display unit of the displacements, adjust the “Displacement Display Unit”. If you select “Analysis”, then the displacement values will be displayed in whatever unit is used in analysis. The speed and number of steps in the animation can be adjusted via the “ View Settings” menu. For a smooth animation slow-down the speed while increasing the step number.

Diagrams There are 6 force and moment components related to a frame element each of which can be displayed from the drop down menu: N : Axial Load T : Torsional Moment V2 : Shear force along element local axis 2 (Major shear of beam and wall; shear of column along dir 1) V3 : Shear forces along element local axis 3 (Minor shear of beam and wall; shear of column along dir 2) M2 : Bending moments about element local axis 2 (Minor moment of beam and wall; moment of column along dir 1) M3 : Bending moments about element local axis 3 (Major moment of beam and walls; moment of column along dir 2) Select the “Labels” option to see the diagram values on the display. Moment or force diagrams are also drawn for the rigid members if you check the “Rigid Members” in the Diagrams section of the “View Settings” menu. Diagrams are assigned an automatic scale when first loaded. Uncheck “Auto Scale” box in the “View Settings” menu and enter a value manually into the “Scale” field to use a different scale.

Contours If a “Finite Element Shell Model” is used for analytical modelling of walls this button will be enabled allowing you to display either shaded or line contours for the selected contour type. There are 9 contour types related to the shell elements, the required type is selected from the “View Settings” menu:

F11 : F22 : F12 : M11 : M22 : M12 : Displacement Displacement Displacement – Z,

Horizontal Vertical Shear In-plane Out-of-plane Twisting

Axial Force per Axial Force per Force per Bending Moment per Bending Moment per Moment per – –

unit unit unit unit unit unit

length, length, length, length, length, length, X, Y,

Shell internal forces are given for unit length of the member. The number of contour intervals can be adjusted from the “View Settings” menu.

Legend Use this button to display the legend for the currently selected contour option. The legend will remain in the view as long as the contour display is active.

Analysis Results Report In order to examine the analysis results calculated at joints, frames and shell elements, press “Analysis Output Report Preparation” button in the “Post Analysis” tab. “Analysis Results” dialog will be loaded. You can perform multiple filtering on analysis results by using this tree structured form. As the default view, model will be categorised in storey basis. By selecting “Member Types” in “List Type” field, you can categorise the results in element basis.

If you highlight “Building” title and press “>>” button, all members in the system (Nodes, Columns, Beams etc.) will be listed on the “Structural Members” list on the right.

You can do further selections by expanding the “Building” title and subselecting any elements under any of the “Storey” title. For the items to be transferred to analysis report, select the item on the tree and press “>>” button. If you just want to transfer all the elements on “Storey01” to the analysis report, ideally select “Storey01” title and press “>>”. In order to exclude the transferred items from the report, select related item from the “Structural Members” list and press “ Settings. We suggest that this options be unchecked to reduce memory requirement and size of the report.

Storey Displacements Report ProtaStructure calculates the displacements in the x and y directions and torsion for each load combination for each storey. ProtaStructure creates building models by using three degrees of freedom in each rigid diaphragm group. These degrees of freedom are: displacement in x direction, displacement in y direction and torsion. There are displacements resulting from different load cases at the mass center of each diaphragm. In the Building Analysis form, “Storey Displacements” option in the “Reports” menu can be used to print out the storey displacements.

Sway Classification Report This report displays the calculations for determining the sway classification of each storey in the structure. The calculations vary depending on the active design code. If designing to BS8110, CP65 or HK-2004 the calculations are in accordance with ACI 318-02. If designing to EC2 the calculations are in accordance with Annex H of that code.

Beam Load Analysis Report This report lists the slab loads that decomposed on to each beam along with those loads applied directly to each beam. It does not include ‘secondary beam’ reactions or discontinous (transfer) columns and wall loads as these loads are not externally applied and are evaluated in the builidng analysis.

Eigenvalue Results If an Eigenvalue Analysis has been performed, an extra button appears on the Reports tab. The “Eigenvalue Results Report” provides numerical output from the Eigenvalue analysis consisting of frequencies and mass participations. This report will also be created if earthquake analysis has been performing (by generating siesmic load cases & combination). The report will show all the earthquake analysis results such as : 

Modal participation factors



Dynamic Forces



Spectrum modal amplitudes



Base Forces due to siesmic load cases

Slab Loads Report This report shows all the slab additional dead loads as created in the “Slab Additional Loads library”

Wall Types Report

This report shows all the brickwall (or partition) types as created in the “Wall Types Library”.

Related Articles : Building Analysis

Analysis and Design of Slabs (Contents) Solid Slabs, and Flat Slabs can be analysed and designed in ProtaStructure. Suitable “Slab Strips” must be defined In the Graphic Editor to distinguish the different types of slab so that they can be analysed with an appropriate method. The “Analytical Strip” type employs the Moment Coefficient Method, whereas the “FE Strip” type is used in conjunction with the results of an FE floor analysis. A “Manual Strip” type can be specified where reinforcement is to be placed directly without any design. Note that the ultimate load factors used in the analysis are obtained from the first load combination defined in the Standard Load Combination used in the analysis of the building. Therefore, when a customized load combination is used, special care must be taken to have the first combination to reflect the correct load factors. Typical procedures of the slab design and the column punching shear check can be studied in the subsections

Related Articles: Analytical Strip Finite Element (FE) Strip Slab design and settings Column Punching Check

Analytical Strip Slab Strips for the Moment Coefficient Method These strips are used for solid slabs supported by beams or walls. A slab strip lies through adjacent solid slabs (defines an axis). Support and span moments for all solid slabs connected by this axis will be calculated by the “Moment Coefficient Method”. Span reinforcements for each slab will be selected according to the span moment calculated for that slab. For the calculation of support reinforcements, the biggest support moment of the two adjacent slabs will be selected after redistribution. After determining the steel area required in the support, the area of the reinforcements coming from the spans and passing through the support would be

calculated. If these bars don’t satisfy the area required in the support, additional support reinforcement would be provided. Each Slab strip drawn would be automatically considered as a strip for the Moment Coefficient Method, unless the “Finite Element Strip” box is checked. These strips must pass through the slabs supported by beams and walls. Reinforcements calculated according to the Moment Coefficient Method will be shown on the screen, as soon as the strip is drawn.

Related Articles: Working with Slab Strips FE Strip Slab design and settings Slab Design Settings

Finite Element (FE) Strip

Slab Strips for the Finite Element Analysis of Solid Slabs Supported by Beams (Span Strip) As an alternative to the Moment Coefficient Method, “Finite Element Analysis” can be used. To define a slab strip for the “Finite Element Analysis”, the “Finite Element Strip” box must be checked, and the “Span Strip” option should be selected. Similar to the Moment Coefficient Method, these strips must pass through the slabs supported by beams and walls. After drawing all strips, you can start the analysis of the slabs by using the “FE Floor Analysis” option in the “Run” pull down menu. (See “FE Floor Analysis” chapter for details) Span reinforcement is calculated according to the maximum moment found in the “Span Zone”. Span Zone is L/4 distance from each axis defining a slab as shown in the sketch. Similarly, support moments are taken from the “Support Zone” which is the L/4 distance in each side of a support. After determining the maximum moment in span or support, ProtaStructure calculates the reinforcement required accordingly.

Definitions of “Span Zone” and “Support Zone” for Solid Slabs supported by beams or walls (Span Strip Parameters).

Support Band Strip for Flat Slabs Different types of slab strips should be used for span and support reinforcement calculations for flat slabs. “Span Zone” is the L/4 distance from each axis defining a slab, and “Support Zones” are (in between) the span zones and the axis. To define span and support zones properly, “Support Bands” should be drawn. These bands must be placed between the columns and walls that support a slab and are not connected by beams. To draw a Support Band, click the “Beam” option and check the “Support Band” box in the Beam Form loaded. Slabs should be defined before the support bands. When a support band is drawn to connect supports, namely columns and beams supporting a slab, the width of the band will be defined according to the widths of the adjacent slabs. Width of a support band is the sum of the L/4 lengths of two adjacent slabs. These support bands work as imaginary beams. Therefore, loads coming from slabs to these bands, can be viewed and edited in the “Beam Load Analysis” menu.

Span Band Strip for Flat Slabs In flat slabs, for calculating the reinforcement required according to the maximum moment found in the span zone, “Span Band Strips” should be defined. These strips can be drawn on the screen after checking the “Finite Element Strip” box and selecting the “Span Band Strip” option. These strips must pass through the span zones of slabs. After drawing all strips, you can start the analysis of the slabs by using the “FE Floor Analysis” option in the “Run” pull down menu. (See “FE Floor Analysis” chapter for details)

Definitions of “Span Zone” and “Support Zone” for Flat Slabs supported by columns and walls (Span Band Strip).

Support Strip for Flat Slabs In flat slabs, for calculating the reinforcement required according to the maximum moment found in the support zone, “Support Strips” should be defined. These strips should pass through the Support Bands defined between the columns and walls supporting a flat slab. To define a Support Strip, after checking the “Finite Element Strip” box in the Slab Strip Properties, select the “Support Strip” option from the “Strip Menu”. A Support Strip passing through a Support Band finds the maximum moment close to the supports in the band and the reinforcement for the support zone is calculated according to this moment. After drawing all strips, you can start the analysis of the slabs by using the “FE Floor Analysis” option in the “Run” pull down menu. (See “FE Floor Analysis” chapter for details)

Definition of “Support Band” and “Support Strip”

Fixed Band Strip for Flat Slabs When you prefer to put a single top and bottom steel along the strip, "Fixed Band" strips are ideal solution, especially for complex plans that Span Band or Support Band strips cannot be used or for small buildings like villas. Extents of the "Fixed Band" to the left and right side of the strip line is provided by the user. Following the analysis of the floor, all nodes within the region covered by the strip will be scanned and a single maximum positive and a single negative moments are returned (that creates bending along the direction of the strip). Based on these moments a top and a bottom steel is selected and placed along the strip. To define a Fixed Band Strip, after checking the “Finite Element Strip” box in the Slab Strip Properties, select the “Fixed Band Strip” option from the “Strip Menu”. Then, the strip line can be dragged through the slab panels in the floor. Band extents can be defined either by entering the left and right distances to the "Left Extent" and "Right Extent" fields, or alternatively by picking a point to the left or right side of the strip line after pressing "Pick Point" button.

Picking points may be a more preferred method of providing strip extents when the strip will be extended up to an existing axis line or a slab edge. You can use "EndPoint" or "Nearest" snap modes before picking a point on the reference line. After picking a point, you can apply the modification to the strip by pressing the "Update" button. Steel cut length can be adjusted using the "Slab Steel Bars Cut Length" field located in the "Steel Bars" page of the "Slab Design Settings" form.

"Fixed Band" Slab Strip Results Interpretation

Related Articles: Working with Slab Strips Analytical Strip Slab design and settings Slab Design Settings

Slab design and settings

Slab Design Solid slabs are analysed according to the Moment Coefficient Method unless the strips defined for them have been set as Finite Element Strips. After the insertion of all slabs and slab strips, the slab analysis and design can be carried out in batch mode using the "Slab Analysis and Design" option in the "Run" pulldown menu. The "Slab Analysis and Design" option can alternatively be accessed using the right-click menu of "Slabs" node in the "Structure Tree".

The ultimate load factors are obtained using the first load combination defined in the Standard Load Combination used in the analysis of the building. Therefore, when a customized load combination is used, special care must be taken to have the first combination to reflect the correct load factors. Follow the items listed below, for the analysis and design slabs using the Moment Coefficient Method: 1. First insert the “Slab Strips” in plan view. If you want to use Moment Coefficient Method, these strips should not be Finite Element Strips. Therefore, while drawing these strips, the “Finite Element Strip” option in the "Slab Strip Properties" should not be checked. 2. If you want to analyse only the slabs of the current storey, then “All Storeys” box should not be checked in the “Slab Analysis and Design” dialog. If you check this option, then all the slabs in the building will be included in the calculations. 3. Press the "Calculate" button to run the process. The output report created during the process will be displayed. 4. If you close the “Slab Analysis and Design” window, the reinforcements will be inserted or updated (if already exist) in the plan view. Abbreviations and symbols used in the reports when the slab designs are performed according to the Moment Coefficient Method: Type

Type

g L1 L2

As

of panel and location and q Dead and Imposed Loads of slabs Slab dimension in the direction of the slab strip Slab dimension in the vertical direction to the slab strip C Moment Coefficient M Design Moment Calculated Area of reinforcement required

Without using the "Slab Analysis and Design" dialog you can update the reinforcements of slabs by selecting and updating the strips passing through that slab. Note that the output report will only be created or updated when "Slab Analysis and Design" dialog is used. Alternatively, steel bar objects can also be selected and modified manually. Note that, these manual changes will be overwritten at the next update of the parent slab strip that it resides on, if the required steel is more that provided be these bars.

Settings used in Slab Design Settings to be used in the slab designs are assigned using the “Slab Design Settings” option under the “Settings” pulldown menu. See: Slab Design Settings for details.

Drawing Slab Reinforcements Slab reinforcements can be drawn automatically using Slab Strips in the Graphic Editor Screen. After placing all slab strips, follow the steps listed below to draw slab reinforcements: 1. If you are using the Moment Coefficient Method for the analysis, then after the “Slab Design” procedure, the reinforcements selected will be drawn on the screen automatically. 2. If you are using the “Finite Element Method” for the analysis, then each slab strip should be updated by the “Update Steel Bars” option in “Arrange Steel Bars” form located in “View” pulldown or using “Arrange Steel Bars” menu option located in the toolbar.

Arrange Steel Bars Menu Options placed in the “Arrange Steel Bars” menu are listed below: Update Steel Bars The “Update Steel Bars” option can be used for drawing steel bars of a slab for the first time or to update the steel bars already drawn. If the steel bars required for a slab have changed as a result of a new analysis, then the “Update Steel Bars” option will update only the insufficient reinforcements drawn regarding the previous analysis. If you increased some of the reinforcements manually then these bars would not be changed by the updating procedure. If you want to change all the reinforcement placed according to the previous analysis and edited manually, then you should use the “Delete Steel Bars” option before the “Update Steel Bars” option. Delete Steel Bars The “Delete Steel Bars” option erases all the steel bars drawn on the screen. . It may be better to use “Delete Steel bars” option before using “Update Steel Bars” option.

Related Articles: Slab Design Settings

Column Punching Check Punching Check

You can perform punching checks according to the selected concrete code using the “Punch option located in the “Run” menu.

The punching check calculations have been designed for flat slab structures and raft foundations. Therefore, the stiffnesses of any connecting beams (if they exist) are not considered in the calculations. The punching check is applied only to the selected members, or if no selection exists, then all columns and walls in the storey will be checked. Alternatively, you can make a single column or wall selection and use the right-click shortcut menu to check the selected member. The “Calculate” button performs the punching check and results are displayed in the report preview window. Punching perimeters of the selected columns are automatically determined and drawn in the plan view for visual confirmation. The “Regen” command will erase these perimeters.

Punching perimeters are color coded: 

A green perimeter indicates that the column satisfies the punching check.



A red perimeter indicates that the column fails the punching check.



Excluded regions of the punching perimeters (due to the existence of holes, along the edges of the slabs etc.) are drawn using a block color.

Related Articles: Column Design Settings - Design Column Design Settings - Steel Bars Selection Method Column Design Settings - Detail Drawings Working with Columns - Defining/ Editing a Column Working with Columns - Polyline Column Editor Column Shortcut Menu Working with Columns - Column Properties Column Support Type Definitions

FE Analysis of Floors (Contents) The vertical load analysis of floor systems and any slab strips as required, modelled in the ProtaStructure Graphic Editor can be carried out within the Finite Element Floor Analysis Module. The Finite Element Analysis form can be loaded by selecting "FE Floor Analysis" from the "Run" pulldown. The form is composed of the following pages: 1. Floor Mesh and Analysis : The Finite Element model is generated and analysed from here using the selected parameters (Column/Wall Model Types, Stiffness factors, Cracking & Creep) by clicking the “Floor Mesh and Analysis” button. 2. Post Analysis Processes and Reports: This page is used for visualising and reporting the displacements and forces obtained from the analysis. 3. Model Export (Optional): This page can be used for transferring the FE model to other analysis packages.

Column/Wall Model Types, Stiffness factors, Cracking & Creep The finite element model is prepared using the model options located on the “Floor Mesh and Analysis” page as described in the topics below. These should be set before clicking the “Floor Mesh and Analysis” button to generate the mesh.

Column/Wall Model Types In all analysis modelling options the following assumptions are used:

· The rigid zones due to columns, beams and walls (short dimension) are not considered. Therefore, for columns only one node (in plan view), for walls a series of nodes along the wall insertion axis are created. · A series of frame members are created for modelling beam elements, between the nodes created for plate elements along the edge of the beam. The rigid zones due to beam dimensions are ignored. · Thin shell members are utilised for modelling the slab panels. Shear deformations of these members are not taken into account. · X and Y translational degrees of freedoms and rotations about z-axis are restrained at all nodes. Three Column and Wall modelling options are provided in the ProtaStructure Finite Element Floor Analysis Module, namely, fixed support model, elastic spring model and a short frame model.

z-Restrained (Pinned) Support Model: The z-direction translational degree of freedom of the column nodes and wall nodes are restrained in this model type. Rotational degrees of freedom of these nodes are not restrained. Rigid frame members (with equivalent rotational rigidity to that of the wall element) are placed between the wall nodes. All the other nodes can translate in z and rotate around x and y.

z-Restrained (Pinned) Support Model

Elastic Spring Element Model An elastic spring element is placed at the column and wall nodes. The stiffnesses of the springs are calculated so that they will simulate the axial rigidity (k = EA / L) of the column and wall elements. Rigid frame members (with equivalent rotational rigidity to that of the wall element) are placed between the wall nodes. All other nodes can translate in z and rotate around x and y.

Elastic Spring Support Model

Short Frame Model In this modelling option, the bending rigidity of the columns is considered by providing a frame member below and above (if exists) the column nodes. The sectional properties of the frame members are set equivalent to that of the actual members. Top nodes of the upper columns are set so that all degrees of freedom are restrained except ztranslation, while all degrees of freedom of the bottom nodes of the lower columns are restrained. The top nodes of the lower columns (which is the bottom node of the upper column as well) can translate in z and rotate around x and y. The springs, with stiffnesses equivalent to the axial rigidity of the walls are introduced at the nodes in the walls, similar to the "elastic spring element model" option. Rigid frame members (with equivalent rotational rigidity to that of the wall element) are placed between the wall nodes.

Short Frame Model

Stiffness Factors Beam, Slab, Column and Wall stiffness factors can be set automatically to make an allowance for cracking and creep. An automated calculation is provided for this purpose: see Cracking & Creep. Alternatively the stiffness factors can be defined individually if required for maximum flexibility.

Beam Stiffness Multiplier Beam bending stiffnesses will be multiplied with the factor provided in this field. Occasionally, you may like to have beams to provide exaggerated restrain effect to the slabs and rib beams. In order to realise this effect, you can increase the stiffness factor of the beams by entering values greater than “1” in this field. Note that, this factor is not applied to the ribs or grillage beams.

Slab Stiffness Multiplier

Slab bending stiffnesses will be multiplied with the factor provided in this field. Occasionally, you may like to reduce slab stiffnesses to provide exaggerated restrain effect to the slabs and rib beams. In order to realise this effect, you can decrease the stiffness factor of the slabs by entering values less than “1” in this field.

Column Stiffness Multiplier Column stiffnesses will be multiplied with the factor provided in this field.

Wall Stiffness Multiplier Wall stiffnesses will be multiplied with the factor provided in this field.

Include Column and Wall Sections in the Model This setting controls the inclusion of column and wall outlines in the finite element analytical model. A single node will be used for modeling the columns if this option is not checked. This option is very useful for reducing the support moments at column and wall nodes by considering the section of the column. If you check this option, rigid links are provided to create a rigid column outline to reduce stress concentrations and spikes occurring around columns and walls. Note that, this modeling option is created specifically for flat slab structures. Models may not be created successfully for beam/slab systems.

Include Slab Plates in FE Model This setting controls the inclusion of slabs as Finite Element Plate Bending elements. If you check “Include Plates in FE Model”, slabs will be included in the Finite Element Floor Model. When slab are included, calculated slab loads that are transferred to beams are ignored and beams are divided into segments using the nodes created by the plate elements.

Consider Beam Torsional Stiffnesses Beam Torsional Stiffnesses are calculated and used in the finite element model if this option is checked. Otherwise, the torsional stiffness of all beams in the model will be ignored.

Include Upper Storey Column Loads If this option is checked, the calculated column axial loads of the upper storey Finite Element Model are transferred as point loads at the related column locations. Using this option, it is possible to make 3DShort Frame analyses and include the column and wall axial loads of the upper stories. Note that, if this option is checked, the analyses should be carried in order from upper to lower floor levels.

Upper Storey Column Loads Table Column and wall loads that are calculated in the upper floor levels analysis can be viewed and edited using the “Upper Storey Column Loads Table”.

Note that, the self weight of the columns and walls are added to the axial force results of the upper storey.

Use ‘Sparse Solver’ for FE Analysis The purpose of the sparse solver is to reduce the time required for analysis. For certain model types a dramatic reduction in the analysis time can be achieved, for other models it may be less significant.

Cracking & Creep The "Cracking & Creep" button is used to calculate a stiffness factor which is then applied to the FE model. The purpose of this factor is to make an allowance for creep, cracking and shrinkage when determining an estimate of total long term concrete slab deflection. Key points to note when considering total long term concrete slab deflection are: 1. The total deflection estimate is obtained by reviewing the G+Q*F combination. 2. The stiffness factors suggested also take account of the load factors –the deflections displayed are a serviceability estimate. (There is no requirement to make further adjustments to the deflections). 3. If you are using the stiffness factor adjustment as suggested then there is absolutely no value in looking at the deflections for G or Q individually. (These results are only left visible to accommodate engineers with their own methods of estimating the deflection based on different adjustment factors.) 4. It needs to be understood that creep and cracking effects do not apply equally to dead and imposed loads – this is another reason why the individual G and Q deflection plots should be viewed with extreme caution if at all. 5. If the total deflection determined by this method is greater than span/250 then in general the slab may be regarded as being too thin. 6. It is Prota’s view that considering deflection in this simple, well established and accepted fashion remains the most pragmatic approach in most situations. (Refer to concrete centre guide “How to design reinforced concrete flat slabs using Finite Element Analysis” for further information.) 7. The possibility of adding reinforcement to control deflection is sometimes raised. This requires a more theoretical approach where once again creep cracking and shrinkage must all be considered. Our research indicates that this approach cannot readily prove slab depths which have always been accepted without the addition of reinforcement, are in fact acceptable. You also have to add a lot of reinforcement to make a small % difference to the deflection. Therefore, it seems that indiscriminate use of such an approach may lead to wasteful specification of additional reinforcement.

To calculate the stiffness factor to apply: 1. Choose the “Load Type” (either Domestic/Office or Storage). 2. Enter the “Average/Typical Dead Load” on the current storey.

3. Enter the “Average/Typical Live Load” on the current storey. A suggested range for the stiffness factor is calculated based on the above input. This range also depends on the code being designed to. 4. The “Stiffness Factor to Apply” is displayed at the bottom of the dialog. The default is the lowest value in the suggested range. 5. Click the “OK” button to apply the stiffness factor. On the Model Preparation page the Beam, Slab, Column and Wall stiffness factors will now be set to the calculated value.

Related Articles: Floor Mesh and Analysis - Generate Model Post Analysis Processes and Reports The Floor Analysis Post-Processor Model Export

Floor Mesh and Analysis - Generate Mesh The floor mesh is generated in the "FE Floor Analysis" pre-processor, which is accessed by clicking the "Floor Mesh and Analysis" button.

Generate Model A triangular mesh consisting of DKT plate elements and frame members (if they exist) will be generated generated when the “Generate Model” button is clicked on the toolbar. Beams and walls are modelled as frame members sliced to be compatible with the plate mesh. The size of triangular plate members generated is determined by a combination of the “Plate Element Size” and the “Mesh Uniformity Factor”. These values should be tailored carefully according to the required mesh density, as the mesh density significantly affects the model size and accuracy of computations. The generated model will be saved automatically after meshing.

Plate Element Size This is used to specify the maximum plate size that can be created within the mesh. Minimum plate sizes will be dictated by physical boundaries in the model (e.g. column boundaries) and by seed nodes. Specifying the “Plate Element Size” too small results in an overly fine mesh requiring longer to perform the calculations. Conversely if the “Plate Element Size” is too large, the mesh will be too crude to produce accurate results.

Mesh Uniformity Factor

The "Uniformity Factor" can be modified to adjust the uniformity of the mesh for various floor plans. Acceptable values range from "0" to "100". If "100" is entered the plate element size will generally be similar everywhere in the model. At the other extreme, if "0" is entered, the size of the plate elements will be smaller in relatively smaller slab panels, cantilever slabs and around the slab openings.

Analysis Press the “Exit” button in the “File” pulldown menu in order to analyse the generated FE model. Analysis will be performed automatically. The phases of the analysis process can be monitored from the displayed console window. This window will close as soon as the analysis completes.

Related Articles: Column/Wall Model Types, Stiffness factors, Cracking & Creep Post Analysis Processes and Reports The Floor Analysis Post-Processor Model Export

Post Analysis Processes and Reports Once the analysis has completed the “Post-Analysis Processes and Reports” page is automatically displayed. Moment factor parameters can be adjusted if required, before clicking the “Analysis Post -processing” button to review the results.

Positive and Negative Moment Factors These factors should be defined before clicking the “Analysis Post-processing” button to review the results. Output results that are viewed in the Post-processor and Analysis Results Reports are factored using the values entered in these fields.

Analysis Post-processing The Analysis Post-processor is equipped with several options to provide a visual display of the analysis results. Displacements, moments and various other graphical outputs can be investigated. It is accessed by clicking the “Analysis Post-processing” button. See: The Floor Analysis Post-Processor for further details.

Output Report Preparation After the completion of the analysis phase without any errors, you can generate output reports of the Finite Element Analysis results. The “Output Report Preparation” button will load the “Analysis Results” form that is used for the generation of formatted reports.

The output reports can be prepared for selected nodes, slabs and/or frame members. In all tab pages, you select items to be included using the visible lists and then press the “Create Report” button to generate the report. The generated report will be loaded to the standard editor for quick viewing or formatting and printing. The form has four tab pages:

Nodes Tab Node results can be filtered by nodes or slabs. When selections are made in the "Slabs" list, the nodes within or along the edges of the selected slabs will be included in the report. Similarly, information on selected nodes can be obtained by making a selection from the "Nodes" list. For every node, the following fields may be included in the generated reports: · Restraints: Restraint conditions of the degrees of freedoms of the nodes. For every degree of freedom, "0" indicates unrestrained, and "1" indicates restrained conditions. · Nodal Coordinates: X, Y and Z coordinates of the nodes. · Nodal Displacements and Rotations: Nodal displacements along global x, y and z axes and nodal rotations about global x, y and z axes calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Nodal Reaction Forces: Reaction forces along global x, y and z axes calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Nodal Reaction Moments: Moment reactions about global x, y and z axes calculated during structural analysis of the model. · Slab Deformations: The maximum and minimum displacements obtained on each slab. Soil Reactions: The soil reaction force along z axes calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Soil Reactions (summary): The maximum and minimum soil reactions obtained on each slab. Using the sort options in the lower part of the form, output results can be reported and sorted by nodes or by selected loadings.

Plates Tab Using this tab page, a report for the analysis results calculated for the plate members can be created. Plate results can be filtered by plate members or slabs. When selections are made in the "Slabs" list, the plate members within the selected slabs will be included in the report. Similarly, information on selected plate members can be obtained by making selection in the "Plates" list. For every plate, the following fields may be included in the generated reports: · Member Forces: Moments Mx, My and Mxy, for each node of the plate elements calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Nodal Forces: The force Fz and moments Mx, My, the remaining portion of the structure applied at each node of the plate element. Using the sort options in the lower part of the form, output results can be reported as sorted by plate members or by selected loadings. “Print Element in a Single Line” option will output the results of all nodes of a plate or frame member in a single line. This will produce a compressed report. Selecting the “Skip Line between Elements” option will leave a blank line between all member results. This may be used for a clearer report.

Frames Tab Using this tab page, a report for the analysis results calculated for frame members can be created. Frame element results can be filtered by beams and columns or frame members. When selections are made in the "Beams" list, the frame members for the selected beams or columns will be included in the report. Similarly, information on selected frame members can be obtained by making a selection from the "Elements" list. For every frame member, the following fields may be included in the generated reports: · Member End Forces: Forces Fx, Fy and Fz calculated along local member coordinates, at each end of the frame member calculated during the structural analysis of the model. Here, Fx is the axial force, Fy and Fz are the shear forces along respective local axes. · Member End Moments: Moments Mx, My and Mz, calculated about local member coordinates, at each end of the frame member calculated during the structural analysis of the model. Here, Mx is the torsional moment, My and Mz are the bending moments about respective local axes. Using the sort options in the lower part of the form, output results can be reported as sorted by frame members or by loadings. “Print Element in a Single Line” option will output the results of all nodes of a plate or frame member in a single line. This will produce a compressed report. Selecting the “Skip Line between Elements” option will leave a blank line between all member results. This may be used for a clearer report.

Number Format The format of the numbers that will appear in the report can be modified for displacement, rotation, force and moment values separately using the fields in this tab page. The up/down buttons to the right of the “Total Length” and “Decimal” fields can be used for modifying the total number of digits and the number of digits after the decimal symbol respectively. The effects of the modifications are displayed dynamically on the form.

Create Report Button After setting the preferences the required output can be generated using the “Create Report” button. The resulting file will be displayed in the editor.

Axial Load Comparison Report The "Axial Load Comparison Report" provides a means of verifying the total dead and live load applied to the building. It also can be used to cross check: · slab loads have been correctly decomposed on to the supporting members · gravity load applied matches the building analysis total vertical reaction · gravity load applied matches the FE chasedown total vertical reaction

Merging FE Beam and Column Results with Building Analysis Results Analysis results obtained from the Finite Element Floor Model analysis can be merged with the beam and column results obtained by the Building Analysis.

Merging FE Beam Results with Building Analysis Results Analysis results obtained from the Finite Element Floor Model analysis can be merged with the beam results obtained by the Building Analysis. Only the vertical load cases of the Building Analysis output are affected by this process. The dead load case (G) values and any patterned dead load case (GP11, GP12 etc.) values are replaced with the first load case values of FE results and the live load case (Q) values and any patterned live load case (QP11, QP12 etc.) values are replaced with the second load case values of FE results.

Merging FE Column Results with Building Analysis Results Analysis results obtained from the Finite Element Floor Model analysis can be merged with the column and wall results obtained by the Building Analysis. Only the vertical load cases of the Building Analysis output are affected by this process. The dead load case (G) values and any patterned dead load case (GP11, GP12 etc.) values are replaced with the first load case values of FE results and the live load case (Q) values and any patterned live load case (QP11, QP12 etc.) values are replaced with the second load case values of FE results.

Related Articles: Column/Wall Model Types, Stiffness factors, Cracking & Creep Floor Mesh and Analysis - Generate Model The Floor Analysis Post-Processor Model Export

The Floor Analysis Post-Processor Click the “Analysis Post-processing” button to access the Floor Analysis Post-processor. The post-processor is equipped with several options to provide a visual display of the analysis results: displacements, moments and various other graphical outputs can be investigated.

View Controls View controls are located on the “General” tab as follows:

Orthogonal Plan Mode In order to obtain a true plan view of the 3-D model, use “Orthogonal Plan Mode” button located in the toolbar. When orthogonal plan mode is active, no rotation can be performed with the mouse. Only pan and zoom is allowed in this mode of display. Press the same button to deactivate the plan mode.

View Angle

Use the mouse right and left buttons and scroll wheel to perform zoom in/out, rotation and pan operations. Alternatively, “3-D View” button on the toolbar or in the “View” menu can be used to control the movement of the 3-D display. This form contains nine viewing direction buttons. You can view the model from any pre-set direction.

Orthogonal/Perspective View Perspective (Frustum) view of the 3-D model “Orthogonal/Perspective View” button in the toolbar.

can

be

obtained

by

Print The “Print Preview Menu” is loaded when the “Print” button on the toolbar or the “Print” option on the “File” pulldown is selected. Print is used for creating the hardcopy of the graphical model displayed in the drawing area.

Save Image As Bitmap File 3-D image on drawing area will be saved as bitmap, if “Save Image As Bitmap File” button in the toolbar is clicked.

View Settings Elements in the FE Model are categorised under different titles. Display settings related with these elements can be adjusted using “View Settings” property grid located on the left of the “Floor Analysis Post-Processor screen. Titles located in the “View Settings” Property Grid are: 

General Settings



Geometry (Structural Members)



Nodes



Frame Element



Plate



Displacements



Contours



User Defined Contours



Threshold Contours



Slab Strip



Legend

Titles in the grid are expandable. Each title includes general property fields that control colour, text style, label display, visibility etc

View Settings - General Settings General properties of the display are controlled from the View Settings, “General Settings” title. In order to change the background colour of the display arena, click once on the cell containing the “Background Colour” text. The cell on the right hand side will display a small box previewing the color and a “ …” button. Press this button to load the operating system color picker. In order to perform an anti-aliasing, “Line Anti-Aliasing” text shall be checked. This will smooth the line edges.. By cheking the “Face Anti-Aliasing”, polygons will be drawn smoothly on the screen. Texts can be displayed in three different styles: 

“Bitmap” style uses the true type system fonts and size of the text does not change when screen is zoomed in or out.



“Perspective” style again uses true type system fonts, but text size changes with zoom operations. In addition, text objects far from view plane are displayed smaller.



In the “Vector” style, text objects are displayed using vector fonts like other drawing objects (ISO, ROMAN, TXT). Text size changes with respect to distance from viewplane and magnification. Text properties related with all elements in the drawing area can be controlled from the “ Label” subtitle of each element category title. Label styles of each separate category can be specified independently from each other. General properties related with three distinct text styles (bitmap, perspective or vector) can globally be adjusted from “Bitmap Font Properties”, “Perspective Font Properties” and “Vector Font Properties” fields located under “General Settings” title. The “Raster Bitmap Properties” subtitle includes controls concerning dimension and line settings being sent to printer.

View Settings - Structural Members “Slab”, “Wall”, “Column” and “Beam” members defined in Graphic Editor are all categorised under the “Structural Members” title. Display, colour and label settings can easily be done using the fields that expand when “>” sign near the title is pressed.

View Settings - Nodes Nodes are the connections of analytical members (shells, frames). Analysis results such as moments, displacements are calculated at each node. Display properties related with nodes can be specified by using the subtitles located under “Node” title in the property grid. Nodes can be displayed in three styles. “Display Mode” cell controls this property. “Sphere” style displays the nodes as small spheres whose diameters are controlled by “Sphere Size” field. Colours of these spheres can be specified from “Element Color” cell. “Cross” style displays the nodes as 3-D asterisks. Nodes are viewed as one pixel sized points when “Point” option is selected. If you have defined partial slab loads, these can be displayed by “Nodal Load” data field. Should there are supports assigned to the nodes, these can be displayed by “Support” title.

View Settings - Frame Element

Other than the structural members defined in the Graphic Editor, there are analytical members automatically created by analysis engine. Beam, column, wall, rib and waffle slab members are modelled by frame elements while normal slabs are modelled by triangle plate elements. “Frame Element” title includes the controls related with the display of frame elements in the floor system. “Shrink” option provides an isolated display of frame elements by dispatching them from their end nodes. Direction of the frame element can be seen using fields in “Element Direction” title. Local axes of frame elements can also be seen by “Local Axes” field. Rigid beams in wall members or automatic rigid links are grouped under “Rigid Elements” title. Appearance settings can be made using the fields under this title. If there are user-defined loads that have been defined on beams in Graphic Editor, these also can be seen and adjusted using the fields located under “Frame Loads” title.

View Settings - Plates Discrete Kirchhoff Triangles used in the finite element slab analysis are called plates in short. Appearance settings of plate elements can be made using the fields located under “Plate” title. Display of the plate elements are controlled by two groups: “Faces” and “Edges”. Faces represent the solid infill of the plate elements. Transparency settings can be done by the “Transparency” field located under “Faces” subtitle of “Plate” title. Colour, Line width, Label properties are controlled in the same manner as the other elements described previously.

Model Display Controls Model Display controls are located on the “Elements” tab as follows:

Structural Members The “Display Structural Members” button in the toolbar hides/displays the beam, column, slab and wall and pile members in the model. When clicked on, the “Structural Members” title will automatically expand in the View Settings proprerty grid with all its subtitles, enabling a quick access for editing. The drop down options under this button can be used to: 

hide/display the structural member labels



hide/display slab shading



hide/display slab loads

Nodes Nodes exist at the connections of analytical members (shells, frames). Analysis results such as moments, displacements are calculated at each node. The “Display Nodes” button in the toolbar hides/displays the nodes in the model. When clicked on, the “Node” title will automatically expand in the View Settings proprerty grid with all its subtitles, enabling a quick access for editing. The drop down options under this button can be used to:



hide/display the node labels



hide/display nodal loads



hide/display supports



hide/display springs

Frame Element The “Display Frame Elements” button in the toolbar hides/displays the frame elements in the model. When clicked on, the “Frame Elements” title will automatically expand in the View Settings proprerty grid with all its subtitles, enabling a quick access for editing. The drop down options under this button can be used to: 

hide/display the frame element labels



hide/display local axes



hide/display the element direction



hide/display user-defined loads defined on beams in Graphic Editor (frame loads)

Note that other than the structural members defined in the Graphic Editor, there are other analytical members automatically created by the analysis engine. Beam, column, wall, rib and waffle slab members are modelled by frame elements while normal slabs are modelled by triangular plate elements.

Plates The “Display Plate Elements” button in the toolbar hides/displays the plate elements in the model. When clicked on, the “Plates” title will automatically expand in the View Settings property grid with all its subtitles, enabling a quick access for editing. The drop down options under this button can be used to: 

hide/display the plate labels



hide/display the plate thicknesses



hide/display the plate pressure



shrink the plates for clearer viewing



hide/display plate shading

Loading and Effects These panels (on the right side of graphical editor) are used to specify the result to be displayed.

Loading The active load case or combination can be set using the “Loading” panel. Results will be displayed for the selected load case or combination. The contour plots are generated for the selected loading if the "Display Contours" button is depressed. Also, the selected effect (displacement or moment) for the selected loading will be displayed in the status bar for the pointed node.

Effects (Displacements and Moments) The effect that is viewed both on the contour plot and on the status bar can be selected using the "Effects" panel. The following effects can be selected: · Displacement: Displacement of the nodes along the z direction. · Mx: Average nodal moment along global x direction · My: Average nodal moment along global y direction · Mxy: Average nodal torsional moment. · M1: Average nodal moment along Direction 1* · M2: Average nodal moment along Direction 2* · M12: Average nodal torsional moment · As(d)1-bot: Required steel area in the bottom face of the slab along Direction 1 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · As(d)1-top: Required steel area in the top face of the slab along Direction 1 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · As(d)2-bot: Required steel area in the bottom face of the slab along Direction 2 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · As(d)2-top: Required steel area in the top face of the slab along Direction 2 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · Soil Pressure: The soil pressure applied on the node. · Soil Pr. Threshold: The threshold plot of the soil pressure against the allowable soil stress value. As the mouse pointer is hovered above the nodes, the closest one will be snapped. Necessary information about that node will be displayed in the status bar (below the graphical editor). *In the Graphic Editor, you can define angle properties for slabs using the “Angle” field in “Slab Properties” menu. M1, M2 and M12 are then calculated with respect to these angles in Finite Element Post Processor. Especially for the buildings that may have angled plans, reinforcements are needed to be installed along a specified angle rather than global X and Y. In order to see the moment and steel contours for different angles, you must have specified angle values for related slabs in the Graphic Editor.

Displacements and Contours Displacements, automatic and user-defined contours are selected from the “Results” tab. These are then displayed for the selected loading.

Display Displacements Deformations of the floor system can be displayed/hidden on 3-D model by clicking the “Displacements” button in the toolbar; when active, the “Displacements” title in the “View Settings” property grid will be expanded enabling the adjustment of settings related to the displacement display. “+/- Scale” buttons control the exaggeration of the displacement display. Displacements can be animated by clicking the “Animation” button.

Contour Plots ProtaStructure provides useful tools for creating automatic and user-defined contours. When the “Standard Contours” button on the toolbar is depressed, the displacement, required steel area and/or moment contours for the plate elements will be plotted based on the “Effects” and “Loading” options selected. The “Contours” title in the “View Settings” grid will also be expanded automatically, enabling the adjustment of settings related to the contour display if required. The “Number of Contours” field in the “View Settings” grid (Left panel of the graphical editor) indicates the number of intervals that the calculated maximum and minimum values of the selected effect will be displayed in contour view. Larger values yield a smoother contour display.

General Properties of Automatic, User-Defined and Threshold Contours Contours can be drawn using line representations, or as color-filled regions. They can be displayed on the undisplaced, or the displaced floor. Display settings of “Shaded Contours” and “Line Contours” can be made under their own subtitles in the “View Settings” grid. 

Shaded contours can be displayed transparently by using the “Transparency” option. A value of 100 provides a virtually solid display, lowering the transparancy value increases the degree of transparency.



Line contours represent the boundary values of the contours. Width of the contours are controlled by the “Line width” field, whereas colour of the lines can be controlled by “Line Type”.



Values of the contour lines are displayed by contour labels. The “Contour Labels” subtitle contains fields to control “Visibility” and “Label Spacing”.

User- Defined Contours In addition to automatic contours, user-defined (custom) contours can be created. When the “User-Defined Contours” button on the toolbar is depressed, the displacement, required steel area and/or moment contours for the plate elements will be plotted based on the “Effect” and “Loading” options selected.

To configure user-defined contours click the “Edit Contours” button. The number of contours, contour intervals and labels can be controlled from the dialog that is displayed. Maximum and minimum values of the effect specified in the “Effects” list are calculated automatically. The range is divided into the number of intervals specified in “Number of Contours” field. These intervals are by default labelled as Contour1, Contour2, … etc. The contour intervals and their labels can subsequently be modified as required. The color of each contour interval can be modified within the “User Defined Contours” title in the “View Settings” grid.

Threshold Contours In order to check whether the calculated values of an “Effect” exceeds a threshold value, one can use “Threshold Contours”. When the “Threshold Contours” button on the toolbar is depressed, the displacement required steel area and/or moment contours for the plate elements will be plotted for upper and lower threshold values based on the “Effect” and “Loading” options selected. To configure threshold contours click the “Edit Contours” button. Maximum and minimum values of the effect specified in the “Effects” list are calculated automatically and written into “Contour_Min” and “Contour_Max” fields. Any value between maximum and minimum values can be written into “Lower Threshold” and “Upper Threshold” fields. The interval between lower and upper threshold will be painted with green whereas areas below lower threshold and above upper threshold are painted with red. In other words, threshold contours can be said to be a specialized subset of user-defined contours. The only difference is that it is limited only to two contour values.

Concrete Cover The effective depth of the concrete is required in order to display required steel area contours. To set this value, click the “Concrete Cover” button. Required Steel Areas for direction 1 and 2 will be calculated using the available moment from the finite element analysis. Hence, clear concrete cover, layer of the bar in the specified direction and the diameter of the bar is important in effective depth calculation. Enter the clear concrete cover distance (to bar face) in the “Concrete Cover (To Bar Face)” field. Select the layer of direction-1 bars (outer or inner) from the “Dir-1” layer (it depends on the effective load transfer direction of slab, usually bars on short edge are installed at outer layer). Bar diameters can be specified in the “Bar Diameter” field for “Dir-1” and “Dir-2”. The information provided here will only be calculated for the display of required steel area.

Edit Contours When User-Defined or Threshold Contours are active, contour values and labels of the legends can be adjusted using the “Edit Contours” button. If the selected effect is one of moment effects or displacement, contours specified by the fields under “User-Defined Contours” title, will identically be loaded into the “Contour Settings” menu as a list. Values between the maximum and minimum values can be modified and new labels can be assigned to the contours. Besides these, the user-defined labels can be displayed in the legend. In order to change the number of contours to be shown on the display, modify the “ Number of Contours” field and press “Update” button. If you click on “Yes” on the upcoming dialog, minimum and

maximum values will be divided into the specified number. In order to change one of the contour values and its label, select it in the list on the left. “Contour Label” and “Contour Value” fields will be activated on the right. Modify these fields and press “Update” button at the lower corner. Click “OK” to reflect the changes onto the display area. If the selected “Effect” is one of the Required Steel Areas, again the contour properties such as contour number and values will be loaded into the “Contour Settings” menu. This time, “Steel 1”, “Steel 2” and “Steel 3” fields will be available in addition to “Contour Value” and “Contour Label” fields. In order to set the value of one of the contours to a specific reinforcing steel area, select the contour from the list on the left. Check the “Steel Area-1” box and specify the “Diameter” and “Spacing”. Corresponding steel area will automatically be calculated and displayed in the same window. If there are more than one layer of steel bars in the section, then also check the “Steel Area-2” and “Steel Area-3” boxes. Steel areas will be superposed. Click “Update” button to change the value of the contour. Contour label will automatically be changed as bar diameter and spacing. If “Contour Value” option is selected in the “Legend” part of the “Custom Contour Settings” menu, legend labels will be the numerical values of the contour boundaries. If “Contour Label” option is selected, legend labels will be identical with the contour labels.

Col/Wall Node Interpretation The way contours are plotted takes account of the “Col/Wall Node Interpretation” setting. This can be set to include or ignore the col/wall nodes. An option also exists to interpolate between the two.

Export Contours (Under development) If the selected effect is one of the design steel areas [As(d)1-bot, As(d)2-bot, As(d)1-top, As(d)2-top], the contours on the drawing area can be exported to the Graphic Editor. Before exporting the custom contours for design steel areas, create your own custom contours by using “Edit Contours” and “Concrete Cover” buttons. Click on the “Export Contours” button in the toolbar. When you return to Graphic Editor by closing “FE Floor Analysis Module”, click on “Regen” button. Contour lines will be displayed on plan view. Layer of these contours can be freezed/thawed using “Layer Control” menu.

Legend As long as the contour view is active, a legend will be displayed at the lower left corner of the screen. Using the “Legend” title in the “View Settings”, display properties of the legend can be adjusted. “Number of Indexes” can be equal to the number of contours at most. Position and size of the legend can easily be controlled by “Position” and “Size” fields in the “View Settings”.

Design Strips In order to plot the analysis results and obtain the maximum moments to be used in design, the deformation and moment profiles along a given strip can be generated. This can be achieved easily by dragging two points defining the design strip after pressing the “Design Strip” button on the toolbar and selecting the "Strip Type". Design Strips can be inserted only in plan view.

Strip values are obtained by (discretising) the line defined by the strip points and the deformation profile is plotted in the “Slab Strip” form. The minimum number of strip points calculated along the profile is provided in the “No. of Points” field. The strip points of the profile are also displayed on the model plot. The displacement and moment profiles are created along the design strip line dragged in the drawing area for the load case or load combination selected in the "Loadings" dropdown list. Additionally, the maximum and minimum values obtained along the strip line are displayed in this panel. The graphical profile can be switched to display displacements or moments using the relevant options. The displayed moment diagram is obtained using the averaged nodal moment values about the axis perpendicular to the strip direction in plan view. The design moments are displayed below the diagram for supports and spans of each slab panel. The design moments are maximum moments creating tension in top and bottom edges, determined based on the "Strip Type" selected during the insertion of the design strip.

Strip Types Four types of Slab Design Strips can be defined: · Fixed Width Band: The width of the design strip is determined using the "Half Band" field defining the half width along both sides of the strip centreline. · Span Band: Considering the smallest of the edges of the slab that the design strip passes through, two parallel lines defining the strip region are drawn. The active strip width is set as the middle half slab width. This strip is used for flat slab systems. · Support Band: This type of design strips must be located along the support regions of the flat slab systems. · Span Strip: This strip type has behaviour similar to the Span Band. This strip is used for standard beam/slab systems. You can refer to Slab Strip Types in the Analysis and Design of Slabs section for more information on the behaviour of the design strips.

Printing Design Strips When an individual strip is displayed a graphical hardcopy can be printed by clicking the “Print” button. Multiple strips can be printed using the “Print Slab Strip” option in the “File” pulldown menu. The diagram type, loading and the design strips to be printed can be determined using the options in this dialog.

Transferring Slab Design Strip Results After closing the “Floor Analysis Post-Processor” module, the “Transfer Options” form will be loaded. By using the options in the “Column and Wall Results Transfer Options” dropdown list located in this form, you can control the transfer of the results obtained from column or wall end nodes.

Slab Strip Transfer Options If “Transfer Slab Strip FE Analysis Results” option is checked, the analysis results of all strips will be transferred back from the FE module for the design of the strips.

If “Consider Plate Torsion Effects (Wood and Armer) in Slab Design Moments” option is checked, the design moments will be so adjusted to include the torsion effects based on Wood and Armer methodology. The “Column and Wall Results Transfer Option” can be selected to be either “Ignore in Strip Results” or “Interpolate With First Neighbour Nodes” in order to reduce the relatively higher results in column nodes to consider the section dimensions of the columns. Note that, in a relatively coarse mesh, it may cause under-design of the strips if “Ignore in Strip Results” option is preferred. Since columns are modelled using a single node and walls are modelled using a series of nodes, undesired stress concentrations may occur on these locations, resulting unexpectedly high support moments. Only a single negative and positive maximum moment are returned from “Fixed Band” slab strips. The area covered by these strips is designed using a single top and bottom steel to resist these moments. When the column nodes are considered in the design, all the area covered by a Fixed Band Strip will be based on a very high moment. Following options may be used alternatively for taking into account the stress concentration effects in these strips:

Include in Strip Results If the Finite Element Analysis Post-processing Form is used with this option selected, then the results obtained in the column nodes and wall end nodes will be returned for being taken into account during design. This option is recommended for all slab strip types other than the "Fixed Band" strips.

Include in Strip Results Option

Ignore in Strip Results If the Finite Element Analysis Post-processing Menu is used with this option selected, then the results obtained in the column nodes and wall end nodes will be ignored and will not be taken into account during design. This option can be used for "Fixed Band" strips. In this case, additional support steel may be necessary and can be inserted manually after design based on the maximum column node moments.

? Ignore in Strip Results Option

Use Average with First adjacent Node If the Finite Element Analysis Post-processing Form is used with this option selected, then the results obtained in the column nodes and wall end nodes will be ignored and will not be taken into account during design. Alternatively, values obtained by averaging the column node (or wall end node) with the first neighbour nodes around the column (or wall end). This way, the moment reduction effect of the finite column and wall dimensions will be taken into account in a better approach. This option is recommended for the "Fixed Band" strips. In this case, additional support steel may be necessary and can be inserted manually after design based on the maximum column node moments.

Use Average with First adjacent Node Option Having determined the option to control the transfer of the results obtained from column and wall end nodes in the “Column and Wall Results Transfer Options” list in “Transfer Options” form, press “OK” button. Transferring the results back to the Graphic Editor environment enables the design of slabs and selection of slab steel bars based on the moments calculated using the Finite Element Analysis. Beam Analysis Results are also transferred during this process to be used for merging with the building analysis results. It should be noted that, when a modification on the model or loading is made, the analysis should be re-run.

Related Articles: Column/Wall Model Types, Stiffness factors, Cracking & Creep Floor Mesh and Analysis - Generate Model Post Analysis Processes and Reports Model Export

Model Export The “Model Export” menu option on the Finite Element Analysis Form can be used for exporting an FE analysis model of each storey into the following software packages: SAP2000 ®/Lucas®.

Related Articles:

Column/Wall Model Types, Stiffness factors, Cracking & Creep Floor Mesh and Analysis - Generate Model Post Analysis Processes and Reports The Floor Analysis Post-Processor

FE Analysis of Foundations (Contents) The foundation system is modelled in the Graphic Editor and can comprise of mats, piled rafts, pads, pile caps and strip footings. All of these foundation types can be analysed in the FE Raft Foundation Analysis module. Prior to FE Raft Foundation analysis, it’s necessary to complete the structural analysis to determine the loads to be used in the raft foundation analysis. FE Raft Foundation Analysis is only available at the foundation storey. It is accessed by selecting "FE Raft Foundation Analysis" from the "Run" pulldown. The form is composed of the following pages: 1. Floor Mesh and Analysis: The Finite Element model is generated and analysed from here using the selected parameters by clicking the “Floor Mesh and Analysis” button. 2. Post Analysis Processes and Reports: This page is used for visualising and reporting the displacements and forces obtained from the analysis. 3. Model Export (Optional): This page can be used for transferring the FE model to other analysis packages.

Floor Mesh and Analysis - FE Raft Foundation The finite element model is prepared using the model options located on the “Floor Mesh and Analysis” page as described in the topics below. These should be set before clicking the “Raft Foundation Mesh and Analysis” button to generate the mesh.

Soil Subgrade Coefficient This coefficient will be used for determining the rigidity of the springs used for modelling of the soil behaviour. Basically it is a spring stiffness (kN/m) per m2 of ground, hence the units kN/m3.

Ignore the Bearing Capacity of Soil Note: This field is only displayed if piles have been defined in the foundation. Where piles are introduced to carry the load the soil bearing capacity can be totally excluded either by setting the coefficient of subgrade reaction to zero, or more conveniently by checking the option “Ignore the Bearing capacity of the soil.” Note that if you have mixed piled mats and pads then you have to introduce a ground bearing pressure in order to avoid infinite displacements.

Consider Beam Torsional Stiffnesses Beam Torsional Stiffnesses are calculated and used in the finite element model if this option is checked. Otherwise, the torsional stiffness of all beams in the foundation will be ignored.

Apply Live load Reduction (All Combinations) If live load reductions have been defined and this option is checked, the reductions will be applied in all combinations. If no live load reductions have been defined, checking this option has no effect. Note: Although when designing to Eurocodes, live load reductions need only be applied to combinations in which Q is a leading action, it is not currently possible to make this distinction in ProtaStructure’s FE foundation model. Reductions can only be applied to all combinations, or none at all.

Foundation Loads Table By pressing the “Foundation Loads Table” button the “Upper Storey Column Loads Table” will be loaded. Here, the forces and moments acting on the foundation coming from columns and walls above will be listed. In this table, if you select any load case instead of “All Loads Cases”, only the forces and moments related to that load case will be listed. Note that, this table is in an editable form. You can make modifications in this table, prior to performing the analysis of foundation.

Edit Materials You can re-select the material properties to be used in the design of the structural members by pressing “Edit Materials” button.

Use ‘Sparse Solver’ for FE Analysis The purpose of the sparse solver is to reduce the time required for analysis. For certain model types a dramatic reduction in the analysis time can be achieved, for other models it may be less significant.

Related Article: The FE Raft Foundation Post-Processor Post Analysis Processes and Reports Generate Mesh Model Export (Raft Foundation)

Raft Foundation Mesh and Analysis - Generate Mesh The raft foundation finite element model preparation module can be loaded by pressing the “Raft Foundation Mesh and Analysis” button.

Generate Model

A triangular mesh consisting of DKT plate elements and frame members (if the walls are modelled as frame members sliced to be compatible with the plate m The size of triangular plate members generated is determined by a combination of the “Plate Element Size” and the “Mesh Uniformity Factor”. These values should be tailored carefully according to the required mesh density, as the mesh density significantly affects the model size and accuracy of computations. The generated model will be saved automatically after meshing.

Plate Element Size This is used to specify the maximum plate size that can be created within the mesh. Minimum plate sizes will be dictated by physical boundaries in the model (e.g. column boundaries) and by seed nodes. Specifying the “Plate Element Size” too small results in an overly fine mesh requiring longer to perform the calculations. Conversely if the “Plate Element Size” is too large, the mesh will be too crude to produce accurate results.

Mesh Uniformity Factor The "Uniformity Factor" can be modified to adjust the uniformity of the mesh for various floor plans. Acceptable values range from "0" to "100". If "100" is entered the plate element size will generally be similar everywhere in the model. At the other extreme, if "0" is entered, the size of the plate elements will be smaller in relatively smaller slab panels, cantilever slabs and around the slab openings.

Analysis Press the “Exit” button in the “File” pulldown menu in order to analyse the generated FE model. Analysis will be performed automatically. The phases of the analysis process can be monitored from the displayed console window. This window will close as soon as the analysis completes.

Related Article: The FE Raft Foundation Post-Processor Post Analysis Processes and Reports Floor Mesh and Analysis Model Export (Raft Foundation)

Post Analysis Processes and Reports - Raft Foundation Once the analysis has completed the “Post-Analysis Processes and Reports” page is automatically displayed.

Moment factor parameters can be adjusted if required, before clicking the “Analysis Post -processing” button to review the results.

Positive and Negative Moment Factors These factors should be defined before clicking the “Analysis Post-processing” button to review the results. Output results that are viewed in the Post-processor and Analysis Results Reports are factored using the values entered in these fields.

Analysis Post-processing The Analysis Post-processor is equipped with several options to provide a visual display of the analysis results. Displacements, moments and various other graphical outputs can be investigated. It is accessed by clicking the “Analysis Post-processing” button. See: The FE Floor Analysis Post-Processor for further details.

Output Report Preparation After the completion of the analysis phase without any errors, you can generate output reports of the Finite Element Analysis results. The “Output Report Preparation” button will load the “Analysis Results” form that is used for the generation of formatted reports. The output reports can be prepared for selected nodes, slabs and/or frame members. In all tab pages, you select items to be included using the visible lists and then press the “Create Report” button to generate the report. The generated report will be loaded to the standard editor for quick viewing or formatting and printing. The form has four tab pages:

Nodes Tab Node results can be filtered by nodes or slabs. When selections are made in the "Slabs" list, the nodes within or along the edges of the selected slabs will be included in the report. Similarly, information on selected nodes can be obtained by making a selection from the "Nodes" list. For every node, the following fields may be included in the generated reports: · Restraints: Restraint conditions of the degrees of freedoms of the nodes. For every degree of freedom, "0" indicates unrestrained, and "1" indicates restrained conditions. · Nodal Coordinates: X, Y and Z coordinates of the nodes. · Nodal Displacements and Rotations: Nodal displacements along global x, y and z axes and nodal rotations about global x, y and z axes calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Nodal Reaction Forces: Reaction forces along global x, y and z axes calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Nodal Reaction Moments: Moment reactions about global x, y and z axes calculated during structural analysis of the model. · Slab Deformations: The maximum and minimum displacements obtained on each slab. Soil Reactions: The soil reaction force along z axes calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Soil Reactions (summary): The maximum and minimum soil reactions obtained on each slab.

Using the sort options in the lower part of the form, output results can be reported and sorted by nodes or by selected loadings.

Plates Tab Using this tab page, a report for the analysis results calculated for the plate members can be created. Plate results can be filtered by plate members or slabs. When selections are made in the "Slabs" list, the plate members within the selected slabs will be included in the report. Similarly, information on selected plate members can be obtained by making selection in the "Plates" list. For every plate, the following fields may be included in the generated reports: · Member Forces: Moments Mx, My and Mxy, for each node of the plate elements calculated during the structural analysis of the model. · Nodal Forces: The force Fz and moments Mx, My, the remaining portion of the structure applied at each node of the plate element. Using the sort options in the lower part of the form, output results can be reported as sorted by plate members or by selected loadings. “Print Element in a Single Line” option will output the results of all nodes of a plate or frame member in a single line. This will produce a compressed report. Selecting the “Skip Line between Elements” option will leave a blank line between all member results. This may be used for a clearer report.

Frames Tab Using this tab page, a report for the analysis results calculated for frame members can be created. Frame element results can be filtered by beams and columns or frame members. When selections are made in the "Beams" list, the frame members for the selected beams or columns will be included in the report. Similarly, information on selected frame members can be obtained by making a selection from the "Elements" list. For every frame member, the following fields may be included in the generated reports: · Member End Forces: Forces Fx, Fy and Fz calculated along local member coordinates, at each end of the frame member calculated during the structural analysis of the model. Here, Fx is the axial force, Fy and Fz are the shear forces along respective local axes. · Member End Moments: Moments Mx, My and Mz, calculated about local member coordinates, at each end of the frame member calculated during the structural analysis of the model. Here, Mx is the torsional moment, My and Mz are the bending moments about respective local axes. Using the sort options in the lower part of the form, output results can be reported as sorted by frame members or by loadings. “Print Element in a Single Line” option will output the results of all nodes of a plate or frame member in a single line. This will produce a compressed report. Selecting the “Skip Line between Elements” option will leave a blank line between all member results. This may be used for a clearer report.

Number Format The format of the numbers that will appear in the report can be modified for displacement, rotation, force and moment values separately using the fields in this tab page.

The up/down buttons to the right of the “Total Length” and “Decimal” fields can be used for modifying the total number of digits and the number of digits after the decimal symbol respectively. The effects of the modifications are displayed dynamically on the form.

Create Report Button After setting the preferences the required output can be generated using the “Create Report” button. The resulting file will be displayed in the editor.

Pile Results Report The “Pile Results Report” button will generate a formatted report comparing the maximum pile compression and tension results against their capacities. The report can optionally include results for all load cases and for all load combinations.

Transfer Foundation Beam Results When this option is selected Foundation Beam axes will be created and the FE analysis results will be used for their design.

Related Article: The FE Raft Foundation Post-Processor Generate Mesh Floor Mesh and Analysis Model Export (Raft Foundation)

The FE Raft Foundation Post-Processor Click the “Analysis Post-processing” button to access the FE Raft Foundation Post-processor. The post-processor is equipped with several options to provide a visual display of the analysis results: displacements, moments and various other graphical outputs can be investigated.

View Controls View controls are located on the “General” tab as follows:

Orthogonal Plan Mode

In order to obtain a true plan view of the 3-D model, use “Orthogonal Plan M performed with the mouse. Only pan and zoom is allowed in this mode of display

View Angle

Use the mouse right and left buttons and scroll wheel to perform zoom in/out, ro can be used to control the movement of the 3-D display. This form contains nine v

Orthogonal/Perspective View

Perspective (Frustum) view of the 3-D model can be obtained by “Orthogonal/Persp

Print The “Print Preview Menu” is loaded when the “Print” button on the toolbar or the graphical model displayed in the drawing area.

Save Image As Bitmap File

3-D image on drawing area will be saved as bitmap, if “Save Image As Bitmap File” b

View Settings Elements in the FE Model are categorised under different titles. Display settings related with these elements can be adjusted using “View Settings” property grid located on the left of the “Floor Analysis Post-Processor screen. Titles located in the “View Settings” Property Grid are: 

General Settings



Geometry (Structural Members)



Nodes



Frame Element



Plate



Displacements



Contours



User Defined Contours



Threshold Contours



Slab Strip



Legend

Titles in the grid are expandable. Each title includes general property fields that control colour, text style, label display, visibility etc

View Settings - General Settings General properties of the display are controlled from the View Settings, “General Settings” title. In order to change the background colour of the display arena, click once on the cell containing the “Background Colour” text. The cell on the right hand side will display a small box previewing the color and a “ …” button. Press this button to load the operating system color picker. In order to perform an anti-aliasing, “Line Anti-Aliasing” text shall be checked. This will smooth the line edges.. By cheking the “Face Anti-Aliasing”, polygons will be drawn smoothly on the screen. Texts can be displayed in three different styles: 

“Bitmap” style uses the true type system fonts and size of the text does not change when screen is zoomed in or out.



“Perspective” style again uses true type system fonts, but text size changes with zoom operations. In addition, text objects far from view plane are displayed smaller.



In the “Vector” style, text objects are displayed using vector fonts like other drawing objects (ISO, ROMAN, TXT). Text size changes with respect to distance from viewplane and magnification. Text properties related with all elements in the drawing area can be controlled from the “ Label” subtitle of each element category title. Label styles of each separate category can be specified independently from each other. General properties related with three distinct text styles (bitmap, perspective or vector) can globally be adjusted from “Bitmap Font Properties”, “Perspective Font Properties” and “Vector Font Properties” fields located under “General Settings” title. The “Raster Bitmap Properties” subtitle includes controls concerning dimension and line settings being sent to printer.

View Settings - Structural Members “Slab”, “Wall”, “Column” and “Beam” members defined in Graphic Editor are all categorised under the “Structural Members” title. Display, colour and label settings can easily be done using the fields that expand when “>” sign near the title is pressed.

View Settings - Nodes Nodes are the connections of analytical members (shells, frames). Analysis results such as moments, displacements are calculated at each node. Display properties related with nodes can be specified by using the subtitles located under “Node” title in the property grid. Nodes can be displayed in three styles. “Display Mode” cell controls this property. “Sphere” style displays the nodes as small spheres whose diameters are controlled by “Sphere Size” field. Colours of these spheres can be specified from “Element Color” cell. “Cross” style displays the nodes as 3-D asterisks. Nodes are viewed as one pixel sized points when “Point” option is selected. If you have defined partial slab loads, these can be displayed by “Nodal Load” data field. Should there are supports assigned to the nodes, these can be displayed by “Support” title.

View Settings - Frame Element

Other than the structural members defined in the Graphic Editor, there are analytical members automatically created by analysis engine. Beam, column, wall, rib and waffle slab members are modelled by frame elements while normal slabs are modelled by triangle plate elements. “Frame Element” title includes the controls related with the display of frame elements in the floor system. “Shrink” option provides an isolated display of frame elements by dispatching them from their end nodes. Direction of the frame element can be seen using fields in “Element Direction” title. Local axes of frame elements can also be seen by “Local Axes” field. Rigid beams in wall members or automatic rigid links are grouped under “Rigid Elements” title. Appearance settings can be made using the fields under this title. If there are user-defined loads that have been defined on beams in Graphic Editor, these also can be seen and adjusted using the fields located under “Frame Loads” title.

View Settings - Plates Discrete Kirchhoff Triangles used in the finite element slab analysis are called plates in short. Appearance settings of plate elements can be made using the fields located under “Plate” title. Display of the plate elements are controlled by two groups: “Faces” and “Edges”. Faces represent the solid infill of the plate elements. Transparency settings can be done by the “Transparency” field located under “Faces” subtitle of “Plate” title. Colour, Line width, Label properties are controlled in the same manner as the other elements described previously.

Model Display Controls Model Display controls are located on the “Elements” tab as follows:

Structural Members

The “Display Structural Members” button in the toolbar hides/displays the beam, co title will automatically expand in the View Settings proprerty grid with all its subtit The drop down options under this button can be used to: 

hide/display the structural member labels



hide/display slab shading



hide/display slab loads

Nodes

Nodes exist at the connections of analytical members (shells, frames). Analysis res

The “Display Nodes” button in the toolbar hides/displays the nodes in the model. with all its subtitles, enabling a quick access for editing. The drop down options under this button can be used to: 

hide/display the node labels



hide/display nodal loads



hide/display supports



hide/display springs

Frame Element

The “Display Frame Elements” button in the toolbar hides/displays the frame elem View Settings proprerty grid with all its subtitles, enabling a quick access for editin The drop down options under this button can be used to: 

hide/display the frame element labels



hide/display local axes



hide/display the element direction



hide/display user-defined loads defined on beams in Graphic Editor (frame

Note that other than the structural members defined in the Graphic Editor, ther wall, rib and waffle slab members are modelled by frame elements while normal s

Plates

The “Display Plate Elements” button in the toolbar hides/displays the plate element property grid with all its subtitles, enabling a quick access for editing. The drop down options under this button can be used to: 

hide/display the plate labels



hide/display the plate thicknesses



hide/display the plate pressure



shrink the plates for clearer viewing



hide/display plate shading

Loading and Effects These panels (on the right side of graphical editor) are used to specify the result to be displayed.

Loading The active load case or combination can be set using the “Loading” panel. Results will be displayed for the selected load case or combination.

The contour plots are generated for the selected loading if the "Display Contours" button is depressed. Also, the selected effect (displacement or moment) for the selected loading will be displayed in the status bar for the pointed node.

Effects (Displacements and Moments) The effect that is viewed both on the contour plot and on the status bar can be selected using the "Effects" panel. The following effects can be selected: · Displacement: Displacement of the nodes along the z direction. · Mx: Average nodal moment along global x direction · My: Average nodal moment along global y direction · Mxy: Average nodal torsional moment. · M1: Average nodal moment along Direction 1* · M2: Average nodal moment along Direction 2* · M12: Average nodal torsional moment · As(d)1-bot: Required steel area in the bottom face of the slab along Direction 1 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · As(d)1-top: Required steel area in the top face of the slab along Direction 1 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · As(d)2-bot: Required steel area in the bottom face of the slab along Direction 2 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · As(d)2-top: Required steel area in the top face of the slab along Direction 2 (Wood-Armer Effects included) · Soil Pressure: The soil pressure applied on the node. · Soil Pr. Threshold: The threshold plot of the soil pressure against the allowable soil stress value. As the mouse pointer is hovered above the nodes, the closest one will be snapped. Necessary information about that node will be displayed in the status bar (below the graphical editor). *In the Graphic Editor, you can define angle properties for slabs using the “Angle” field in “Slab Properties” menu. M1, M2 and M12 are then calculated with respect to these angles in Finite Element Post Processor. Especially for the buildings that may have angled plans, reinforcements are needed to be installed along a specified angle rather than global X and Y. In order to see the moment and steel contours for different angles, you must have specified angle values for related slabs in the Graphic Editor.

Displacements and Contours Displacements, automatic and user-defined contours are selected from the “Results” tab. These are then displayed for the selected loading.

Display Displacements

Deformations of the floor system can be displayed/hidden on 3-D model by click Settings” property grid will be expanded enabling the adjustment of settings relate

“+/- Scale” buttons control the exaggeration of the displacement display. Displacements can be animated by clicking the “Animation” button.

Contour Plots ProtaStructure provides useful tools for creating automatic and user-defined contours.

When the “Standard Contours” button on the toolbar is depressed, the displaceme on the “Effects” and “Loading” options selected.

The “Contours” title in the “View Settings” grid will also be expanded automatically, e The “Number of Contours” field in the “View Settings” grid (Left panel of the graphical editor) indicates the number of intervals that the calculated maximum and minimum values of the selected effect will be displayed in contour view. Larger values yield a smoother contour display.

General Properties of Automatic, User-Defined and Threshold Contours Contours can be drawn using line representations, or as color-filled regions. They can be displayed on the undisplaced, or the displaced floor. Display settings of “Shaded Contours” and “Line Contours” can be made under their own subtitles in the “View Settings” grid. 

Shaded contours can be displayed transparently by using the “Transparency” option. A value of 100 provides a virtually solid display, lowering the transparancy value increases the degree of transparency.



Line contours represent the boundary values of the contours. Width of the contours are controlled by the “Line width” field, whereas colour of the lines can be controlled by “Line Type”.



Values of the contour lines are displayed by contour labels. The “Contour Labels” subtitle contains fields to control “Visibility” and “Label Spacing”.

User- Defined Contours In addition to automatic contours, user-defined (custom) contours can be created.

When the “User-Defined Contours” button on the toolbar is depressed, the displa based on the “Effect” and “Loading” options selected. To configure user-defined contours click the “Edit Contours” button. The number of contours, contour intervals and labels can be controlled from the dialog that is displayed. Maximum and minimum values of the effect specified in the “Effects” list are calculated automatically. The range is divided into the number of intervals specified in “Number of Contours” field. These intervals are by default labelled as Contour1, Contour2, … etc. The contour intervals and their labels can subsequently be modified as required. The color of each contour interval can be modified within the “User Defined Contours” title in the “View Settings” grid.

Threshold Contours

In order to check whether the calculated values of an “Effect” exceeds a threshold value, one can use “Threshold Contours”.

When the “Threshold Contours” button on the toolbar is depressed, the displacem upper and lower threshold values based on the “Effect” and “Loading” options sele To configure threshold contours click the “Edit Contours” button. Maximum and minimum values of the effect specified in the “Effects” list are calculated automatically and written into “Contour_Min” and “Contour_Max” fields. Any value between maximum and minimum values can be written into “Lower Threshold” and “Upper Threshold” fields. The interval between lower and upper threshold will be painted with green whereas areas below lower threshold and above upper threshold are painted with red. In other words, threshold contours can be said to be a specialized subset of user-defined contours. The only difference is that it is limited only to two contour values.

Concrete Cover

The effective depth of the concrete is required in order to display required stee Required Steel Areas for direction 1 and 2 will be calculated using the available moment from the finite element analysis. Hence, clear concrete cover, layer of the bar in the specified direction and the diameter of the bar is important in effective depth calculation. Enter the clear concrete cover distance (to bar face) in the “Concrete Cover (To Bar Face)” field. Select the layer of direction-1 bars (outer or inner) from the “Dir-1” layer (it depends on the effective load transfer direction of slab, usually bars on short edge are installed at outer layer). Bar diameters can be specified in the “Bar Diameter” field for “Dir-1” and “Dir-2”. The information provided here will only be calculated for the display of required steel area.

Edit Contours

When User-Defined or Threshold Contours are active, contour values and labe If the selected effect is one of moment effects or displacement, contours specified by the fields under “User-Defined Contours” title, will identically be loaded into the “Contour Settings” menu as a list. Values between the maximum and minimum values can be modified and new labels can be assigned to the contours. Besides these, the user-defined labels can be displayed in the legend. In order to change the number of contours to be shown on the display, modify the “ Number of Contours” field and press “Update” button. If you click on “Yes” on the upcoming dialog, minimum and maximum values will be divided into the specified number. In order to change one of the contour values and its label, select it in the list on the left. “Contour Label” and “Contour Value” fields will be activated on the right. Modify these fields and press “Update” button at the lower corner. Click “OK” to reflect the changes onto the display area. If the selected “Effect” is one of the Required Steel Areas, again the contour properties such as contour number and values will be loaded into the “Contour Settings” menu. This time, “Steel 1”, “Steel 2” and “Steel 3” fields will be available in addition to “Contour Value” and “Contour Label” fields. In order to set the value of one of the contours to a specific reinforcing steel area, select the contour from the list on the left. Check the “Steel Area-1” box and specify the “Diameter” and “Spacing”. Corresponding steel area will automatically be calculated and displayed in the same window. If there are more than one layer of steel bars in the section, then also check the “Steel Area-2” and “Steel Area-3” boxes. Steel areas will be superposed. Click “Update” button to change the value of the contour. Contour label will automatically be changed as bar diameter and spacing.

If “Contour Value” option is selected in the “Legend” part of the “Custom Contour Settings” menu, legend labels will be the numerical values of the contour boundaries. If “Contour Label” option is selected, legend labels will be identical with the contour labels.

Col/Wall Node Interpretation The way contours are plotted takes account of the “Col/Wall Node Interpretation” setting. This can be set to include or ignore the col/wall nodes. An option also exists to interpolate between the two.

Export Contours (Under development)

If the selected effect is one of the design steel areas [As(d)1the Graphic Editor. Before exporting the custom contours for design steel areas, create your own custom contours by using “Edit Contours” and “Concrete Cover” buttons. Click on the “Export Contours” button in the toolbar. When you return to Graphic Editor by closing “FE Floor Analysis Module”, click on “Regen” button. Contour lines will be displayed on plan view. Layer of these contours can be freezed/thawed using “Layer Control” menu.

Legend As long as the contour view is active, a legend will be displayed at the lower left corner of the screen. Using the “Legend” title in the “View Settings”, display properties of the legend can be adjusted. “Number of Indexes” can be equal to the number of contours at most. Position and size of the legend can easily be controlled by “Position” and “Size” fields in the “View Settings”.

Design Strips

In order to plot the analysis results and obtain the maximum moments to be used

This can be achieved easily by dragging two points defining the design strip after p Design Strips can be inserted only in plan view. Strip values are obtained by (discretising) the line defined by the strip points and the deformation profile is plotted in the “Slab Strip” form. The minimum number of strip points calculated along the profile is provided in the “No. of Points” field. The strip points of the profile are also displayed on the model plot. The displacement and moment profiles are created along the design strip line dragged in the drawing area for the load case or load combination selected in the "Loadings" dropdown list. Additionally, the maximum and minimum values obtained along the strip line are displayed in this panel. The graphical profile can be switched to display displacements or moments using the relevant options. The displayed moment diagram is obtained using the averaged nodal moment values about the axis perpendicular to the strip direction in plan view. The design moments are displayed below the diagram for supports and spans of each slab panel. The design moments are maximum moments creating tension in top and bottom edges, determined based on the "Strip Type" selected during the insertion of the design strip.

Strip Types Four types of Slab Design Strips can be defined: · Fixed Width Band: The width of the design strip is determined using the "Half Band" field defining the half width along both sides of the strip centreline. · Span Band: Considering the smallest of the edges of the slab that the design strip passes through, two parallel lines defining the strip region are drawn. The active strip width is set as the middle half slab width. This strip is used for flat slab systems. · Support Band: This type of design strips must be located along the support regions of the flat slab systems. · Span Strip: This strip type has behaviour similar to the Span Band. This strip is used for standard beam/slab systems. You can refer to Slab Strip Types in the Analysis and Design of Slabs section for more information on the behaviour of the design strips.

Printing Design Strips When an individual strip is displayed a graphical hardcopy can be printed by clicking the “Print” button. Multiple strips can be printed using the “Print Slab Strip” option in the “File” pulldown menu. The diagram type, loading and the design strips to be printed can be determined using the options in this dialog.

Transferring FE Raft Foundation Design Strip Results After closing the “Floor Analysis Post-Processor” module, the “Transfer Options” form will be loaded. By using the options in the “Column and Wall Results Transfer Options” dropdown list located in this form, you can control the transfer of the results obtained from column or wall end nodes.

Transfer Options Since columns are modelled using a single node and walls are modelled using a series of nodes, undesired stress concentrations may occur on these locations, resulting unexpectedly high support moments. Only a single negative and positive maximum moment are returned from “Fixed Band” slab strips. The area covered by these strips is designed using a single top and bottom steel to resist these moments. When the column nodes are considered in the design, all the area covered by a Fixed Band Strip will be based on a very high moment. Following options may be used alternatively for taking into account the stress concentration effects in these strips:

Include in Strip Results If the Finite Element Analysis Post-processing Form is used with this option selected, then the results obtained in the column nodes and wall end nodes will be returned for being taken into account during design. This option is recommended for all slab strip types other than the "Fixed Band" strips.

Include in Strip Results Option

Ignore in Strip Results If the Finite Element Analysis Post-processing Menu is used with this option selected, then the results obtained in the column nodes and wall end nodes will be ignored and will not be taken into account during design. This option can be used for "Fixed Band" strips. In this case, additional support steel may be necessary and can be inserted manually after design based on the maximum column node moments.

? Ignore in Strip Results Option

Use Average with First adjacent Node If the Finite Element Analysis Post-processing Form is used with this option selected, then the results obtained in the column nodes and wall end nodes will be ignored and will not be taken into account during design. Alternatively, values obtained by averaging the column node (or wall end node) with the first neighbour nodes around the column (or wall end). This way, the moment reduction effect of the finite column and wall dimensions will be taken into account in a better approach. This option is recommended for the "Fixed Band" strips. In this case, additional support steel may be necessary and can be inserted manually after design based on the maximum column node moments.

Use Average with First adjacent Node Option Having determined the option to control the transfer of the results obtained from column and wall end nodes in the “Column and Wall Results Transfer Options” list in “Transfer Options” form, press “OK” button. Transferring the results back to the Graphic Editor environment enables the design of slabs and selection of slab steel bars based on the moments calculated using the Finite Element Analysis. Beam Analysis Results are also transferred during this process to be used for merging with the building analysis results. It should be noted that, when a modification on the model or loading is made, the analysis should be re-run.

Related Article: Post Analysis Processes and Reports Generate Mesh Floor Mesh and Analysis Model Export (Raft Foundation)

Model Export (Raft Foundation) The “Model Export” menu option on the Finite Element Analysis Form can be used for exporting an FE analysis model of each storey into the following software packages:SAP2000 ®/Lucas®.

Related Article: The FE Raft Foundation Post-Processor Post Analysis Processes and Reports Generate Mesh Floor Mesh and Analysis

Column and Wall Design (Contents) The Column Reinforcement Design form can be accessed by clicking the “Column Section Design” option under the “Run” pulldown menu in the Graphic Editor. ProtaStructure can design rectangular, circular and polyline columns under uniaxial or biaxial bending according to “Ultimate Strength Design”.

General Settings to be used in the column and wall designs are assigned using the Column Design Settings option under the “Settings” pulldown menu or in the “Column Reinforcement Design” form. Concrete and steel grades to be used in the column and wall designs are assigned using the Materials button on the “Pre-Analysis” page of the “Building Analysis” dialog. Analysis results for the columns and walls are automatically transferred to the “Column Reinforcement Design” module by the program. Columns and walls can be designed either according to these original analysis results or for member forces defined by the user.

Column Reinforcement Design Modes Column and Wall Design can be performed in two modes: Interactive Mode The design can be performed for individual member one storey at a time using the “Column Design Editor”. Consideration should certainly be given to designing critical members by this method to obtain the best results. More information about this method can be found under the title “Interactive Column Design”. Batch Mode Using this mode, reinforcement of all beams can be calculated and selected by the program automatically. More information about this method can be found under the title “Column Design (Batch Mode)”.

Overview of the Column Summary Table After clicking the “Column Section Design” option in the “Run” pulldown you will see a summary table in which all the columns and walls in the current project are listed for all storeys.

The summary table can be manipulated as follows:

To filter members Initially the column summary table displays all columns and walls at all storeys. You can filter the table by clicking the “Filter” button located on the “Edit” tab. The following filtering options are provided: “Display All Members”, “Filter by Storey”, “Filter by Member Label”, “List Failed Members Only”, “List Columns Only” and “List Walls Only”. If the “Filter by Storey” option is

selected, a list of storeys will appear on the right of the option. You can choose any storey from this list so that the members of that storey are listed in the table. Similarly if the “Filter by Member Label” option is selected a field for member label input will appear on the right of the option. When the desired member label is typed, the table will consist of a list of members with that label on all storeys. Furthermore, if you select the “List Failed Members Only” option, only members for which reinforcement couldn’t be determined will be listed in the summary table. To return to a listing of all members choose the “Display All Members” option in the “Filter Axes” dialog.

To sort the table into a different order Initially the column summary table displays members sorted by member label, then Storey. You can sort in different ways by dragging “Group”, “Column” or “Storey” column headers to the area indicted. The first header becomes the primary and the next becomes the secondary sorting criteria. To remove a sorting criteria drag it back into the table header.

Copy and Paste Bars “Copy Bars” and “Paste Bars”, located on the “Edit” tab, allows the designed bars from one member to be pasted to other members with similar geometry. A check design is then performed to establish if the pasted bars are sufficient. Because no relation is established between the source and destination members, re-selecting bars would result in the members adopting different bars to each other once more.

Copy Bars Using this button, steel bars from the selected member can be copied to the clipboard and can be pasted to members with similar geometry. Select the member to copy and press the “Copy Bars” button. The member label will be marked by an arrow symbol and all members with similar geometry will be highlighted with an “=” mark.

Paste Bars If a member is marked by an arrow symbol, then you can use this button to paste steel bars from it to other selected members. Note that you can only paste steel bars to members marked with “=”. A check design is carried out immediately after paste operation to check if the provided steel is sufficient and the tick/cross mark will be updated.

Paste Steel Bars to All If a member is marked by an arrow symbol, then you can use this button to paste steel bars from it to all the members marked with “=”. A check design is carried out immediately after paste operation to check if the provided steel is sufficient and the tick/cross mark will be updated.

Column Design (Batch Mode) All columns and walls can be designed automatically in batch mode. If you select the “Column Design (Batch Mode)” option the “Column Reinforcement Design” dialog will be loaded. The parameters in this dialog control the column design in batch mode. Note that consideration should be given to designing critical columns and walls using the “Interactive Design” option instead.

The Column Reinforcement Design dialog Options and fields on the “Column Reinforcement Design” dialog are:

Storey Filter The “Storey Filter” can be used to list all columns or only the columns of any one storey on the screen. When you click the “Storey Filter” option, a list showing all the storey names and the “All Storeys” option will be opened. You can either select a storey name or the “All Storeys” option to design the columns.

Reinforcement Selection Options Batch mode column section design includes the following options: Check Steel (Select New Steel When Previous Bars are Sufficient): This option will not modify the previously selected bars, if the area ratio is sufficient for the new conditions. New reinforcement will be selected only if the bars are not adequate. Check Steel (Don’t Select New Steel When Previous Bars are Sufficient): This option will not modify the selected bars, no matter the bars are adequate or not. If the bars are inadequate, columns will be marked with a “X” sign. Reselect All Steel Bars: This option will delete all the available bars in the section and perform the column section design from scratch.

Review of Batch Design A report is generated during the batch mode design to inform the user of any problems during the design process. You can review this report by pressing the “Messages” button in the “Column Reinforcement Design” dialog. After closing the “Column Reinforcement Design” dialog the summary table is redisplayed. The “Design” and “Print” columns in the table will be marked for those members that have been designed successfully and the steel bars and links provided will be listed. The Utilization Ratio will also have been calculated. If this ratio is greater than 1.0 for a column or wall then it can be said that the selected reinforcement is not sufficient.

Steel Standardisation Using this dialog, you can:

· Standardise the steel in the columns between storeys. You can check the steel bars provided in the columns of a particular column line storey by storey and make manual modifications to standardise them. · Manually input/modify steel bars. Steel bars of columns with polyline cross sections cannot be modified using the options provided in this dialog.

Column Line List You can select a column line using this dropdown list. All column lines will be referenced in this list. Walls will be referenced using their I-insertion points. When a column line is selected in this list, all columns in this column line will be loaded to the table below. If you make any modification to the data presented in this table, you need to press “ Save” button before selecting another column line, otherwise the modifications will be lost.

Modifying the Column Steel Bars All columns (or walls) in the selected column line will be displayed in the column table. The steel bar quantity and size cells are editable in this table. Columns with arbitrary cross-sections cannot be edited using this dialog.

Saving Column Lines You can use “Save” button to save the modifications in the selected column line before selecting another column line or closing the dialog.

Reports Various reports are available to be printed from the “Report” tab of the “Column Reinforcement Design” form.

Summary Table To print the summary table as it is displayed on screen, click the “Column Table” button.

Design Report After design has been accomplished the “Design Report” button can be used to print the results.

Column Analyses You can use this option to check the capacities of the columns and walls calculated using the supplied steel. This table is generally used for checking the capacity of an existing building.

Column Forces Listing

In the column design stage, the most critical member force group (axial load and moments) among all the different member forces resulting from different load combinations in the building analysis, will be selected and used. To view the most critical member force group used for design, the “Column Forces Listing” option in the Column Toolbar can be used. By clicking this option you can load the “Column Forces Listing” form. Member forces can be listed either for all columns or only for the columns at foundation level. Similarly, all column member forces or only the most critical ones can be selected for listing.

Marking the Axes for Printing The “Design” and “Print” columns in the table will be marked for the members that have been designed informing you that the members are designed and ready for printing. The mark in the “Print” column indicates that the member will be included in the output report. When the “Design Report” option is selected, only the members that are marked for printing will be transferred to the output report. After selecting a member in the table, you can either mark or unmark it for printing by clicking in the “Print” box. The print marks for all members in the table can be set using the “Mark All Columns” button. Similarly, all print marks can be removed by using “Remove Marks” button.

Related Articles: Interactive Column Design Column and Wall Design Column Design Settings - Design

Interactive Column Design In the “Column Design Editor” column sections and reinforcement arrangement can be examined and changed interactively. Since columns and walls are the primary members of a structure, especially the critically loaded ones should be designed interactively where the user can view the results of each loading applied on the column clearly and update the arrangement of the reinforcement.

Using the Column Design Editor The Column Design Editor can be loaded by clicking the “Interactive Design” button or double clicking a column line in the summary table.

Data fields in the Column Design Editor display the geometry, loads and the reinforcement of the current selected column. Fields in the “Column Design Editor” are as follows:

Section Dimensions Section dimensions include the dimensions of the column along “1” (horizontal axis) and “2” (vertical axis) directions (“b1” and “b2”). Distances between the centre of the column to the intersection of the axes selected as the reference point for the column insertion (“e1” and “e2”), the column clear lengths (“L1” and “L2”), and the concrete cover. In polyline columns, the “b1” and “b2” values show the maximum extents of the column section along the 1 and 2 directions. These fields cannot be updated in polyline columns. In circular columns the “Inner and Outer Diameters” will be displayed in the “b1” and “b2” fields. If the circular column has a hollow cross-section, then the value in the “b2” field will show the inner diameter. In such a case, “b2” will be negative. If you modify these fields, you have to click the “Update” button to apply the changes.

Load Combinations Table Member force results from each load combination during the analysis procedure are listed in a table. Fields in this table are: No

Load combination number used in the building analysis. There are separate spaces reserved for column/wall top and bottom ends.

N

Axial Load combination

M1

Bending moment along Dir-1 axis of the column.

M2

Bending moment along Dir-2 axis of the column.

V1

Shear Force along Dir-1 axis of the column.

V2

Shear Force along Dir-2 axis of the column.

Load Combination

Name of the load combination

Column Result

Load Combinations

Result

of

the

related

load

Load combination (or combinations) to be used in section design must be specified before going on with interactive section design. If you select “Select/Unselect All” option, all combinations in the table will be selected/unselected. In this case, column section design will be performed for each selected combination and steel bars will be selected for the most critical one. After unselecting all combinations by clicking “Select/Unselect All” option, you can select one or more combinations on the table. To select a specific combination from the table, just click on the leftmost header cell on the row of that combination. Watch the mouse pointer changing its shape when you hover on the leftmost cell. You can select multiple combinations by pressing CTRL on the keyboard and clicking on the leftmost cell. By this way, you can make the program use only these combinations during section design of the column. One or more combinations can be stored as user-defined and its values can be modified. Steel bars can be selected for the critical one of these user-defined combinations. For this purpose, select the combinations you want to store as user-defined by the help of CTRL button on the keyboard. Click on “Select Marked Combinations as User Defined” option. Table will now accommodate only the selected combinations. Others will temporarily go out of the view. You must notice that “User Defined Loads” checkbox is also automatically checked after this operation. If you uncheck “User Defined Loads” checkbox, all the combinations will be restored back on the table. In order to modify the values of user-defined combinations, just click on the corresponding cell on the table. Values near the top edge of the cell are reserved for top end of column and the values near the bottom edge of the cell for bottom ends of the column. For a quick modification in a cell, first enter the top value from keyboard. Enter a SPACE or a COMMA character and continue with the bottom end value. Then hit ENTER. If the top end value will be zero, then first enter SPACE (or COMMA), and then enter the bottom end value. Again hit ENTER from keyboard. It is adequate to enter just a SPACE (or COMMA) and then ENTER, if both of the values are zero.

Arranging Steel Bars Steel bars in the column section can be arranged by modifying the fields in the “Steel Bars” page. In polyline columns, after making some modifications to the arrangement of the steel bars, you can use the “Reset Bars” option to turn back to the original arrangement.

Rectangular and Circular Columns While arranging the steel bars in rectangular or circular columns, bars to be placed as “Corner Bars”, “xIntermediate Bars” and “y-Intermediate Bars” can be controlled separately. This option allows the user to select different bar sizes for these areas. The “x-Intermediate Bars” are the ones that are placed through the global x-axis edge of the column. And the “y-Intermediate Bars” are the ones that are placed through the global y-axis edge of the column. The steel bars placed in the corners are considered separately. For example, if in the “Steel Bars” page the corner bars are shown as “1”, the “x-Intermediate Bars” are “3”, and the “y-Intermediate Bars” are “1”, then there will be 4x1 bars on the corners, 2x3 through the edges in the x-direction, and 2x1 through the edges in the y-direction. As a result, there will be 12 steel bars in the column section.

Rectangular Column Reinforcement In circular columns, only the “Corner Bars” field has a value. This value will show the total number of bars to be placed in the circular section. When you modify any field in the “Steel Bars” table, such as the “Quantity” or the “Area Ratio”, the sketch on the screen will be updated accordingly.

Polyline Columns In polyline columns, each steel bar need to be defined separately. Therefore each bar has a number to be specified. When you position a bar in the sketch, the number of the bar will be selected in the “Steel Bars” table. Unlike rectangular or circular columns, in polyline columns bars are specified by their x and y coordinates. To add a new bar, you need to show where the new bar will be placed in the section. If you want to add a bar in a corner formed by links, you can simply click this corner and drag through the side where the bar will be placed. When you release the mouse button, the bar will be shown in the sketch and will be added to the “Steel Bars” table. If you want to remove a bar, you can select it on the sketch and press the Del (Delete) button on the keyboard. If you want to add bars along an edge of the polyline column, click the first corner of the edge and drag to the other corner. When you release the mouse button, the number of the bars to be placed will be asked. These bars will be placed between the corners and they will be spaced equally. The corners of the edge should be shown in counter clock-wise order.

Bars Area Ratios The “Area Ratio” values allow the user to select different bar sizes in the same section. For example, if you specify the area ratios of the corner bars as “1.00”, x-intermediate and yintermediate bars as “0.8”, then the intermediate bars will be selected as R16 when the corner bars are R20.

Steel Area Required When the design procedure is completed, steel area required will be displayed in the bottom of the Steel Bars table.

Steel Bar Sizes According to the steel area required, bar sizes are selected by the program automatically. But all the fields in the Steel Bars Table are editable. Therefore, the user can modify the selected bar sizes by considering the steel area required. The “Steel Area Supplied” will be updated according to changes made in the Steel Bars Table. If you select the “Rbar Diameter” option under the “Settings” page, diameters of the bars will be written on the sketch.

Steel Area Supplied When the design procedure is completed, the steel area supplied will be displayed at the bottom of the Steel Bars table.

Links You can view the links selected for the current column in the “Links” page. When the “Links” page is selected, the edge numbers of the column will be shown in the sketch which will help you to follow the links described. Link spacing for the supports and the span are calculated separately. If you want to use the same spacing both for the span and the supports, uncheck the “Create Support Regions for Links” option under “Column Design Settings/Steel Bars/Links“. If you want to delete the support regions only in the current column, you can simply copy the size and spacing of the links calculated for the span to the supports in the “Shear Design” page.

Rectangular and Circular Columns ProtaStructure selects a “Single Link” for rectangular and circular columns as a default. But you can select any other type of link, such as “Cross Link” or “Double Links”, from the “Links Pattern” window in the “Links” page.

Polyline Columns ProtaStructure selects some links for polyline columns considering their geometry. But if you want to modify these links you can use the “Add” and “Delete” buttons in the “Links” page. To modify a link, first you need to select it either from the Links Table in the “Links” page or by selecting the link on the sketch. The link selected will be shown bold in the sketch. If you want to make changes on a link, after selecting the link, first remove it by pressing the “ Delete” button, and then press the “Add” button to create a new link. When you click the “Add” button, the “New Link” form will appear on the screen. To create a new link, you need to write down the edge numbers of the column that the link will follow. These numbers should be given in order and be separated by commas. When you close the “New Link” form by clicking the “OK” button, the new link will be positioned in the sketch.

Shear Design

Shear forces on the section and the links provided accordingly are displayed in the “Shear Design” page. The Shear Force calculated in the Building Analysis (Vd), Concrete Shear Stress (vc) and Limiting Shear Stress (vl) can be viewed in this page. These values cannot be edited. Size and spacing of the links selected are displayed on the right side of the page. Links for the span and for the supports are given separately. Size and spacing of links can be edited on this page. If you press the “Calculate” button after selecting a new size, a new spacing will be calculated accordingly. The number of link arms provided in each direction are given in the “# of Link Arms” fields. If a standard link type is selected then these numbers will be determined by the program automatically. But if you want to describe a special link, you can write the number of link arms into these fields.

Slenderness A column may be considered braced in a given plane if lateral stability to the structure as a whole is provided by walls or bracing designed to resist all lateral forces in that plane. For the slenderness check of the columns, the braced condition in each direction should be determined either by the user or automatically by the program. If you check the “Control Braced Condition Manually” option in the Project Parameters form, then you can specify the bracing condition for the X and Y directions manually. Otherwise ProtaStructure checks the bracing for each direction automatically based on the drift of the storey levels. But in both situations, you can change the bracing condition for a single column in the “Slenderness” page of the “Column Reinfrocement Design” editor. The “Effective Length Factors” and “Slenderness” are determined separately for braced and unbraced columns and additional moments will be calculated accordingly.

Settings The labels to be displayed in the sketch can be controlled by the options given under the “Steel Labels” title.

Steel Labels By default, there is no label shown on the sketch. If you select the “RBar Diameter” option on the Settings page and turn back to the Steel Bars page, the diameters of the steel bars will be displayed in the sketch. Similarly, the sequence numbers of the steel bars in polyline columns can be viewed by selecting the “No Seq. Text” option.

Column Reinforcement Design To perform the reinforcement calculation, click the “Interactive Design” button in the Column Design form. Column design will be performed for the selected load combinations according to the parameters defined in this form. All selected load combinations will be used for the design, and the one that requires the biggest steel area will be determined automatically. If you select only one load combination, the column design will be performed for that combination only. In each load combination there are two moments and one axial load value. If the moment calculated according to the minimum eccentricity specifications of the codes is greater than the moment that comes from the load combination, then the moment calculated according to the codes will be used in that direction.

Column Design Parameters If the steel area required is less than the minimum steel area determined according to the “Min. Reinforcement %” given in the Column Design form, then the minimum steel area will be used automatically. Minimum reinforcement percentage can be determined for columns and walls separately in the “Settings and Parameters” menu. You can break the iterations by clicking the “Close” button.

Column Analysis After the determination of the column reinforcement, Column Interaction Diagrams can be prepared. Using the interaction diagrams, a better understanding of the behaviour of the column can be achieved. Column interaction diagrams can be drawn using the “Column Analysis” button.

Column Interaction Diagram “Axial Load – Moment” and “Moment1 – Moment2” interactions can be plotted on an interaction diagram. A slice cut, taken at any level of an “Axial Load-Moment” diagram will yield the “Moment1-Moment2” diagram, which represents the biaxial bending envelope at that level of axial load.

Biaxial Bending Envelope can be plotted for the combination specified in “Loading” list. Axial load level of the selected combination will be indicated by a black line on “N-M” diagram. If both “M1-M2” and “NM” diagrams are selected to be displayed on the same page by “Both” option, then, the slice taken at the combination axial load level will be plotted just under the “N-M” diagram. Besides these, you can query the moment capacity for any level of axial load by entering an axial load value into the “N:” field and pressing “>>” button. If the column dimensions or steel pattern in direction 1 and 2 are different than the interaction diagrams for “Dir-1” and “Dir-2” will also be different. Data points of the interaction curve can be transferred to a text file by clicking “Print Results” button. Enter the number of data points and intermediate angles of calculation in the “Print Form”. In order to send the Interaction Diagrams to the printer, click on “Print” button.

Closing the Column Editor If you want to save the current design, click the “OK” button to close the Column Design Editor. If you don’t want to save you can click the “Cancel” button.

Related Articles: Overview of the Column Summary Table Column and Wall Design Working with Columns - Polyline Column Editor

Beam Section Design (Contents) The Beam Section Design and Detailing form can be accessed by clicking the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” option under the “Run” pulldown menu and then selecting one of the “Storey Beams”, “Ribs” or “Foundation Beams” sub-options.

General Settings to be used in the beam designs are assigned using the Beam Design Settings option under the “Settings” pulldown menu or in the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” form. Concrete and steel grades to be used in the beam designs are assigned using the Materials button on the “Pre-Analysis” page of the “Building Analysis” dialog. Analysis results for the beams are automatically transferred to the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” module. Beams can be designed either according to the original results from the building analysis or for member forces defined by the user.

Beam Types The Beam Section Design and Detailing menu options are explained below. Storey Beams Following the completion of the structural analysis without any errors, a Beam Summary File consisting of the maximum effects in the beams is created. This file will be used as the input data for the Beam Reinforcement Design. Rib Beams The analysis results of the rib beams are generated using the “Ribbed Slab Analysis” menu option in the “Run” pulldown. These results will then be automatically transferred to the Beam Section Design and Detailing module. Foundation Beams If strip footings are used in the building, the “Strip Footing Calculations” should be completed first. The strip foundation axis information will be transferred to the Beam Section Design and Detailing module automatically.

How The Beam Design Forces are Generated The “Beam Section Design and Detailing“module requires six “Design Moments” and two “Design Shear Forces” for each beam to calculate the reinforcement. These moments are creating the most critical tension values at:

· Left support top · Right support top · Span top · Left support bottom · Right support bottom · Span bottom of the beam. The design shear forces that will be used in design are the most critical support shear values developed. All the effects chosen for design will also be listed in the beam design output reports. Storey Beams ProtaStructure Structural Analysis Module transfers the analysis results obtained using all the loading combinations to the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” module automatically. After the structural analysis the most critical of the six design moments and two design shear forces are selected for each beam, among all the effects obtained from all loading combinations. Rib Beams The analysis of the Rib beams can be accomplished using the “Ribbed Slab Analysis” menu option in the “Run” pulldown. As a result of the “Ribbed Slab Analysis” all the ribbed slab strips defined in the Graphic Editor are analysed and transferred to the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” module automatically. Similar to the storey beams, the most critical effects in the support and span of the ribs are used. Foundation Beams After performing the analysis of the all of the strip footings in the Graphic Editor, the “Foundation Beams Section Design and Detailing” module is loaded with the “Foundation Beams” option; all effects will be transferred automatically.

Beam Reinforcement Design Modes After clicking the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” option in the “Run” pulldown, and selecting the type of the beam (Storey, Rib or Foundation Beams) you will see all the beam axes in the current project listed for all storeys. Beam Design can be performed in two modes: Interactive Mode The design can be performed for individual axes one storey at a time using the “Reinforcement Data Editor”. Consideration should certainly be given for designing axes containing critical beams by this method to obtain the best results. More information about this method can be found under the title “Interactive Beam Reinforcement Design”. Batch Mode

Using this mode, reinforcement of all beams can be calculated and selected by the program automatically. More information about this method can be found under the title “Beam Reinforcement Design (Batch Mode)”.

Related Articles: Interactive Beam Reinforcement Design Reinforcement Data Editor Beam Section Design - Filter, Sorting, Batch Design, Grouping, Reporting

Interactive Beam Reinforcement Design To design an axis interactively either double click on it in the Axes Table, or click the “ Interactive Design” button on the “Design” tab. An interactive beam design editor will be displayed which consists of two pages. You can switch between the pages by clicking the "Steel Bars” and “Beams” tabs.

Usage of the Axis and Beam Data Editor Click on the “Beams” tab to display the “Axis and Beam Data Editor” containing geometric data for the beams in the current axis. The distances between the axes and the column dimensions are contained in this table editor. The columns in the “Axis and Beam Data Editor” are explained in detail below:

Axis Name The labels of the axes that the current axis crosses appear in this column. “Axis Name” is restricted to a maximum of 4 characters.

Distance This field shows the axis-to-axis span length of the beam. The values in these fields represent the distance between the axis on the current row and the axis on the next row.

Beam TIP: The format of the Beam Labels generatedThese fields in the “Beam” column contain the labels of the beam in by the Graphic Editor canconsecutive order. The typical labelling convention of beams in be customised usingProtaStructure is as follows: "Member and Steel Bar Templates"on the . Settings menu.

Here “Storey-No” and “Beam-No” can range from 1 to 99. Beam “Type Character” is the character that is used to specify beam member group. This character is specified in the "Graphic Editor Settings" form. For example, "B" is usually used for beams. Rarely, a prefix character (other than the type character code) may appear to the left of the type character to denote the type of beam. The “postfix” is a character for discriminating between beams having the same number. For example “1B23A” is a beam on the first storey, having 23 as beam number and “A” as postfix. “11B20” has the beam number 20 and is on the 11th floor.

Beam Section Dimensions: bw and h Section dimensions of the rectangular beam are contained in these fields. “bw” represents the width of the beam and “h” the height.

Flange Dimensions: bf, hf and zf Total width of the flange, "b-flange", depth of flanges at left and right, "h-flange Left" and "h-flange Right", and distance between top of beam section and top of left and right flanges, "z-flange Left" and "z-flange Right" fields are used to specify the position and dimension of flanges. Flange information will always be transferred to this editor, no matter if they are used in the building analysis or not. In order to design the beams as a rectangular section, check “Design Using Rectangular Section” box in the “Parameters” page of the “Beam Design Settings” menu option.

Beam Section Parameters

Top Reference Level of Beam These two fields, “Top-RL –i” and “Top – RL – j” hold the reference level value of the top of the beam for I and J ends respectively. Especially for the axes having beams with different top levels, the changes in zcoordinate are calculated using the values in this column. Note that Beam top reference level will be transferred from ProtaStructure Analysis Module automatically.

Support Type This field indicates the condition for the left support of the current beam. Tree different types of support conditions can be defined: · COLUMN: A column exists at the end of the beam. · BEAM: A supporting beam exists at the end of the beam. · FREE: No support exists. This is a free end of a cantilever beam. This condition can only exist at the first and last row of the table. Support type should be selected based on one of the above conditions at the left support of the currently selected beam. The last row on the table is only for representing the right support condition of the last beam.

Concrete Cover This field contains the concrete cover of the individual beams. Concrete cover is measured from the edge of the beam to the outer edge of the links. The concrete covers for all beams are calculated using general conditions in the current concrete codes unless otherwise specified by the user. A global control exists in the “Design” page of the “Beam Design Settings” menu option .When the values in the beam table are left blank, the general setting will govern. A “zero” value in this column will assume the code settings in the currently selected concrete code.

Top and Bottom Columns: hi and hj The four input fields contain the section information of the supporting TIP: If the Support Type iscolumns, if "COLUMN" is defined in the support type field. "FREE", the values in these fields will beHere, "hi" is the distance from the left edge of the column to the axis and "hj" is the distance from the right edge of the column to the axis for top and ignored. bottom columns separately.

Beam: h, z, bi and bj The four input fields contain the section information of the supporting beams, if "BEAM" is defined in the support type field. Here, "bi" is the distance from the left edge of the support beam to the axis, "bj" is the distance from the right edge of the support beam to the axis, "h" is the section height of the support beam and "z" is the top reference level of the support beam.

Beam Section A checkmark in this field indicates that a section of the current beam will be included in the detail drawings of the axis. ProtaStructure can determine the beams having different sections, and automatically check this field.

The Axis and Beam Data ‘Interactive Design’ Button The “Interactive Design” button on the “Beams” tab of the “Axis and Beam Data Editor” can be used for viewing the moments and shear forces selected from the analysis results for the selected beam. If the “Interactive Design” button is clicked or the “Enter” key is pressed when a beam is selected, a dialog containing the maximum moments and shear forces obtained considering all loading combinations will be displayed. The displayed effects are: · The maximum moments creating tension at the top edge of the beam, in left support, span and right support regions, · The maximum moments creating tension at the bottom edge of the beam, in left support, span and right support regions, · Maximum Shear force, Vd, for both supports, The tension steel area (As) and compression steel area (As’) are calculated for all moment values provided in the corresponding fields. These values are editable. In other words, the form can be used for calculating the steel for any given design moment. Editing moments fields will dynamically re-calculate and update the required steel areas. The most critical shear forces for all combinations are transferred to the Beam Reinforcement Design module. These values are used for the shear design. The shear values, “Vd” fields, are also editable and any change in the shear force will update the shear reinforcement (links). Note that, only the shear force value at the supported end of the cantilever beams will be taken into account during the shear design. Links based on this shear force value (Vd) will be used throughout the span of the cantilever beam. The dialog will be closed and any modifications will be saved if the “OK” button is pressed. The “Cancel” button (or "Esc" key) will also close the Reinforcement Design Dialog, and the changes will be discarded.

The contribution of the bent-up bars (if they exist) in the shear resistance of the beams are ignored.

Related Articles: Beam Section Design - Filter, Sorting, Batch Design, Grouping, Reporting Reinforcement Data Editor

Reinforcement Data Editor Click the “Steel Bars” tab to display the “Reinforcement Data Editor” showing the steel bars selected after beam bending and shear design.

This form is a dynamic dialog. It allows the user to edit the selected steel bars and links. The user can also examine the effect of changes on the calculations immediately. The provided reinforcement patterns are very detailed so that little or no editing of the detail drawings is required. The detail drawings of the beams in the current axis can be viewed using the "Detail Drawing" button in this dialog. This Editor consists of four sections:

1. The schematic sketch of the beam: On the top of the form, the beams on the current axis are drawn schematically. The sketch shows the supports, beam labels, section dimensions, span lengths and required steel areas (at the top edge and bottom edge, at supports and span). 2. Excess Steel Areas: Just below the beam sketch, the “Extra As” values are displayed, indicating the excess steel area provided by the supplied steel at the same locations. If any modification is made to the selected steel bars, the affected “Extra As” values will be automatically updated. The red values in these fields indicate that the steel area requirement at that position is not adequate. 3. Reinforcement Data Fields: These are located beneath the "Extra As" values. The steel bar fields are arranged according to the reinforcement pattern selected. Navigation between the steel bar fields can be made by simply clicking the mouse button or by arrow keys. The automatically selected bars can be modified using the spin buttons located adjacent to the selected steel bar field. If any modification is made, recalculation of the supplied bars will be dynamically performed and other related fields will be updated as well. More information on the reinforcement data fields can be found in the related topics below. 4. Feedback Fields Section: This section is located at the lower part of the form. More information on these fields can be found in the following sub-sections.

As-min Fields Minimum steel areas calculated based on the minimum steel percentages stated in the active concrete code will be displayed in these data fields separately for top edge and bottom edge of the beam and for supports and span region. The values in these fields will be displayed in red when the supplied reinforcement does not satisfy the minimum requirements.

B-Up Middle Fields These fields display the possible width of the middle straight section of the bent-up bars. If the reinforcement pattern used does not include the bent-up bars, these values can be ignored.

Min-bw Fields The minimum section width that is required for placing the selected bars (at the top and bottom edge of the beam) will be displayed in these fields. The clear distance between the bars is calculated using the standard aggregate size. The values displayed in these fields include link size, concrete covers, longitudinal bar sizes and the clear distance between the bars. The values in these fields will be displayed in red when the provided bars do not fit in the current beam section.

Defl. Check Results ProtaStructure carries out deflection checks based on the clauses of the active concrete codes. The output of the deflection checks is displayed in these fields.

x-Sup.Links Fields Links in the support regions are calculated automatically and the calculated widths of the support regions are displayed in these fields.

Reinforcement Data Editor - Steel Bar Groups Based on the selected reinforcement pattern, several “Steel Bar Types” are used during design and curtailment. Using these fields, you can modify the selected steel bars that are initially set by the program. The cursor is positioned on the first field of the first bay when this menu is loaded. Navigation between the steel bar fields can be made using the mouse, direction keys and Enter key. You can also use the “Previous/Next Span” buttons or Left and Right key with Ctrl key pressed to navigate between beams in the axis. To modify a selected bar group, you can use the up/down buttons located on either side of the steel bar field. For longitudinal bars, the Up/Down button to the left side of the field controls the steel bar quantity while the Up/Down button to the right side of the field controls the steel bar diameter. Alternatively, you can use the following short-cut keys to modify the steel bars: F1 F2

F4

Increase steel Decrease steel F3 Select an available Select an available smaller bar diameter

bar bar bigger

bar

quantity quantity diameter

For example, to modify 2T16 to 4T14, it will be sufficient to press F1 twice and F4 once. The available Steel Bar Groups in ProtaStructure are outlined below. All of the following bar groups will not be visible in all reinforcement patterns. The necessary bar groups will be available depending on the selected reinforcement pattern. Reinforcement patterns can be selected using the “Select Bars” button in the ribbon.

Hanger Bars Hanger bars are used mainly with the bent-up bar patterns to provide links to be connected. These bars are used at the top layer in beams and in bottom layer in the foundation beams. The general mask used in this field is “Ø” form.

Hanger Bars Field

The number of hanger bars is usually determined based on the width of the section. The hanger bars are usually lapped at mid-span when the selected quantity and size is the same as the neighbouring spans. Note that, unlike the top and bottom straight bars, hanger bars are not extended to 0.25L of the adjacent span. The “Min. No. of Hanger Bars” and “Min. Hanger Bar diameter” in the “Settings and Parameters” dialog controls the minimum number of bars that can be placed in each span and the size of the bars. The “Steel Bar Cut Length” field in the “Settings and Parameters” dialog controls when the bars will be lapped. The bars are extended along the spans until the “Steel Bar Cut Length” value is reached. These bars are used in both the span and support regions of the beam to satisfy the required steel area.

Top Bars NOTE: These bars can beTop straight bars are placed at top layers of beams. They are used in both used as hanger barsspan and support regions of the beam to satisfy the required steel area. when it is desired that separate bars be put inAlso, when extended to 0.25L to the adjacent beams, they are also used to satisfy the required steel area of the supports of the adjacent span beams. every span. The general mask used in this field is “Ø” form.

Top Bars Field The top bars will not be extended to the adjacent support when the top levels of the beams are not the same; therefore they will not be used to satisfy the required steel area of the supports of the adjacent span beam. In the first and last supports or when there is a level difference between the beams, these bars are extended to the column and a bob is made when necessary to provide sufficient anchorage.

Support Top Bars Support top bars are placed at top layers at supports of beams. They are used in support regions of both beams and are extended to satisfy the required steel areas. They are either extended to 0.25L to into the adjacent beams and lap the span bars. The general mask used in this field is “Ø” form. In the first and last supports or when there is a level difference between the beams, these bars are extended to the column and a bob is made when necessary to provide sufficient anchorage.

Support Top Bars Field Two different groups of support top bars will be provided when the top levels of the beams are not the same.

Bent-up Bars Bent-up bars will be available when a reinforcement pattern that uses this bar group is selected. Bentup bars are used in top layers of support regions and bottom layer span regions. They are extended to 0.25L to the adjacent beams. Therefore they are used to satisfy the required steel area of the supports of the adjacent span beams. Bent-up bar curtailment style is controlled by the parameters provided in the “Bent-up Bar Controls” section of the “Settings and Parameters” menu. The general mask used in this field is “Ø” form.

Bent-up Bars Field

Bottom Bars Bottom straight bars are placed at the bottom layers of the beams. They are used in both the span and support regions of the beam to satisfy the required steel area. Also, when extended to 0.25L to the adjacent beams, they are also used to satisfy the required steel area of the supports of the adjacent beams. The general mask used in this field is “Ø” form.

Bottom Bars Field The bottom bars will not be extended to the adjacent support when the bottom levels of the beams are not the same; therefore they will not be used to satisfy the required steel area of the supports of that adjacent beam. In the first and last supports or when there is a level difference between the beams, these bars are extended to the column and a bob is made when necessary to provide sufficient anchorage.

Support Bottom Bars Support bottom bars are placed at the bottom layers at the supports of beams. They are used in support regions of both beams and are extended to satisfy the required steel areas. They are either extended to 0.25L to into the adjacent beams and lap the span bars. The general mask used in this field is “Ø” form. In the first and last supports or when there is a level difference between the beams, these bars are extended to the column and a bob is made when necessary to provide sufficient anchorage.

Support Bottom Bars Field Two different groups of support top bars will be provided when the bottom levels of the beams are not the same.

Side Bars For deeper beams bars are used in side faces of beams for control cracking. The number and spacing of these bars is determined based on the requirements of the selected codes of practice.

The minimum bar size is determined based on the value specified in “Web Steel Diameter” field in the “Settings and Parameters” dialog. The “Min. No. of Hanger Bars” and “Min. Hanger Bar diameter” controls the minimum number of bars that can be placed in each span and the size of the bars. The general mask used in this field is “Ø” form. The parameter “n” is applied for each beam side.

Side Bars Field

Links Equally spaced links can be placed along the beams in three regions, namely, left and right supports and span. The width of the support regions is determined and displayed in the “x-Sup.Links” line in the “Reinforcement Information” editor. The general mask used in this field is “Ø/” form.

Links Field NOTE: Bent-up bars (ifLink arrangement and calculation parameters are available in the “Links” available) are notpage of the “Settings and Parameters” menu. Using these options, minimum considered in shearand maximum link spacing, link diameter range and support links design. arrangement can be controlled.

Reinforcement Data Editor - Buttons The following buttons are displayed in the ribbon at the top of the Reinforcement Data Editor.

Select Bars Various reinforcement and curtailment patterns are available and can be selected using the “Select Bars” button located in the ribbon. You can select the most suitable reinforcement pattern using this button.

Diagrams The shear force, bending moment envelope diagrams for the beams in the axis can be generated by clicking the “Diagrams” button in the ribbon. Envelope diagrams are generated using all the loading combinations. Furthermore, you can select any load case or combination. For the selected load case or load combination, the shear force, bending moment diagrams will be displayed accordingly. While using “Print” button enables you to print the diagram, diagram values can be saved to a text file by using “Table” button in the Diagrams Form.

Navigation between the Beams To navigate between the beams you can use the left and right arrow buttons.

Scaled View and Horizontal Scaled Adjustments The beams may appear based on their actual span lengths in this editor if the “Scaled” option in the ribbon is checked. The horizontal scale may be modified using the up and down buttons next to the “Scaled” checkbox. Modification of the horizontal scale may be necessary when the resolution of your display is not sufficient, or when you want to see more (or less) beams in one screen.

Closing the Editor You can use the “OK” button to close the editor; save the modifications made to the current axis and return to the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” form. Changes will be discarded if the “ Cancel” button is used to close the editor.

Filter, Sorting, Batch Design, Grouping, Reporting

Manipulating the Beam Summary Table The summary table can be manipulated as follows:

To filter axes Initially the beam summary table displays all beams at all storeys. You can filter the table by clicking the “Filter Axes” button on the “Design” tab of the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” form. The following filtering options are provided: “Display All Members”, “Filter by Storey”, “Filter by Axis Label” and “List Failed Members Only”. If the “Filter by Storey” option is selected, a list of storeys will appear on the right of the option. You can choose any storey from this list so that the beams of that storey are listed in the table. Similarly if the “Filter by Axis Label” option is selected a field for axis label input will appear on the right of the option. When the desired axis label is typed, the table will consist of a list of beams on that axis in all storeys. Furthermore, if you select the “List Failed Members Only” option, only axes for which reinforcement couldn’t be determined will be listed in the Beam Table. To return to a listing of all axes choose the “Display All Members” option in the “Filter Axes” dialog.

To sort the table into a different order Initially the beam summary table displays axes sorted by Axis label, then Storey, then Part. You can sort in different ways by dragging “Group”, “Axis” or “Storey” column headers. The first header becomes the primary and the next becomes the secondary sorting criteria. To remove a sorting criteria drag it back into the table header.

Beam Reinforcement Design (Batch Mode) All the beams in the structure or in a selected storey can be designed automatically in batch mode. This is accessed via the “Beam Design (Batch Mode)” button on the “Design” tab. After finishing the design of the critical axes interactively you can design the beams for the remaining axes automatically using the batch mode beam design dialog. In this case selecting the “Don’t select steel when previous bars are insufficient” option will prevent redesign of the interactively designed axes. If the Batch Mode Design is being used for the first time or all beams are selected for design again you can choose the “Re-select All Steel Bars” option. In order to start the Batch Mode Beam Reinforcement Design click the “Analysis” button in this dialog. A report is generated during the batch mode design to inform the user of any problems during the design of the beams. You can review this report by pressing “Messages” button in the “Beam Reinforcement Design” dialog.

Beam Grouping You may decide to utilise beam axis grouping in order to rationalise your design and reduce the number of details produced. You define the groups from the “Grouping” tab of the “Beam Design and Detailing” form.

Beam axes can either be grouped automatically, or manually. Note that the advantages of grouped beam design do not come for free – the beam design process will be slower, but you will save much more time in the long run because of the detailing efficiency you gain.

Manual Grouping Groups are created manually as follows: To manually define a new group: 1. Click on a row in the table to select the ‘master’ of the group. In the table an arrow appears next to the axis label and the row becomes highlighted. Beams on the chosen axis are simultaneously highlighted in the plan view. An equals sign (=) appears adjacent to all similar axes (i.e. with matching geometry) that can potentially be added to the group.Click the “Edit Group” button. 2. Hold down the CTRL key and click on those additional rows in the table which are also to be part of the group and then click the “Add Axis” button. A new group is created consisting of all the axes selected. To manually add all similar axes to a new group: 1. Click on a row in the table to select one of the axes which is to be part of the group. In the table an arrow appears next to the axis label and the row becomes highlighted. Beams on the chosen axis are simultaneously highlighted in the plan view. An equals sign (=) appears adjacent to all similar axes (i.e. with matching geometry) that can potentially be added to the group. 2. Click the “Edit Group” button. 3. Click the “Add All Similars” button. A new group is created consisting of all the similar axes. To manually remove an axis from a group: 1. Click on the row in the table containing the axis to be removed. 2. Click the “Edit Group” button. 3. Click the “Remove Axis” button. The selected axis is removed. To break an individual group: 1. Click on the any row in the table containing an axis in the group. 2. Click the “Edit Group” button. 3. Click the “Break Group” button. 4. Click ‘Yes’ to confirm.

The selected group is removed.

Automatic Grouping Three different options exist for creating groups automatically: · “Group All Similar Axes” - similar axes (i.e. with matching geometry) at all floors are placed in the same group as each other. · “Group Beam Axes Vertically” – each individual axis that shares the same geometry on multiple floors is placed in a unique group. · “Group Beam Axes Within Floor” - similar axes within a particular floor are placed in the same group as each other. To automatically group all similar axes: 1. Click the “Automatic Grouping” button and from the drop down menu select “Group All Similar Axes”. A prompt appears indicating that all ungrouped axes will be grouped automatically. Note that any existing groups will be maintained. 2. Click ‘Yes’ to proceed. Previously ungrouped similar axes at all storeys are placed in new groups automatically. To automatically group beam axes vertically: 1. Click the “Automatic Grouping” button and from the drop down menu select “Group Beam Axes Vertically”. A prompt appears indicating that all ungrouped axes will be grouped automatically. Note that any existing groups will be maintained. 2. Click ‘Yes’ to proceed. 3. Previously ungrouped similar axes at all storeys are placed in new groups automatically. To automatically group beam axes within a floor: 1. Click the “Automatic Grouping” button and from the drop down menu select “Group Beam Axes Within Floor”. A prompt appears indicating that all ungrouped axes will be grouped automatically. Note that any existing groups will be maintained. 2. Click ‘Yes’ to proceed. Previously ungrouped similar axes within a floor are grouped automatically for all storeys.

Change Group Master Use the “Change Group Master” option on the “Grouping” tab to re-specify the master for a particular group. The existing group ‘master’ is indicated in the table by an arrow symbol. Note: Detail drawings and calculations are only output for the group master -other beams in the group are noted as ‘similar’.

To change the group master: 1. Click on the row in the table containing the new group master. 2. Click the “Edit Group” button. 3. Click the “Change Group Master” button. The selected row becomes the new group master.

Verify Groups Use the “Verify Groups” option on the “Grouping” tab to check the validity of all existing beam groups.

Break All Groups Use the “Break All Groups” option on the “Grouping” tab to remove all existing manual and automatic beam groups. Note that any existing reinforcement (based on the previous design groups) will be retained when groups are broken in this way, therefore you should reselect the steel bars after breaking the groups.

Copy and Paste Bars A less sophisticated feature when compared to grouping; “Copy Bars” and “Paste Bars”, located on the “Design” tab, allows the designed bars from one axis to be pasted to other axes with similar geometry. A check design is then performed to establish if the pasted bars are sufficient. Because no relation is established between the source and destination axes, re-selecting bars would result in the axes adopting different bars to each other once more. Copy Bars Using this button, steel bars from the selected beam axis can be copied to the clipboard and can be pasted to axes with similar geometry. Select the beam axis to copy and press the “Copy Bars” button. The axis label will be marked by an arrow symbol and all beam axes with similar geometry will be highlighted with an “=” mark. Paste Bars If a beam axis is marked by an arrow symbol, then you can use this button to paste steel bars from it to the beams on the selected axis. Note that you can only paste steel bars to the beam axes marked with “=”. A check design is carried out immediately after paste operation to check if the provided steel is sufficient and the tick/cross mark will be updated. Paste Steel Bars to All If a beam axis is marked by an arrow symbol, then you can use this button to paste steel bars from it to all the beam axes marked with “=”. A check design is carried out immediately after paste operation to check if the provided steel is sufficient and the tick/cross mark will be updated.

Reports Various reports are available to be printed from the “Report” tab of the “Beam Design and Detailing” form. Printing the Beam Design Report After beam design has been accomplished the “Design Report” button can be used to print the results. Beam Capacity Reports You can use this option to check the capacities of the beams calculated using the supplied steel. This table is generally used for checking the capacity of the existing buildings. This button is not displayed when designing to the EC code. Print Summary Table To print the summary table as it is displayed on screen, click the “Print Summary Table” button. Print Bars List To display and print a table of the beam reinforcement, click the “Print Beam Steel Table” button. Axes where it has not been possible to determine the reinforcement are also indicated. Flange Shear Check (EC2 Design only) To display and print the flange shear check results, click the “Flange shear Check” button. This button is not displayed when designing to other codes. Marking the Axes for Printing The “Design” and “Print” columns in the table for the axes that have been designed inform you that the beam is designed and ready for printing. The mark in the “Print” column indicates that the beam axis will be included in the output report. When the “Design Report” option is selected, only the axes that are marked for printing will be transferred to the output report. After selecting an axis in the list, you can either mark or unmark it for printing by clicking in the “ Print” box. The print marks for all items in the list can be set using the “Mark All Design Axes” button. Similarly, all print marks can be removed by using “Remove Marks” button. Where grouping has been applied, print marks for the group masters only can be set using the “Mark Group Master Axes Only” button. When the report is printed, calculations are displayed for the group master axis only. Other beams in the same group are listed underneath each the master beam. Changing the Quantity of Axes for Bar Schedule You can increase or decrease the quantity of an axis, (Qty) by using the “Axis Quantity Increase/Decrease” spin buttons in the table. The quantity of axes will be used as a multiplier in the bar schedule.

Related Articles: Reinforcement Data Editor Interactive Beam Reinforcement Design Beam Design Settings - Design & Parameters

Foundation Modelling and Design (Contents) You can design Pad Base (footing), Strip Footing, and Raft Foundation using ProtaStructure. In order to insert a footing the analysis of the structural model must be completed. Footings can only be inserted at the foundation level. Therefore Storey 0 must be set as current storey before inserting a footing. Settings to be used in the foundation designs are assigned using the “Foundation Design Settings” option under the “Settings” pulldown menu.

Related Articles: Foundation Design Settings Pad Bases Pile Caps Strip Footing Raft Foundation Design Piled Rafts Merging of Building Foundations

Shallow Foundtion

Pad Bases Before defining a Pad Base:

Insert Base

Pad

1. The building model must be completed and analysed, so that the column axial loads and moments are determined. 2. The foundation storey (Storey 0) must be set as the current storey.

In order to determine concrete and steel grades that will be used in the Pad Base Design, first pick “Building Analysis” option in “Run” pulldown. Then, press “Edit” button in “Material” field of “Pre-Analysis” tab page.

Pad Base Insertion To define a new Pad Base: 1. Select a column to insert the pad base. More than one column may be selected. In that case, the calculated pad base (based on the effects transferred from all the selected columns) will be inserted to all selected columns.

2. Right-click to display the shortcut menu and select “Insert Pad Base” option. 3. The “Pad Base Properties” dialog will be displayed. Check the parameters in this dialog and press “Calculate” button to design this footing. 4. Use the up arrow buttons located to the right of the “Lx” and “Ly” fields to decide on the desired footing size. 5. Press “OK” button to close “Pad Base” results dialog. 6. After completing the design of the pad base, press the “OK” button to complete the insertion of the footing.

Editing an Existing Pad Base In order to edit an existing pad base: 1. Select an existing pad base, 2. Right-click to select "Properties" from the menu. 3. Modify and re-design the pad base, 4. Press the "OK" button in the “Pad Base Properties” dialog to update the pad base. You can repeat this process to as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method.

Pad Base Properties The "Pad Base Properties” dialog will be loaded when the "Insert Pad Base" option is selected. The “Pad Base Properties” dialog can also be accessed after selecting an existing pad base and then by right-clicking and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. There are two tab pages in this dialog named “Footing Data” and “Column Data”. The “Footing Data” tab page comprises the Footing Label, Footing Depth, Taper Height, Surcharge Weight, Soil Unit Weight, Allowable Stress of Soil, Concrete Cover, Steel Bar Diameters fields. The “Column Data” tab page displays loading information of the selected columns to be included in this footing. When the dialog is closed using “OK” button, the footing will be inserted. This button is only available after the footing design is completed. You can use the "Print" button to view and transfer the pad base design output of the current footing to printer.

Footing Data The "Footing Data" page of “Pad Base Properties” dialog contains the following fields: Footing Label

You can enter the label associated with the footing in this field. By default, a footing label associated with the column label will be generated. For example, “F1” will be generated if a footing for column “1C1” is to be created. Footing Depth / Taper Height “Footing Depth” is the depth of the footing at the tip. If a non-zero “Taper Height” is defined, the sum of footing depth and taper height will be used as the section depth during the design of the footing.

Surcharge Height Enter the height of the fill material in this field. The volume of surcharge will be calculated and multiplied with the “Surcharge Height” to yield an additional axial load. Soil Unit Weight Enter the unit weight of the fill material in this field. The volume of surcharge will be calculated and multiplied with the "Soil Unit Weight" to yield the additional axial load due to fill material. Allowable Stress of Soil You have to enter the “Allowable Stress of Soil” in this field. This value will be used during the determination of the footing dimensions. “Allowable Stress of Soil” value defined in the "Project Parameters" will be used as the default value in this field. Steel Bars Enter the steel bar diameters that will be used for each direction steel in this field. You have to manually increase the steel bar diameter if the steel is reported to be not sufficient. Concrete Cover You cannot enter any value to this field. To modify the value in this field, first select “Graphic Editor Settings” menu option under “Settings” pulldown. Thereupon, select the “Design” tab page in “Foundations Settings” form. Enter new concrete cover value used in the design of pile caps to the “Pad

Bases – Concrete Cover” field. Note that, concrete cover is measured from outer edge of the section to the center of the steel bar. Load Selection Options If “Try All Combinations” option is checked, all load combinations for all columns selected for the footing will be checked and the most critical combination will be used in the final design. This is the default option. Alternatively, as a more conservative approach, the “Use Maximum Loads in All Combinations” option may be checked. In this case, the biggest axial load and biggest moments will be picked up considering all combinations and these effects will be used in the design. If this option is checked, the selected effects will be displayed in the "N", "Mx" and "My" fields for reference. Occasionally, you may desire to manually enter the loads to be used in the footing design. In this case, check “Use Manually Defined Loads” option and enter the axial load and moments manually in the fields provided in this section.

Column Data Column information and analysis results are displayed for each loading combination in the “Column Data” tab page.

Pad Base Design After completing the parameters in the "Pad Base Properties" dialog, you can press the "Calculate" button to analyse the footing. The results are displayed in a “Pad Base” dialog’, within which you can adjust the footing design. The “Pad Base” dialog contains information of the selected column data, footing dimensions, analysis results and design parameters. By default, the footing size will be selected based on the similar aspect ratio. You can use the up arrow buttons located to the right of the “Lx” and “Ly” fields to decide on the desired footing size.

Footing Dimensions Section

Pressing up/down arrow button to the right of “Lx” will increase/decrease the horizontal size of the footing by “Footing Length Step” value each time. In this case, the “Ly” value will be automatically calculated (if the “Calculate Footing Dimensions Automatically” is checked) so that the allowable soil stress will not be exceeded. Similarly, pressing the up/down arrow button to the right of “Ly” will increase/decrease the vertical size of the footing again by “Footing Length Step” and the “Lx” value will be automatically calculated (if the “Calculate Footing Dimensions Automatically” is checked). Alternatively, If you do not want the footing dimensions to be updated automatically, the “Calculate Footing Dimensions Automatically” shall be unchecked. The manual check can be performed using the “Perform Design Check” button. If "Square Footing" option is checked, the “Lx” and “Ly” values are set equal automatically and “ Footing Length Step” value is added to both dimensions every time one of the up arrow buttons are pressed. Note that, as footing dimensions increase, soil pressure decreases. To resume back to the economical design, uncheck and re-check the “Square Footing” box. By pressing up/down arrow button at the right of the “ex”, the footing will be shifted to the right/left in plan view based on the “Footing Length Step”. Similarly, by pressing up/down arrow button at the right of the “ey”, the footing will be shifted upward/downward in plan view based on the “Footing Length Step”. You can close the "Pad Base Design" dialog using the "OK" button.

Related Articles: Pile Caps Strip Footing Raft Foundation Design Piled Rafts

Strip Footing For a strip footing to be defined under a series of columns/walls, foundation beams must have been defined beforehand between the columns/walls. ProtaStructure performs the strip footing calculations for all load combinations and draws moment and shear diagrams as a combination envelope. Besides these, calculations are also performed based on coefficient of subgrade reaction interval. Before inserting a footing: 1. The building model must be completed and analysed, so that the column and wall axial loads and moments are determined. 2. The foundation storey (“Storey 0”) must be set as the current storey.

Strip Footing Definition To define a new Strip Footing: 1. Insert the footing beams that will be used in the strip footing. The beams must be defined such that vertical members (i.e. columns and walls) are covered in the strip footing (at their endpoints). 2. Select all the beams that will be included in the strip footing. (Note that, beams can be selected in any order) 3. Right-click to display the shortcut menu and select "Insert Strip Footing" option. The “Strip Footing” dialog will be displayed. 4. Press the "Calculate" button to design the footing. Refer to the "Strip Footing Design" section of this manual for more information on this topic. 5. After completing the design of the strip footing, press the "OK" button to complete the insertion of the footing. Note that "OK" button will not be available if the design of the footing is not completed correctly.

Editing an Existing Strip Footing In order to edit an existing strip footing: 1. Select an existing strip footing, 2. Right-click to load the "Properties" form and modify the design of the strip footing, 3. Press the "OK" button in the "Properties" form to update the footing. You can repeat this process to as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method.

Beams of the Strip Footing Beams that will be included in the strip footing must be defined prior to insertion of the strip footing. These beams must be defined based on the following rules and constraints: Beam Dimensions and Eccentricities The dimensions of the beams included in a strip footing must be identical. Beams with different section dimensions cannot be used in a single strip footing. In some models, the columns or walls to be included in a strip footing may not be aligned along a single axis. In such cases, if necessary, beams can be inserted along more than one axis. If the axes that the beams are inserted along are parallel, beam eccentricities must be so defined to yield beam lines perfectly aligned.

Strip Footing Beam Constraints Beam Insertion Rules Beams must be defined so that all columns and walls in the strip footing must be on at least one of the insertion points of the beams. In the figure above, column C1 is on I-end of beam B1. Similarly, I-end of Wall W1 is on J-end of beam B1. Since the column C2 insertion is on axis B, the beam B2 had to be defined along this axis, so that column C2 will be on J-end of beam B2. Note that, for the wall elements with their major direction along the strip footing, wall I-end must be considered as reference point (i.e. J-end of the wall must be ignored as if it is a column defined using one insertion point). For this reason, beam B2 is inserted between axes 2 and 4, rather than inserting two beams from 2 to 3 and 3 to 4.

Strip Footing Design After selecting the footing beams, the "Strip Footing" dialog will be loaded when "Insert Strip Footing" option is picked in the shortcut menu displayed by right-clicking. The "Strip Footing" dialog can also be displayed when the "Properties" option is picked in the shortcut menu displayed by right-clicking after selecting an existing strip footing. Strip footing calculations are performed based on beam on elastic foundation method (“Winkler Method”). Calculations can be done either for all load combinations or for an envelope of all load combinations. Also, envelope calculation can be done for an interval of coefficient of subgrade reaction. In order to determine concrete and steel grades that will be used in Strip Footing Design, first pick “Building Analysis” option in “Run” pulldown. Then, press “Edit” button in “Material” field of “Pre-Analysis” tab page. Strip Footing Calculation 1. Loading and geometry information of all related columns, walls and beams will be loaded into “Strip Footing” dialog. All the information in the table can be modified. 2. Select the combination in “Loading” section for which the calculations are to be performed. If you want to obtain a design envelope for all combinations then check “Design Envelope” checkbox. 3. Enter the value of “Subgrade Coefficient of Reaction” into the “Subgrade Coefficient” field. 4. If you want to perform the calculations for an interval of subgrade reaction values, check “Step” checkbox. Then enter the second subgrade coefficient value into the second field enabled. By using the spin buttons, indicate the number of steps for interval calculation.

5. For the determination footing width, select the appropriate method of “Soil Pressure Selection Criteria”. 6. Click on “Calculate” button. Note that, “Design Envelope” and “Step” boxes must be checked together, if you want to do the calculations both for subgrade reaction and combination envelope. 7. Results of the calculation will be loaded into “Strip Footing Results” form. Results can be checked from the report or from the diagrams. Soil pressure, shear and moment diagrams are located in the “Diagrams” page. 8. Click “OK” to complete the design and draw the strip footing on the plan view. 9. You can perform the design of the foundation beams by selecting “Foundation Beams” option of the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” menu in “Run” pulldown. Soil Pressure Selection Criteria Prior to commencing the design of the strip footing, it’s necessary to determine the method of which soil pressure under the footing will be calculated. For this purpose, select the appropriate method among the methods given in the “Soil Pressure Selection Criteria for Calculating the Footing Width” field. Default method is “Maximum Soil Pressure” that is used normally for soft soil. Especially for firm soil, other methods, namely, “Average in L/4 Column Region”, “Average in L/2 Column Region” can also be used. Nevertheless, these two methods must be used with care as calculated soil pressure can decrease without any control resulting in an unsafe design. Left and Right Extensions There are two fields reserved for the extensions at the beginning and at the end of the strip footing. Enter the cantilever (extension) lengths “Right Extension” and “Left Extension” fields, if you want to include such extensions in the design.

Strip footing parameters Footing Width If you do not provide any values in this field before calculations, required footing width will automatically be calculated. You can ideally enter width values other than the calculated one in this field. But in this case you must click on “Design” button again. If the required width is greater than the value you entered, then calculated value will be accepted. If the entered value is greater than required width, then calculated value will be discarded. Footing Depth Footing Depth must be specified before design. This value can be changed if necessary, but design must be repeated in this case. Steel Diameter Enter the steel diameter to be used in footing design. If bar spacing is calculated too dense, specify a larger diameter. Column List Information about a column residing on a strip footing alignment can be adjusted using the column list table. Do the necessary modification by directly clicking in the table cells. Data fields in the table are explained below. Column Name Name of the column defined in Graphic Editor is written here. Column Section Width (b-column) Width of the columns along the strip footing direction is specified here. Support moments and shear forces calculated in the beams are reduced by increasing values of this parameter. Eccentricity of the Column (e-column) Distance of column left edges to the axis is specified here. If the axis passes through the midpoint of the column, then this parameter will just be the half of the column section width. Axial Loads And Moments If you want to ignore the effect of the columnAxial loads and moments found at the bottom nodes of foundation columns moments in the design,are listed here for the selected combination. These values can be modified specify zero values forby the user. Moment values. Orthogonal Span Width If the strip footings are inserted as a two dimensional grid, then column axial loads must be shared between two footings in two directions. For this purpose, enter the distance of the column in orthogonal direction into the “Orther Dir. Len.” field. Reduced axial loads can be seen on the “Strip Footing Results” form.

Definition of Orthogonal Span Width. In the example sketch above: “d1” is the orthogonal span width for column S1 when the strip footing is calculated along axis A. Similarly, orthogonal span width for column S2 along axis B is “d1 + d2”. The value for column S3 along axis C is “d2 + 2d3”, unlike others.

Related Articles: Pad Bases Pile Caps Raft Foundation Design Piled Rafts Merging of Building Foundations

Raft Foundation Design You can model Raft Foundations (with beams or without beams) and analyse with “FE Raft Foundation Module”. Please refer to the FE Analysis of Foundations section for a detailed discussion.

Raft Foundation without Beams 1. Switch to “Storey 0” level in Graphic Editor and define slabs into the axis regions. Use “CTRL” button if necessary. For a detailed discussion on slab definition with axis region method, please refer to Graphic Editor section. You can select any slab type e.g. “1” for all slabs as Slab Type code is not important.

2. Load the “Slab Strips” member from the toolbar. Check “Finite Element Strip” option. 3. Select “Fixed Band Strip” in the “FE” page. Draw the slab strips in both directions and in the support and span regions. 4. Select “FE Raft Foundation Analysis” option in the “Run” pulldown. Please refer to the FE Analysis of Foundations section for a detailed discussion. 5. After the analysis is complete, click on “Update Steel Bars” option of “Arrange Steel Bars” menu in the toolbar in order to draw the slab reinforcement along the slab strips on the screen. 6. Punching Shear Check is especially important in the design and modeling of Raft Foundation without Beams. Perform punching check using “Column Punching Check” option in the “Run” pulldown. If necessary, it’s preferable to increase the Slab Depth.

Fixed Width Strip Definition

Raft Foundation with Beams 1. Switch to “Storey 0” level in Graphic Editor and connect the columns and walls by foundation beams along horizontal and vertical directions. 2. Define slabs into the beam regions. You can select any slab type e.g. “1” for all slabs as Slab Type code is not important. 3. Load the “Slab Strip” member from the toolbar. Check “Finite Element Strip” option. 4. Select “Span Strip” in the “FE” page. Draw the slab strips in both directions. As you know this strip is used for standard beam/slab systems. 5. Select “FE Raft Foundation Analysis” option in the “Program” pulldown. Please refer to the FE Analysis of Foundations section for a detailed discussion.

6. After performing Raft Foundation Analysis and closing the “Analysis Post-processing” form, press “Transfer Foundation Beam Results” button. Thereupon, you can carry out the design of the foundation beams by selecting “Foundation Beams” option of the “Beam Section Design and Detailing” menu option in “Run” pulldown. 7. After the analysis is complete, click on “Update Steel Bars” option of “Arrange Steel Bars” menu in the toolbar or in the shortcut menu in order to draw the slab reinforcement along the slab strips on the screen.

Related Articles: FE Analysis of Foundations Column Punching Check FE Strip Slab Pad Bases

Strips

Pile Caps Strip Footing Piled Rafts Merging of Building Foundations

Deep Foundation

Pile Caps Before defining a Pile Cap: Insert Pile Cap

1. The building model must be completed and analysed, so that the column axial loads and moments are determined. 2.

The foundation storey (Storey 0) must be set as the current storey.

In order to determine concrete and steel grades that will be used in the pile cap design, first pick “Building Analysis” option in “Run” pulldown. Then, press “Edit” button in “Material” field of “Pre-Analysis” tab page.

Pile Cap Insertion To define a new Pile Cap: 1. Select a column under which the pile cap will be inserted. More than one column may be selected. In that case, the calculated pile cap (based on the effects transferred from all the selected columns) will be inserted to all selected columns. 1.

Right-click to display the shortcut menu and select “Insert Pile Cap” option.

2. The “Pile Cap Design” dialog will be displayed. Check the parameters in the dialog and press the “Calculate” button to design the pile cap. 3.

Use the “(+) Increase” and “(-) Decrease” buttons to adjust the number of piles used.

Note: It is not possible to decrease to less than the original number of piles calculated. In other words, “(+) Decrease” can only be used to reduce an “(+) Increase”. 4. After completing the design of the pile cap, press the “OK” button to close the “Pile Cap Design” dialog and complete its insertion.

Editing an Existing Pile Cap In order to edit an existing pile cap: 1.

Select an existing pile cap,

2.

Right-click and select "Properties" from the menu.

3.

Modify the design of the pile cap,

4.

Press the "OK" button in the "Properties" form to update the pile cap.

You can repeat this process to as many members as you wish. One member at a time can be edited by this method.

Pile Cap Properties The " Pile Cap Design” dialog will be loaded when the "Insert Pad cap" menu option is selected. The “Pile Cap Design” dialog can also be accessed after selecting an existing pile cap and then by rightclicking and choosing the “Properties” option in the shortcut menu. Prior to performing the calculations, there are initially three tab pages in this dialog named “General”, “Loads” and “Parameters”. The “General” tab page comprises pile and pile cap geometric data, specified reinforcement and the pile capacity. The “Loads” tab page displays loading information of the selected columns to be included in this footing. The “Parameters” tab page is for specifying the design parameters (Axial Load, moments, and additional soil surcharge). If “Try All Columns/Combinations” option is checked, all load combinations for all columns selected for the pile cap will be checked and the most critical combination will be used in the final design. This is the default option. Alternatively, as a more conservative approach, the “Use Maximum Loads in All Combinations” option may be checked. In this case, the pile cap will be designed for the biggest axial load and moments among all combinations. If this option is checked, the selected effects will be displayed in the "N", "Mx" and "My" fields for reference. Occasionally, you may desire to manually enter the loads for design. In this case, check “ Use Manually Defined Loads” option and enter the axial load and moments manually in the provided fields.

After the calculations have been performed the fourth “Report” tab is added. The tab contains a general design calculations. Alternatively, a report can be viewed or printed by pressing the “Print” button at the right of the “Calculate” button. When the dialog is closed using “OK” button, the pile cap will be inserted. This button is only available after the calculations have been performed.

General Data The "General" page of “Pile Cap Design” dialog contains the following fields: Footing Label You can enter the label associated with the footing in this field. By default, a footing label associated with the column label will be generated. For example, “F1” will be generated if a footing for column “1C1” is to be created. Pile Cap Depth (h) This is the overall depth of the pile cap.

Steel Bars Enter the steel bar diameters and spacing that will be used for each direction steel in these fields. You have to manually increase the steel bar diameter if the steel is reported to be insufficient. Concrete Cover You cannot enter any value to this field. To modify the value in this field, first select “Graphic Editor Settings” menu option under “Settings” pulldown. Thereupon, select the “Design” tab page in “Foundations Settings” form. Enter new concrete cover value used in the design of pile caps to the “Pad Bases – Concrete Cover” field. Note that, concrete cover is measured from outer edge of the section to the center of the steel bar. Pile Parameters

Enter the "Pile Type” as either Circular or Square and the "Pile Size”. Pile Capacity Enter the "Compression” and "Tension” capacity of the pile and also the “Spring Coefficient”. Min. Pile Spacing (Center-to Center) (s-min) Piles will be positioned so that they are spaced not closer than the minimum spacing parameter entered here. Pile Penetration Depth (p) This is the depth the pile penetrates into the pile cap.

Loads The "Loads" page of “Pile Cap Design” dialog contains the following fields: Load Selection Options If “Try All Columns/Combinations” option is checked, all load combinations for all columns selected for the footing will be checked and the most critical combination will be used in the final design. This is the default option. Alternatively, as a more conservative approach, the “Use Maximum Loads in All Combinations” option may be checked. In this case, the biggest axial load and moments will be selected based on all combinations and these effects will be used in the design. If this option is checked, the selected effects will be displayed in the "N", "Mx" and "My" fields for reference. Occasionally, you may desire to manually enter the loads to be used in the pile cap design. In this case, check “Use Manually Defined Loads” option and enter the axial load and moments manually in the provided fields. Surcharge Height Enter the height of the fill material in this field. The volume of surcharge will be calculated and multiplied with the “Surcharge Height” to yield an additional axial load. Soil Unit Weight Enter the unit weight of the fill material in this field. The volume of surcharge will be calculated and multiplied with the "Soil Unit Weight" to yield the additional axial load due to fill material.

Parameters The "Parameters" page of the “Pile Cap Design” dialog contains the following fields: Allow Tapered Footing Check this box to allow corners of the footing to be chamfered on plan. Max. Pile Spacing Multiplier You can control the maximum pile spacing with this multiplier which is applied to the depth of the pile cap above the top of the pile. (Pile Cap Depth, h minus the Pile Penetration Depth, p). Min. Distance from Pile face to Cap Edge

Pile cap dimensions will be calculated and compared with the minimum value entered here. A distance from the pile face to the cap edge smaller than this minimum value will not be used by the program. Min. Distance from Column face to Cap Edge Pile cap dimensions will be calculated and compared with the minimum value entered here. A distance from the column face to the cap edge smaller than this minimum value will not be used by the program. Default Pile Length Enter the Default Pile Length here. Rounding Value for Footing Dimensions and Pile Spacing Footing dimensions and pile spacings will be calculated to be multiples of the value provided in this field. Min. Number of Piles The program will not attempt to use fewer piles than the minimum entered here. Min. Pile Rows (Walls Only) The program will not attempt to use fewer pile rows under walls than the minimum entered here. Ignorable Moment for Single Row Piles Moments less than the value entered here will be ignored for single row piles. Add Column Forces Table to the Report (For All Combinations) Check this box if you require the column forces table included in the report. Add Pile Axial Forces for Critical Combination to the Report Check this box if you require the pile axial forces for the critical combination included in the report.

Report A report of basic information, loading and results is displayed for the calculated number of piles.

Pile Cap Design After completing the parameters in the various tabs of the “Pile Cap Design” dialog you can press the "Calculate" button to determine the number of piles required and the min. and max. pile forces. The results are displayed on the Report tab, from where you can use the “(+) Increase” and “(-) Decrease” buttons to adjust the number of piles used. Note: It is not possible to decrease to less than the original number of piles calculated. In other words, “(+) Decrease” can only be used to reduce an “(+) Increase”. After completing the design of the pile cap, press the “OK” button to close the “Pile Cap Design” dialog and complete its insertion.

Piled Rafts Before defining a Piled Raft:

Insert Pile

1. The building model must be completed and analysed, so that the column axial loads and moments are determined. 2. The foundation storey (Storey 0) must be set as the current storey.

Piled Raft Insertion To define a new Piled Raft: 1. Define slabs to form the raft at the “Storey 0” level. For assistance on slab insertion techniques, you can refer to Slab Insertion Methods. You can select any slab type e.g. “1” for all slabs as Slab Type code is not important. 2. Select the slabs for insertion of piles (More than one slab can be selected by holding the “Ctrl”). 3. Right-click to display the shortcut menu and select “Insert Pile” option. 4. Click a suitable axis intersection as the pile reference point. 5. The “Pile Properties” dialog will be displayed. Define the appropriate parameters in the dialog and press the “OK” button to position the piles within the slabs.

Editing Existing Piles To edit an existing raft: 1. Select the piles to be edited, 2. Right-click and select "Properties" from the menu. 3. Modify the parameters as required, 4. Press the "OK" button in the "Properties" form to update the selected piles.

Deleting Piles To delete piles: 1. Select the piles to be deleted, 2. Right-click and select "Delete" from the menu.

Pile Properties The "Pile Properties” dialog will be loaded after selecting the "Insert Pile" menu option and choosing a reference point. There are four headings in this dialog named “Pile Parameters”, “Pile Insertion”, “Vertical Loading Pile Safe Working Load” and “Lateral Loading Pile Safe Working Load”. When the dialog is closed using the “OK” button, the pile(s) will be inserted.

Pile Parameters The "Pile Parameter " area contains the following fields: Pile Type “Circular” and “Square” piles can be created. Pile Diameter (d) This is diameter of a circular pile or length of side of a square pile. Pile Penetration Depth (p) This is the depth the pile penetrates into the pile cap. Pile Length (L) This is the length of the pile. Pile-Edge Min. Distance Piles will not be placed closer to the edge of the slab than than this minimum distance. Pile Spring Co-efficient This is dependent on ground conditions and the pile type. It is entirely up to the user to input a reasonable value and specialist advice may be required.

Pile Insertion The fields in this area will vary depending on if you are inserting new piles or editing the properties of existing piles. Eccentricities (Ex, Ey) When inserting new piles: Ex and Ey are the eccentricities in x and y from the reference point. Pile Spacings (Sx, Sy) Sx and Sy spacings are required when inserting new piles on a rectangular pattern. For a hexagonal pattern only Sx is required. Angle This is the angle on plan used to define the x direction for pile spacings. Generation Pattern “Rectangular” and “Hexagonal” pile patterns can be created.

Pile Safe Working Load The compression and tension safe working loads for vertical combinations will be factored by 1.4 (BS8110) or 1.25 (EC) in the design.

Piled Raft Design After completing the placement of piles in the raft, in order to determine the individual pile loads the next stage is to perform an FE analysis of the foundation. For details refer to FE Analysis of Foundations. On completion of the FE analysis the calculated pile loads are checked against the pile safe working loads (factored in the vertical case) and each pile is given a pass or fail status.

Related Articles: FE Analysis of Foundations Defining/ Editing a Slab Pad Bases Pile Caps Strip Footing Raft Foundation Design

Merging of Building Foundations Structures above a certain size are likely to contain expansion joints in order to prevent damage caused by expansion and differential movement. Although ProtaStructure enables the user to apply modelling options such as “Slabs to Define Rigid Diaphragms” to analyse such structures, it may be better to split them into separate models at the expansion joints so that each model can be analysed individually. (One of the reasons for that is to ease the controls required by the Earthquake codes in seismic regions). However, if this solution technique is adopted a potential problem arises, that is, in practice building foundations are cast together covering all the structure. To get around this ProtaStructure provides a powerful option to merge together previously analysed projects to enable the design of a common foundation. Merged projects depend on the original projects dynamically. Whenever the analysis results of the original projects are altered these modified results will also be applied to the foundation project as soon as the project is re-opened. Merging of Building Foundations is achieved as follows: 1. Prior to the merging process each of the blocks separated by the expansion joint must be modelled and analysed as an individual project. Note that the loading combinations and units system used in each project must be same.

2. Open one of these projects by using the “Open Project” option. From now on we will refer to this project as the “First Model”. 3. Select the “Load Building Model” option in the “Model/File Import” menu of the “File” pulldown. 4. The “Merging/Linking Building Models” dialog will be loaded. In this dialog, select the other project to be merged with the first model using the drop down “Project:” list. This project will be referred to as the “Second Model”. 5. Enter a character in the “Block Character” field. If the “Add Block Character to Column Labels” option is selected then this character will be added to the column labels of the second model. Otherwise, the “Do Not Replace the Column Labels” option is to be selected. 6. Press the “Load Model” button in “Merging/Linking Building Models” dialog. Column and walls of the second model will be displayed on the screen in a faded form. This is the original position of the second model. You can change it by the method explained in Steps 7 and 8. 7. If the position of the columns and walls are correct press the “Finish” button to complete the merging process. Otherwise, you can use “Drag Two Points” to move the model. Drag a line defining the offset amount and direction in plan view. Note that new Dx and Dy values will appear in the corresponding fields. Alternatively, you can directly enter Dx and Dy values. 8. Press the “Move Model” button to position your second model. 9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 until the second model is in the proper position. 10. Press the “Finish” button to complete the merging process. 11. Two projects will be displayed on the screen. By selecting the “Storey 0”, you can then proceed to define pad base, strip footing or raft foundations.

Related Articles: Import and Export (Overview) Load Building Model (Import) External Reference Drawing (Import) Pad Bases Pile Caps Strip Footing Raft Foundation Design Piled Rafts

Reports and Quantity Extraction (Contents) The various reports can be produced using the Report Manager within ProtaStructure are described in this section.

In addition to that Quantity Extraction Tables can be used to view, edit, and print the related quantity estimations. The generated reports can be exported to PDF, MS Words, Image or Web.

Related Articles: Report Manager Quantity Extraction Tables

Report Manager Report Button

Manager

The “Report Manager” is designed to collect and concatenate reports created using the modules.

The Report Manager is the central report manager where all analysis and design reports can be accessed and managed. It can be found from the File pulldown menu. Alternatively, you can find it from the file toolbars above the structure tree. Reports can be created from each of the modules. The main reports are formatted and consist of a header & footer and a main body containing text, graphics and/or tables. The report can be configured and printed, or it can saved for later printing via the “Report Manager”. In the top menu, there are 3 tabs, namely, Report Sets, Reports, and Header Settings tabs. The functions of the buttons in those tabs will be explained in the following subsections.

Report manager

Report Sets Tab The report sets allows the user to create the combined reports. The users can choose and add the available reports to the report sets

Current Set This can be used to select and list the existing report sets. The contents of the selected report sets will be display on the left panel.

View It combines all reports in the selected report set sequentially and views the report set. The generated report can be printed or exported to other formats. Options also exist for exporting the report to different formats as below: 1. PDF – Exports the document content to portable document format; and 2. To Office – Exports the document content to MS Word 97-2003 (.doc) or MS Word 2007 (.docx) format 3. To Image – Exports the document to one of the image formats 4. To Web – Exports the document to “Hyper Text Markup Languange (HTML)’ or Web Archive (MHT)’ format.

Combined report

New It creates a new blank report set. After this button is clicked, the user has to assign a “Report Set Name” for the new report set.

Delete It can be used to delete the current report set.

Add All Available It adds all available reports in the reporsitory to the selected report set.

Add All Reports It adds all reports in the reports in the repository to the selected report set.

Reports Tab New Report from File It creates a new report from a Word Document (.docx) or Rich Text File (.rtf). Thr original file is converted to RTF and copied to the local project folder.

Delete Report It can be used to delete the selected report

Expand All All category groups in the middle frame can be expanded by pressing this button.

Collapse All All category groups in the middle frame can be collapsed by pressing this button.

Header settings Tab Use QR Code It generates a QR Code using the user licence information and automatically inserts it in the header. It can be used where authentications is required in project submission. RTF files of all reports are automatically regenerated for this setting to take effect.

Load Logo

It can be used to load a jpeg, png, bmp or gif file from the disk. Maximum file size is 1MB. The loaded picture is scaled and used as the company logo in the report header. RTF files of all reports are automatically regenerated for this setting to take effect.

Clear Logo It clears the loaded company logo. RTF files of all reports are automatically regenerated for this setting to take effect.

Report Set Contents (Left Panel) The left hand pane contains a list of all the reports that are automatically produced and also reports that are included in the selected report set

Insert Table of Contents If this button is activated by clicking, it will automatically generate and insert a table of contents using heading styles in the selected report set.

Insert Summary Report If this button is activated by clicking, it will automatically create a summary of notifications and add to the combined report.

Move Up It can be used to move the selected report up in the list.

Move Down It can be used to move the selected report down in the list.

Delete Report It can be used to delete the selected report from the current report set.

List of Reports (Middle Panel) The middle panel contains a list of organized and grouped reports in the various folders. You can expand or collapse the main folders by clicking on topics.

Notifications (Right Panel) The Rright hand panel contains Notifications such as warnings and failure in any of the design checks.

Show/Hide Errors Show or hide the errors in the notification list.

Show/Hide Warnings Show or hide the warnings in the notificaition list.

Show/Hide Messages Show or hide the messages in the notification list.

Related Articles: Reports and Quantity Extraction

Quantity Extraction Tables

Concrete and formwork quantity estimations can be created at any time, either by clickin “Quantity Extraction Tables” icon, or by using the related menu selection under the "File" pulldow Using these options, related quantity estimations can be viewed, edited, printed and (depending on the table chosen) the information can be exported to PDF, MS Words, Image or Web. Concrete Quantity Extractions When the "Concrete Quantity Extractions" table is selected, a summary report tabulating the total amount of concrete used in the building can be created using the "Create Report" button. The total volume of concrete used in columns, beams and slabs is displayed respectively for each storey separately. In addition to the concrete breakdown, the total volume of filler blocks used in ribbed slabs is also calculated and displayed. A detailed breakdown of the concrete quantities can then be obtained using the "Report" button. The only report format supported for Concrete Quantity Extractions is the ProtaStructure Report. Formwork Estimations When the "Formwork Quantity Table” is selected a summary report tabulating the total area of formwork required for the building can be created using the "Create Report" button. The total area of formwork used in columns, beams and slabs is displayed respectively for each storey separately. A detailed breakdown of the formwork quantities can then be obtained using the "Report" button. The only report format supported for Formwork Quantity is the ProtaStructure Report.

Related Articles: Report Manager

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS INSTALLATION

Latest Release Software Download The latest version: ProtaStructure 2016 Service Pack 8.2 Please download installation setup from this link : https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B7j9oWUeAUmdcTRnUXg0QmNrSmc or One drive link: https://1drv.ms/u/s!AsDF0YXpCN6xuT0S6ES4Bane4xMz

Previous Version: ProtaStructure 2016 Service Pack 6 Please download installation setup from this link : https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B7j9oWUeAUmdLVBVNTdmM2psR1k

IMPORTANT! Please ensure you have a valid maintenance program before installing the ProtaStructure 2016 as new activation code is required. Please first ascertain the type of license you have & refer to the correct installation steps : A. Standalone Hardware Lock USB lock can be used in any computer & does not have the word "NW" in the label tag. B. Network Hardware Lock The usb lock must be plugged to the server & has a “NW” label in the label tag. C. Network Sotware Lock No physical usb device is given. The license is activated in the registry of the server.

A.

Standalone Hardware Lock Installation 1. Uninstall any previous versions of ProtaStructure 2016 (for pre-release users) o

ProtaStructure 2015 need not be uninstalled. Please read FAQ below

2. Install the downloaded ProtaStructure 2016 using all default options 3. Plug in the hardware key 4. Start ProtaStructure 2016 5. Choose Hardware Lock in License Activation Options menu 6. Copy & paste the Product Activation menu (Print Screen) showing clearly the hardware key Serial number & Request code (example shown below)

1. Send it to [email protected] 2. Once you receive the Activation Code, copy & paste it the dialog box and choose Activate.

Important Note: If you are exisitng ProtaStructure 2015 user(s), you have to repair the ProtaStructure 2015 after the installation of ProtaStructure 2016. Please refer to the FAQ below.

B. Network Hardware Lock Installation Install & Activate ProtaStructure 2016 in the server : 1. Sit in front of the server where the network hardware key is plugged 2. Install the downloaded ProtaStructure 2016 using all default options 3. Start ProtaStructure 2016 4. Choose Hardware Lock in License Activation Options menu 5. Copy & paste the Product Activation menu (Print Screen) showing clearly the hardware key Serial number & Request code (example shown below)

1. Send it to [email protected] 2. Once you receive the Activation Code, copy & paste it the dialog box and choose Activate Install ProtaStructure 2016 in all user (client) computers : 1. Uninstall any previous versions of ProtaStructure 2016 (for pre-release users) o

ProtaStructure 2015 need not be uninstalled. Please read FAQ below

2. Install the downloaded ProtaStructure 2016 o

Enter the IP Address of the server in the Floating Network License Details menu

o

Default port is 1245. Ensure the port is not blocked.

3. Start using ProtaStructure 2016 Important Note: If you are exisitng ProtaStructure 2015 user(s), you have to repair the ProtaStructure 2015 after the installation of ProtaStructure 2016. Please refer to the FAQ below.

C. Network Software Lock Installation Install & Activate ProtaStructure 2016 in the server : 1. Sit in front of the server where ProtaStructure 2015 was activated previously 2. Install the downloaded ProtaStructure 2016 using all default options 3. Start ProtaStructure 2016 4. Choose Software Lock in License Activation Options menu

5. Copy & paste the Product Activation menu (Print Screen) showing clearly the Serial number & Request code (example shown below)

1. Send it to [email protected] 2. Once you receive the Activation Code, copy & paste it the dialog box and choose Activate Install ProtaStructure 2016 in all user (client) computers : 1. Uninstall any previous versions of ProtaStructure 2016 (for pre-release users) o

ProtaStructure 2015 need not be uninstalled. Please read FAQ below

2. Install the downloaded ProtaStructure 2016 o

Enter the IP Address of the server in the Floating Network License Details menu

o

Default port is 1245. Ensure that the port is not blocked.

3. Start using ProtaStructure 2016 Important Note: If you are exisitng ProtaStructure 2015 user(s), you have to repair the ProtaStructure 2015 after the installation of ProtaStructure 2016. Please refer to the FAQ below.

FAQ : Do I need to uninstall ProtaStructure 2015 before installing 2016? No, you do not need to uninstall ProtaStructure 2015. ProtaStructure 2016 and ProtaStructure 2015 can be installed and used in the same computer. However, a repair of ProtaStructure 2015 is required after the installation of ProtaStructure 2016 : 1. Go to Control Panel > Add Remove Program / Programs and Feature

2. Select ProtaStructure 2015 3. Select Change > Repair

FAQ : Can ProtaStructure 2016 open older models saved in 2015 version? Yes, new versions of ProtaStructure can open older versions of the model. However, a re-analysis is required. We recommend that a design check be done as well.

FAQ : Can new models of version 2016 be opened in older ProtaStructure 2015? No. Once the model is saved in 2016 version, it can no longer be opened in any previous version. If you want to retain the analysis & design results of a 2015 version model, please go to File > Save Project As > save it with a new project name in 2016 version. This way, the previous model in version 2015 will not be affected.

Other Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Hardware & System Requirements for ProtaStructure & ProtaDetails Can ProtaStructure & Orion be installed in the same computer? ProtaStructure is not starting – nothing happens ProtaStructure is responding or performing slowly - reasons and solutions

Hardware & System Requirements for ProtaStructure & ProtaDetails Minimum Hardware & System Requirements for ProtaStructure & ProtaDetails: 

Operating System : 32 and 64 bit versions of Windows 7, 8 & 10



At least 1 GB free disk space and 8 GB physical memory (RAM)



A CPU with multi-core support is recommended



A screen resolution of 1280x720 pixels and higher is required



Since ProtaStructure and ProtaDetails make use of latest graphical visualization techniques, a dedicated graphics card supporting OpenGL and DirectX with min 1 GB of video is required



Windows .NET Framework version 4.5 (please turn on Windows auto-update)

For

bigger

models,

we

recommend

a

minimum

12

GB

of

physical

memory.

Related Articles : ProtaStructure is responding or performing slowly - reasons and solutions ProtaStructure is not starting – nothing happens

ProtaStructure is not starting – nothing happens Check if Orion 17 or prior versions is installed in the same PC. Orion 17 (& prior versions) cannot be installed on the same computer with ProtaStructure. If you have installed ProtaStructure without removing Orion 17 then a complete removal and reinstallation is required : 1. Uninstall Orion 17 & prior version 2. Uninstall ProtaStructure 3. Reinstall ProtaStructure Please refer to article “Can ProtaStructure & Orion be installed in the same computer?” for more details.

Related Articles : Can ProtaStructure & Orion be installed in the same computer?

ProtaStructure is responding or performing slowly reasons and solutions If you find ProtaStructure performing or responding slowly, the following are possible reasons and solutions :

The computer does not meet meet the minimum or recommended specifications Check the computer meets the required specification by reading this article : Hardware & System Requirements for ProtaStructure & ProtaDetails

The dedicated grahpics card/processor is not activated or utilised Since ProtaStructure and ProtaDetails make use of latest graphical visualization techniques, a dedicated graphics card supporting OpenGL and DirectX with min 1 GB of video is required. However,

depending on the computer settings, the graphics card may not be activated or utilised by the program (even if it exists). The first step is to check if the graphics card is recognised by the operating system by accessing Windows Control Panel > Device Manager. Ensure that under Display Adapters, the graphics card is listed and also there is no problems reported. It may be necessary (even recommended) to specifically set ProtaStructure (& it's componenets) to use that graphics card when started by : 1. Go to the graphics card control panel. Usually, this can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere on the Desktop and then choose the graphics card control panel. 2. In the "3D Settings" or similar settings, ensure to add the following executable to always use "High Performance processor" : ProtaStructure.exe AnlPostPro1.exe Both of the files are in “C:\Program Files (x86)\Prota\ProtaStructure201x” by default

The antivirus is causing the slow performance The antivirus is a known cause of slow down due to it's constant scanning or monitoring of project files. The easiet and fastest solution is simply to deactivate the antivirus while using the program, especially the "auto-protect" function (you can easily turn it back on after using the program). Alternatively, you can exclude certain folders used by the program from the auto-protect or scanning of the antivirus. This can be done by launching the antivirus interface and excluding the follwing folders: 1. Project data folder (main/parent folder that stores the project folder). o

by default it may be “C:\Users\User\Documents\ProtaData201x”

2. C:\Program Files (x86)\Prota o

default program folder

If excluding the folders does not improve the performance, please deactivate the antivirus completely.

The loaded External Reference Drawing is too big If you have loaded a dxf as reference drawing, the loaded dxf file might to too big and contain many unnecessary entities : 

Completlely switch off / freeze / delete all unnecessary entities such as hatching (especially), title blocks, architectural objects, elevation views, etc from the original dxf before importing the file into ProtaStructure.



If there are several floor layout in a single dxf file, split each floor layout to different dxf files.



As a general guide, limit a single dxf file to a maximum of 1 MB.

For details on this function, read this article : External Reference Drawing (Import)

Power Options By default, the computer power plan may not be set to "High Performance". If the "Power saver" option is selected, then the Graphic Settings will be set to "Maximum Battery Life", i.e. the graphics preformance will be slower. To increase the performance of the graphics: 1. Go to Control Panel\All Control Panel Items\Power Options 2. Select High performance (it may be hidden under the Show additional plans)

Auto Update Adjacent Members By default, this function is activated to check the validity of adjacent members when a new member is created or modified. This also automatically calculate slab loads onto beams. To increase modelling speed, this option can be switched off by clicking on the icon to deactivate it (as shown below)

If this option is switched off while modelling, please switch it back on before running Building Analysis. This is because the slab loads needs to be calculated onto the beams (be patient, it might take some time for this process to complete depending on the size of the model). Further, it is highly recommended that you always perform Building Model Check frequently especially before running Building Analysis.

Related Article : Analysis Building Analysis (Content)

Can ProtaStructure & Orion be installed in the same computer? Orion 18 Orion 18 can be installed with ProtaStructure on the same computer. However, you will need to perform a “Repair” of Orion 18 after the installation of ProtaStructure: 1. Go to Control Panel > Add Remove Programs 2. Look for and select "CSC Orion18" 3. Right-click > Repair

Orion 17 & prior version Orion 17 (& prior versions) cannot be installed on the same computer with ProtaStructure since it is not possible to resolve system conflicts. If you have Orion 17 or prior version , it needs to be uninstalled before installing ProtaStructure. If you have installed ProtaStructure without removing Orion 17 then a complete removal and reinstallation is required : 1. Uninstall Orion 17 and prior version 2. Uninstall ProtaStructure 3. Reinstall ProtaStructure

Windows Socket Error 10048 Trying to Obtain Network Licence

The Windows Socket Error 10048 occurs when an application is unable to open a TCP/IP socket for communications with another application or computer. Normally, this indicates that the TCP/IP protocol is unavailable, or the desired port number for the socket is already in-use. For high traffic scenarios this message shows a problem on the workstation running ProtaStructure. The IP stack can't create additional outgoing TCP/IP connections because it runs out of available socket numbers for the IP address(es) that you have been configured for licence server. This error occurs when your workstation cannot allocate new sockets. On Windows the default limitation is 5000 - 1024 open sockets (5000 is the default max user port setting and the first 1024 ports are reserved). ProtaStructure licence server works on port number 1245 by default. IP is chosen by the client. IP and port numbers can be changed on NetKeyLicenceServer installation and if changed, all client NetKey.ini files must be configured accordingly. As a workaround to this problem: 

Re-start the computer & start the license server again (there might be more than 1 instances of it running). If this does not solve the issue, then proceed to the next step.



Bring up Windows Registry Editor dialog by typing “regedit” in the Run dialog (Can be accessed using “Windows+R” key combination.)



Increase the dynamic port range. The max by default is 5000. You can set this up to 65534. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\Parameters\MaxUserPort



Reduce the time spent in TIME_WAIT state. Default is 4 minutes (240 seconds), but you can set this to 30 seconds. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\Parameters\TCPTimedWaitDelay



The keys inside the “Parameters” node are visible on the right hand side of registry editor as shown below.



If the keys do not exist, right-click on parameters node and add two DWORD (32 bit) values. (MaxUserPort and TcpTimedWaitDelay)



A Registry key can be edited by right-clicking on the key and selecting “Modify”. For MaxUserPort key, Select Decimal and enter 65534 which is the largest available unsigned 4 byte value.

Related Articles: Hardware & System Requirements for ProtaStructure & ProtaDetails ProtaStructure is not starting – nothing happens

Runtime Error 2006: Invalid Tools collection Index If you get this error when starting ProtaStructure, the solution is : 1. Browe to the user roaming profile; typcially it is : C:\Users\\AppData\Roaming\Prota\ProtaStructure\R1\Eng 2. Delete the file GEUsr.TB3 3. Restart the program Note : The file will be re-created. This file holds toolbars information previously set which should be automatically removed when new version is installed.

Related Articles : ProtaStructure is not starting – nothing happens

Lateral Load Notional Load and Input

General 

You will learn how to include the notional load into your model



You will know how to view the applied notional load graphically in post analysis

Create Notional Load Cases and Combination 

To add Notional Load to the model, the Notional Load Cases and Load Combinations shall be generated: Run > Building Analysis > Pre-Analysis > Loading Combinations> Loading Generator > Check the Notional Loading

Define the Notional Load Design Parameters 

To check or modify the parameters of Notional Loading: Parameters > Lateral Loading tab

Evaluate the Applied Notional Load 

To evaluate the automatically calculated and applied Notional Load to each storey: Run > Building Analysis > Pre-Analysis > Storey Loads and Parameters



In this case 1.5% of self-weight of each storey is applied at the center of mass (CG) of each storey. o

Total G of the storey 1 = 4757.3 kN

o

Applied Nx = Ny = 4757.3kN * 1.5% = 71.4 kN

o

All CG, Nx and Ny are automatically calculated.

View the Applied Notional Load Graphically 

To check the applied notional load in the Post-Analysis > Model and Analysis Result Display > Click the Nx or Ny from the load cases

Related Articles: Parameters Load Combinations Wind Load Input and Analysis Seismic Load - Basic Guide

Seismic Load - Basic Guide

General 

You will learn how to incorporate the basic seismic loading into your model.



You will know how to view and generate the outputs report

Procedures

Select a Design Code Select an Earthquake Code: Building Analysis > Pre-analysis tab > Parameters > Codes tab > Choose an Earthquake code from the list

Define Load Cases and Combinations Generate the Seismic Loading cases: Loading Combinations > Loading Generator > Check the Seismic Loading > select Equivalent Static load or Modal Response Spectrum

Update the Seismic Design Parameters You can define the seismic parameters by going through all tabs in Seismic Parameters. Seismic Parameters > Parameters Tab, Analysis, Structural Irregularities or Settings.

You can adjust the number of Vibration modes: Seismic Parameters > Analysis Tab

Define the Live Load Participation Factor You can assign the live load participation factor and number of rigid basements in Building > Edit Storey

Building Analysis You can run the Building Analysis: Building Analysis > Analysis tab > Check Building Analysis > Start

Post-analysis Model and Analysis Result Display Post analysis results can be examined by going to Building Analysis > Post – Analysis tab > Model and Analysis Result Display >Select a model shape or load cases from the right panel.

Figure below shows a typical animated vibration mode 3.

To view the post analysis reports: Building Analysis > Reports > Post Analysis Checks Report & Eigenvalue results report

Note: Additional Detailing for DCM and DCH are still under development. Users have to make necessary their own adjustments on the detailing if the DCM or DCH is selected. For more details, please refer to EC8 Part 5.

Related Articles: Wind Load Input and Analysis Notional Load and Input

Wind Load Input and Analysis There are 2 methods of defining lateral or wind loads: 1. Through the Storey Load Editor 2. Using Column Nodal loads

Method 1: Storey Load Editor If you want to insert wind load using Storey Loads Editor then Wind load should be applied at the centre of building elevation (see figure below).

ProtaStructure will automatically distribute the wind load to the centre of diaphragm of each tower – the magnitude of the distribution is proportional to the mass of each floor. Tower with bigger members and larger slab would have a higher mass and hence will attract more wind load. The wind loads, namely Wx and Wy are defined as point loads on each storey. The coordinates (X, Y) of the applied wind loads are measured from (0, 0) - NOT from the bottom left corner (axes intersection) of the model.

Note: The Notional Horizontal Loads are applied at the centre of mass (CG) of the floor, whereas the Wind Loads should be applied at the centre of the building elevation. See example below assuming that the 2 towers have the same mass. i. In order to add Wind Load to the model, you should generate the Wind Load Cases and Load Combinations: Run > Building Analysis > Pre-Analysis > Loading Combinations> Loading Generator > Check the Wind Loading

Tip: The Load cases can be modified in the Load case Editor (Run > Building Analysis > Pre-Analysis > Loading Combinations> Load Cases > Choose the Load case > Click Edit). For example, the default labels of wind load cases in x and y directions are R x and Ry. The user can modify them to Wx and Wy in the load case editor.

ii. To apply the Wind Load to each storey: Run > Building Analysis > Pre-Analysis > Storey Loads and Parameters

iii. To check the exact magnitude of wind load applied on each tower, you would need to go to the Post-Analysis > Model and Analysis Results Display --> choose the load case say W y and then look at the nodal loads applied (as shown below)

The 2 towers will still behave independently. The limitation of this method is that you cannot control the value of load on each tower. If you want more control then the other method (Method 2) is to apply column nodal load onto specific columns.

Method 2: Column Nodal Loads To assign the column / Wall nodal loads: 1. Select a column or multiple select columns you want to apply the nodal load 2. Right click and select Add Column/ Wall Nodal Load > choose Apply to Selected Columns/ Walls 3. In the Nodal Load > Choose say the relevant load case you want to include this load. This may be any existing load case or the new load case which you have added above. 4. Enter value for Fx (+ve to the right on the plan view), Fy (+ve upwards on the plan view). Explanation on sign convention is automatically shown at the bottom of the menu 5. To check which column you have entered nodal load, simply place your mouse cursor over the column and the information will be shown. 6. If you rerun Building Analysis and check go to Model and Analysis Results, you should notice that there is effect due to the nodal loads you have applied if you choose the relevant Load Case under Result tab (display displacement or BMD)

Example below: i. Total Wy = 100 kN, i.e 25 kN for each column at the wind face

ii. Run Building Analysis > Model & Analysis Results Display to check the analytical model and assumptions.

Related Articles: Notional Load and Input Seismic Load - Basic Guide

Guidelines when creating grid lines in ProtaStructure Every element which is created in ProtaStructure is attached to Grid Lines; the importance of a simple clear grid system is essential to producing a manageable and accurate model. The more complicated the axis system the more likely errors are to occur; the golden rule is 'Keep It Simple'. Make reference to the following guidelines when creating gridlines:

1. Try to avoid axis that are very close together Since member insertion is based on axes intersection, having too many axes that are too close together may result in picking the wrong intersection of axes when creating members.

2. Use as few axes as possible For the same reason above, model only the necessary axes. Note that it is the structural behaviour that is important, hence small architectural offsets discrepancies will have negligible difference. For example it would be unreasonable to model 2 parallel axes with only 20mm between them - where a single axis would suffice.

3. Keep axis short and localized to the place where it is used For the same reason above, this is to avoid too many axes intersection. Note that you automatically shorten axes by selecting axes > right-click > Stretch Axis to Member Insertion

4. Set Unused Axes to Ghost to clear the clutter in the view Highlight the folder Axis in the Structure Tree > right click and choose Set Unused Axis to Ghost (ALL Storeys) to clear the clutter in view. For the same purpose you can turn off the axis label by going to the axes properties and click on the balloon.

5. Perform 'Building Model Check' before running Building Analysis Building Model Check will check for commons errors for axes. The following axes errors are explained : Axis Intersection Proximity Check: Intersection: A-1 and B-1 too close... (d= 17.27 mm) Reason : This means that there are intersection of axes that are too close to each other (less than 20mm). As explained above, having too many axes intersection too close too each other increases the likelihood of using the wrong intersection. Check the members are using the correct intersection if the situation is unavoidable (and ignore this warning). Alternative, update the coordinate of the ends of the axes by selecting the axis > righ-click > Edit Axis End Point > pick the new position of end point of the axes.

Slightly Non-orthogonal Axes (Angle < 0.1 deg): Landscape Axis:A1 - (Delta-Y = 1 mm, L = 20000 mm, Angle ...Completed... Error Count= These axes can be rectified by using the 'Edit' pulldown menu.

=

0.00286

d) 1

Reason : "Almost" vertical and horizontal axes having angles not exactly 0 and 90 degrees will be flagged (eg. 0.002degrees). It is best to avoid this in the first place when creating axes. Existing axes with such issues can be auto-fixed by going to Edit (top menu) > Fix the Almost-Orthogonal Axes

Flat Slab Guideline

Flat Slab Insertion methods 

For flat slab, it is unlikely that your slab would be fully bounded/surrounded by beams, hence the more appropriate method would be “Axis Region” or “Pick Axis”.



For Axis Region, you simply click on any point bounded by axis and a slab will be automatically with those axis as insertion axis. You can combine them by holding down the CTRL key while clicking successively locations and a single slab panel will be created after you release the key.



For Pick Axis method, simply hold down the CTRL key while picking on the axes that bound the slab, then click “New Slab Panel”. For more information, please refer to Working with Axes section.



When inserting slabs for flat slab, make sure that all columns and shear walls lies at the edges or corners of the slab.

In other words: 1. The slab boundary must coincide with the insertion axis of column/wall. For example, if the insertion axis of the column is A/1 then the slab boundary at the column must be either axis A or axis 1. 2. Try to keep your slab four-sided, i.e. rectangular or squarish. 3. For raft, its slab type does not matter as it is only applicable for slabs designed using yield line, i.e. normal slab strip

Flat Slab Reinforcement Design 

The preferred method to show reinforcement for flat slab is to “User Defined Contours” or "Threshold Contour" as explained in the Flat Slab Training and The Floor Analysis PostProcessor



Alternative, you can try to show rebars on the model plan view but it is important that you define and cut the correct Finite Element Slab Strip – for you model that would be “Fixed Widh

Band strip”. More details are available under Slab Strip Type (Working with Slab Strips and Finite Element (FE) Strip sections) 

“Fixed width band strip”, will take a single max positive and negative moment to design for the entire length and width of a strip. Hence you only get one top and bot reinforcement, with may lead to some overdesign if the width of the strip is too large. Hence, you need to examine or evaluate how wide and how many fixed width band strip you want to cut as that has an influence on how efficient the steel design is.



In the FE tab of the FE slab strip, there is an option to use "integral". As the name implies, the moments across the width of the strip is “averaged out” or “spread out” by integration so that a lower maximum moment is obtained. This assumes that the slab is sufficient stiff so that the load tend to “distribute itself” across a certain width. With “integral” unchecked, Orion scans for a single max moment to design across the span and support region.



Please be aware that cutting strips may not be able to give you full solution, you will still need to combine or supplement it by investigating the steel contours.

In a nutshell, you will need to insert: a) Model/define slabs b) Cut FE Strip across of the appropriate type (refer to more notes below)

Above : choose fixed band strip in FE Slab Strip properties. Check “Integral Strip”

Above : Cut strip through top columns. Change Extents Left (top) to O and Right (bottom) to 2000 (quarter of panel width)

Cut second strip across columns now with left and right extent set to 2000 mm

Cut the middle strip and adjust the left and right extents so that is coincides exactly with the extent of the other strip, ie. no overlapping of strip widths. Do for the left extent and then the right extent using the procedure shown above.

c) Run FE Floor Analysis > Post Analysis Processes and Reports > Analysis Post-Processing d) Run > Slab Design and Analysis (or select a particular slab strip > Right Click > Arrange All Steel Bars> Update All Steel Bars)

Make sure that everything is fine, i.e. mesh generated is reasonable by checking following in the postprocessor: a) If you have defined your slab edges correctly, you will notice that edges of shell elements coincide perfectly on the red dot represented by the column and shear walls. b) The edges of shell element of one slab coincide perfectly with that of the adjacent slab.

Column Puching Shear Design 

Finally, do not forget to check for punching shear. Try not to run all the columns punching shear shear check altogether, as you need to define the correct type of column location (interior, edge, column).



To do this, you can select a group of columns having the same type location by successively selecting each column while holding down the ctrl key.



Then right click and choose 'Column Punching Check'.



Be reminded you must first run FE floor analysis and post processing, and click 'merge column results with building analysis results' so that slab loads based on FE analysis are transferred to the columns.



Otherwise column punching will be based on building analysis (i.e yield line slab analysis) rather the FE floor analysis.



You should not perform punching shear check for the columns connected to beam as you will need to design the beam to take the shear.



Protastructure does not take into account any beam connected to a column for punching shear check.

Drop panels can be inserted added through the column properties > Drop tap. Note the depth of the drop panel defined as h-Head is inclusive of the slab thickness, NOT measured from soffit of slab. Note that drop panels works best to improve punching shear capacity. They are less effective in reducing moment at the column as a thicker section may attract more moment, hence only model drop panel if punching shear is a problem.

Define Slanted/Inclined Beam All structural members are inserted based on axis intersections as an insertion reference. At least two axes of different direction code (namely 1 and 2) must intersect at every insertion point. In order to define a beam that is inclined along the storey levels, “delZ-i” and/or “delZ-j” fields in the 3D tab must be changed. There are three methods to create the inclined beam:

Method 1 You can create the inclined beam in the 3D graphical editor by simply picking two insertion points.

You can pick two member insertion points

You can pick the smart point on the member (see object snap to switch on/off the smartpoint)

You can hold down the CTRL and the insertion points will be available at a length step of 100 mm (can be adjusted in Settings> General Settings).

Method 2 After you insert the beam on a plan view. You can manually modify the “Del-z (I)” and “Del-z (J)”fields in “3D” page of the “Beam Properties” form. In order to change these values: 1. Select an existing beam. 2. Right-click and select “Properties”. 3. Click on “3D” tab. 4. Write the relative height from the storey level in “Del-z (I)” and “Del-z (J)”fields. (Negative values will lower the beam end with respect to storey level while positive values will elevate it). 5. Press “Update” button. Note: Positive and negative delZ values will raise and lower the elevation of beam respectively. For more information, please refer to "Beam Properties" section.

Method 3 Plane members can be used to modify more than one beam at once. In addition, a plane member may have a certain inclination and it can force the linked beams to obey the plane definition. For more information, please refer to "Working with Planes" section.

Define Slanting/Sloping Column and Wall All structural members are inserted based on axis intersections as an insertion reference. At least two axes of different direction code (namely 1 and 2) must intersect at every insertion point. Labels of the reference axes will be displayed in “Top” and “Bot” fields on “Column Properties” or “Wall Properties” form. Same axes intersections will be written in these fields when the column/wall is first defined. In this case column/wall will be placed vertically along the storey levels.

In order to define a column/wall that is inclined along the storey levels, “Top” and “Bot” fields must be changed.

Method 1 To change the insertion axes written in the “Top” and “Bot” fields; 1. Click on one of the axis label shown on the “Top” and “Bot” fields. The color of the label will turn red. 2. Click on the new axis on plan window. You can also pick the appropriate axis among the “Members” list that is activated when double-clicked or right-clicked on the axis labels in “Top” and “Bot” fields. 3.

Press “Update” button.

Method 2: Pick Bottom Insertion Point

You can also use “Pick Bottom Insertion Point” button to change the bottom insertion point of the column/wall. (see screenshot) For this purpose, pick the appropriate axis intersection on plan or 3D window after you clicked on the “Pick Bottom Insertion Point” button.

Define Wall Span Loads Defining Column/Wall Span Loads User-defined varying distributed lateral loads can be applied to individual column and wall spans. As an alternative to defining wind load by means of user-defined lateral loads applied at the diaphragm/free joint(s), similar loads can be applied as individual column/wall nodal loads (force or moment) to columns/walls. Note: The currently specified Load Combination must include lateral load cases if you intend to apply column span loads. To define span loads for column/wall members: 1. Select single or multiple column/wall members you want to assign the span loads to. 2. Select the “Add Column/Wall Span Load” option located in shortcut (right-click menu). 3. The “Span Load” form will be loaded.

4. Press the “Add” button to add a row into the table. 5. Click in the Load Case cell and use the drop down button to select the lateral load case in which to place the load. 6. Define the loads and dimensions as per the diagram below.

7. Close the form by pressing “OK” button. The entered values will be assigned to column/wall as span loads. To check whether there is a span load defined on a column/wall, hover on the element with the mouse. The“Column Tooltip Window” will include the span load information as well.

Difference between Building Analysis and FE Floor Analysis Building Analysis (BA) results is incorrect for flat slab/partial flat slab system for vertical loads (G+Q) because BA model a beams + columns analysis model. The slab itself is excluded in the analysis model : the slab load is merely broken down (decomposed) onto the beams (by yieldline or FE Floor Analysis for Beam Loads). However, BA analysis has to be run to obtain the Fx and Fy results since FE Floor Analysis only deals with vertical loads. Hence, finally the complete results for flat slab systems would be obtain from combination of FE Floor Analysis for vertical loadcases (G+Q) and from BA for horizontal load case (Fx + Fy) FE Floor Analysis (Gravity Load Chasedown) method is specially catered for flat slab system (no beams to carry loads to columns). For FE Floor Analysis, beams + columns + slabs are all considering in the analysis model by meshing. Since FE Floor Analysis can only consider one floor at a time, in order to accumulate the columns loads you need to do a chasedown process. This method can be chosen to override Building Analysis Result. Hence you can ignore the axial load comparison warning (if any) pertaining to Building Analysis and proceed to perform a FE Gravity Load Chase down by:

1. Run Building Analysis (must run at least once for the model, ignore axial load comparison warning first) 2. Please note that the Chasedown Procedure can be automated in the FE Floor Analysis screen. However, the following shows the manual steps. 3. Go to FE Floor Analysis > Select topmost storey from the dropdown menu 4. FE Floor Analysis > Mesh generation > Analysis. (Make sure to check Include upper column loads even for the top storey. Use a reasonable no. of plates and perhaps change the mesh uniformity factor to 80 (to get more uniform mesh) 5. Analysis Post-Processing is optional. Go in if you want to look at the results then go out. Transfer Option > OK. 6. Repeat step 2 : Go to FE Floor Analysis > Select next lower storey from the dropdown menu. 7. Do the same process until you reach ST01 (The FE Floor Chasedown can be completed automated) 8. Check option “Merge Column Result with Building Analysis result”. This means that column loads will now use FE Analysis Chasedown result instead of Building Analysis Result. 9. Check option “Merge Beam Result with Building Analysis result” (Optional – if there are occasional beams in the flat slab) After completing the FE Gravity Load Chasedown correctly, click on the Axial Load Comparison Report, scroll to the 2nd page. Notice that a Sum Finite Element Shearwall/Column Loads table is added. Check that the total loads are close to that of Sum of Undecomposed Slab Loads to ensure that no loads are lost.

Export to Revit

ProtaBIM: Revit2016 ftp://[email protected]/PSRelease/ProtaBIM2016_sp0_rvt2016.exe Revit2015 http://protasoftware.com/plumbing/downloader.ashx?file=ProtaBIM2015_sp1_rvt2015.exe Special Note: Please use the Revit 2016 if you have column drop panel/ column head. usr: pwd: Uvpsc*1234*

Alternatively, you can download them from Google Drive:Revit2016 https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B7j9oWUeAUmdVWpyMzRaR25CYjA

downloader

Revit2015 https://drive.google.com/open?id=0B7j9oWUeAUmdQ2c4RVlwZFFFSVk

Important Note: 

ProtaBIM for Revit only works if “Structural Discipline” is installed and selected during installation of Revit.



During Autodesk installation, Revit installer asks for the disciplines. Structural must be checked.



The plugin will not be visible for “Architectural” or other disciplines.



Please make sure that the computer is using Revit with structural configuration.

Installation 1. When you install, it automatically registers itself for Revit. 2. DLL file is installed on “C:\Program Files(x86)\Prota\ProtaBIM2015” by default. 3. “.addin” manifest file is created under “C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\Revit\Addins\2015” and “..\2016” 4. We have tested it on Revit2015 & expect it to work for 2016 as well.

Usage 1. When you run Revit, you should create new project using “ProtaStructure_Metric” template file. All related families are pre-loaded in this template. Otherwise import will fail. This step is vital. 2. It is located under “My Documents\ProtaBIMDocs\Templates” (For ProtaBIM2015 version) or “My Documents\ProtaLib\Templates” (For ProtaBIM2016 version) 3. If all goes right, you should be seeing “ProtaBIM” Ribbon tab on Revit toolbar. 4. Click on “Import From ProtaStructure” and show the “.prota” file of any existing PS project. 5. Import starts and logs the messages and errors. 6. After dialog is closed, Revit continues to regenerate members. This can take time for large models.

7. If you import the same model again or any other model, you should start with a new blank project.

Notes 

CXL file is not used any more. Because of technical problems (build errors) we removed CXL export from PS.



Segmented grids and arcs are not supported.



Curved beams are supported.



Slanted Walls not supported.



Polyline columns are not supported.



Steel members are exported as UB and UC ( with correct dimensions.)



Material grades are exported.



Frame Member fixities are exported and written on Revit analytical wire.

Information for Wind Tunnel Test 1. You can find the information of Level, Height, Elevation, Mass.Mass Moment of Inertia, and Centre of mass from Building analysis > “Reports” tab> Post analysis Check report. 2. For the displacements( dx and dy) and rotation (Rz) of all modes, please go to Building analysis> Post analysis tab> Model and Analysis Results Display

i.

For the displacements in x and y directions, you can Select the mode shape from the right panel (see image below) > click the “Displacements” > Click “X” and “Y”, respectively> Read the displacements graphically. Note: You can use the “Filter” in the “General” tab to filter the storey or members if there are too many members.

i.

For the rotation in z, you can Select the Mode Shape from the right panel (see image below)> Click the “Properties” on the “Results” tab > select a Node around the centre of diaphragm > read from the list.

How to Create the mode displacement of center of mass diaphragm excel csv file: 

Load your project (that has an eigenvalue analysis) > Building Analysis > Post Analysis > Analysis Model & Results.



Press and hold-down Ctrl and Shift keys together



Pick a mode shape. A message will appear indicating the txt file has been created in the folder (as below)



Release the keys.



Repeat step 2 to 4 for other mode shapes..



The diaphragm displacements of the selected loading will be printed to the respective “csv” file.



Explore using windows explorer and Double-click the file to open it in Excel.